JP2020078366A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that increases interest of a performance using a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display.SOLUTION: A performance control CPU, when executing a first change suggestion performance in which a movable body 01TM050 and a flame effect act on an active display 01TM001, executes a blackout performance and displays a dark image 01TM150 to lower the visibility of the image related to a battle performance and make it difficult to view, and executes the first change suggestion performance in the difficult-to-view state to change the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from a normal mode to a red mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14-5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine is proposed in which pending information is enlarged while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the pending information changes from a normal mode to a special mode.

JP-A-2005-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34)

  In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the enjoyment of the production using the correspondence display corresponding to the variable display such as the hold information.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of production using a correspondence display corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means V1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). As a result, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in the visually difficult state).
further,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(D) or FIG. 8-2(F). Part to display the title of reach production),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (A part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the reach D)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause an unexpectedness and improve the interest. Moreover, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means V2 is
A gaming machine of means V1,
A change in which the display mode of the corresponding display (holding display, active display) that is the target of the action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) is changed from the display mode before the action effect is executed. A change effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect is provided,
In the case where the action effect is executed after the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced (when the first change suggestion effect shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5 is executed), and the specific effect display When the action effect is executed without lowering the visibility (when the second change suggestion effect shown in (13) to (15) of FIG. 14-5 is executed), the rate at which the change effect is executed is Differently (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), the display mode of the active display always changes when the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the second change suggestion effect is executed. In some cases, the display mode of active display may not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the effect effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means V3 is
A gaming machine of means V1 or means V2,
The specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is a reproduction display of effect animation (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7), and battles shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17)). It is a series of images regarding production)
The reproduction display period of the effect movie is common regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period of T6 to T12 in which the battle effect is executed is It is common to 1 change suggestion production and 2nd change suggestion production),
The execution period of the action effect is shorter than the reproduction display period of the effect movie, and the action effect ends before the reproduction display period of the effect movie ends (as shown in FIG. The execution period of the change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period of T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed, and the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are performed before the battle effect ends. Change suggestion production ends)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the reproduction display period of the effect movie and the execution period of the action effect, and the display control of the effect movie can be simplified.

The game machine of means V4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means V1 to means V3,
It is possible to execute variable display of production identification information (decorative pattern, small pattern) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special pattern),
As the production identification information, there are first production identification information (decorative pattern) and second production identification information (small pattern),
When executing the action effect, the visibility of the first effect identification information is reduced as the visibility of the specific effect display is decreased, while the visibility of the second effect identification information is decreased. Do not allow (as shown in (8) to (10) in FIG. 14-5), the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect, and the decorative pattern is made in a visually difficult state, while the small pattern Visibility does not decrease)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player appropriately understand that the variable display of the special identification information is continued while enhancing the effect of the effect by reducing the visibility of the specific effect display. .

The game machine of means V5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means V1 to means V4,
The action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) causes an operation prompting display (special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A) that prompts the player to perform an operation at a specific timing (timing T7 after the development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3). And perform any one of a plurality of types of specific effects (first change suggestion effect and second change suggestion effect) according to the operation of the player (first change suggestion effect or second change suggestion effect). Can be executed as the action effect,
The operation promotion display (operation promotion display 01TM031 in the normal mode) is performed at a predetermined timing (timing T2 immediately after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3) different from the specific timing, and a predetermined effect according to the operation of the player ( A predetermined effect executing means (a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a cut-in notice effect),
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed (first change suggestion effect). Alternatively, if either the second change suggestion effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the cut-in notice effect is executed without executing either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect. The percentage of jackpots is higher than if they were played)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation in response to the operation promotion display, the player is interested in whether the specific effect is executed or the predetermined effect is executed, and the interest is improved. be able to.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include the invention related to the following means VA. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-101428, at the start of the reach effect, a title display for informing the type of the reach effect has been performed. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is desired to enhance the effect of presentation, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of presentation.

The game machine of means VA is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(D) or FIG. 8-2(F). Part to display the title of reach production),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (A part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the reach D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the notification of the title can be executed according to the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect is improved.

  Further, as shown in JP-A-2005-084863 (FIGS. 33 and 34), the pending information is enlarged while moving toward the center of the screen, and the mode of the pending information is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. A gaming machine has been proposed. In the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2005-084863 (FIG. 33, FIG. 34), there is room for improving the interest of the effect using the correspondence display corresponding to the variable display such as the hold information. The inventions relating to the means W1 to W6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of the production using the correspondence display corresponding to the variable display.

The gaming machine of the means W1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
Change effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001),
When the change effect is executed, the visibility of the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect can be made higher than the visibility of the specific effect display (FIGS. 14-7 (18) to (19)). As shown in the figure, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is increased by displaying the active display 01TM001 in an enlarged manner in the center of the screen while keeping the reach production image (image relating to the battle production) difficult to visually recognize by the blackout production. (The visual effect of the battle effect) is set higher than that of the visual effect, and the effect of changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is executed in that state)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect rather than the specific effect display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect.

The gaming machine of the means W2,
A gaming machine of the means W1,
The present invention is characterized by including action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) that acts on the corresponding display (hold display, active display).
According to such a configuration, the attraction of the change effect can be further improved by executing the effect effect.

The gaming machine of means W3 is
A gaming machine of means W2,
In the change effect (effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001), the display mode of the corresponding display (holding display, active display) that is the target of the action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) From the display mode before the action effect is executed (as shown in (8) to (10) in FIG. 14-5, the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white circle display) to the red mode). Change to active display 01TM001 (red circle display)),
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). As a result, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in the visually difficult state).
In the case where the action effect is executed after the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced (when the first change suggestion effect shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5 is executed), and the specific effect display When the action effect is executed without lowering the visibility (when the second change suggestion effect shown in (13) to (15) of FIG. 14-5 is executed), the rate at which the change effect is executed is Differently (as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), the display mode of the active display always changes when the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the second change suggestion effect is executed. In some cases, the display mode of the active display may not change)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the player becomes interested in the visibility of the specific effect display when the effect effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means W4,
A gaming machine of means W2 or means W3,
The specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is a reproduction display of effect animation (FIGS. 14-4 (6) and (7), and battles shown in FIGS. 14-5 (13) to (17)). It is a series of images regarding production)
The reproduction display period of the effect movie is common regardless of whether or not the action effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 14-3, the period of T6 to T12 in which the battle effect is executed is It is common to 1 change suggestion production and 2nd change suggestion production),
The execution period of the action effect is shorter than the reproduction display period of the effect movie, and the action effect ends before the reproduction display period of the effect movie ends (as shown in FIG. The execution period of the change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is T8 to T11, which is shorter than the period of T6 to T12 during which the battle effect is executed, and the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are performed before the battle effect ends. Change suggestion production ends)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the reproduction display period of the effect movie and the execution period of the action effect, and the display control of the effect movie can be simplified.

The gaming machine of the means W5,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means W2 to means W4,
It is possible to execute variable display of production identification information (decorative pattern, small pattern) corresponding to variable display of special identification information (special pattern),
As the production identification information, there are first production identification information (decorative pattern) and second production identification information (small pattern),
When executing the action effect, the visibility of the first effect identification information is reduced as the visibility of the specific effect display is decreased, while the visibility of the second effect identification information is decreased. Do not allow (as shown in (8) to (10) in FIG. 14-5), the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect, and the decorative pattern is made in a visually difficult state, while the small pattern Visibility is not changed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player appropriately understand that the variable display of the special identification information is continued while enhancing the effect of the effect by reducing the visibility of the specific effect display. .

The gaming machine of means W6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means W2 to means W5,
The action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) causes an operation prompting display (special mode operation prompting display 01TM031A) that prompts the player to perform an operation at a specific timing (timing T7 after the development of super reach shown in FIG. 14-3). And perform any one of a plurality of types of specific effects (first change suggestion effect and second change suggestion effect) according to the operation of the player (first change suggestion effect or second change suggestion effect). Can be executed as the action effect,
The operation promotion display (operation promotion display 01TM031 in the normal mode) is performed at a predetermined timing (timing T2 immediately after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 14-3) different from the specific timing, and a predetermined effect according to the operation of the player ( A predetermined effect executing means (a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a cut-in notice effect),
When the specific effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed and the specific effect is not executed (first change suggestion effect). Alternatively, if either the second change suggestion effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the cut-in notice effect is executed without executing either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect. The percentage of jackpots is higher than if they were played)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation in response to the operation promotion display, the player is interested in whether the specific effect is executed or the predetermined effect is executed, and the interest is improved. be able to.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-109081 (FIG. 12), the probability setting is changed (setting change) as a pachinko machine in which the probability setting is determined to determine the winning probability in the success/failure determination of a special figure. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a setting change effect that suggests is performed. Further, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-5614 (FIG. 52), a gaming machine is proposed in which, in a high-probability state, a falling lottery is won by a falling-lottery means to shift to a normal probability state. As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-109081 (FIG. 12), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5614 is applied to a game machine that executes control according to a set value that is set among a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage. As shown in the official gazette (FIG. 52), when a configuration for executing a state transition lottery for transitioning a gaming state is applied, there is room for improving the interest of such a gaming machine. The invention relating to the means X1 to the means X6 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to improve the enjoyment of a gaming machine that executes control according to a set value and executes state transition lottery.

The game machine of means X1 is
Of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different degrees of advantage (big hit probability) for the player, a gaming machine capable of executing control according to the set value ( It is a pachinko machine 1),
Game state control means (for game control) that can be controlled to a special state (high-accuracy state) with a high rate of being controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) in which the game medium easily enters the variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) A microcomputer 100),
State transition lottery execution means (game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing state transition lottery (probability variation fall determination) for transitioning the game state in the special state (high-precision state).
Based on the result of the state transition lottery (determined that there is "probable change and fall" in the probable change and fall determination), a setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) that suggests the set value that has been set And a setting suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing.
According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the result of the state transition lottery, thereby performing the control according to the set value and improving the interest of the gaming machine in which the state transition lottery is executed. be able to. In particular, even if the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation by executing the setting suggestion effect.

The game machine of means X2 is
A gaming machine of means X1,
The probability of the state transition lottery (probability variation fall determination) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 14-10, a common probability variation fall determination table is referenced regardless of the currently set setting value. Therefore, the probability of ending the highly accurate state is 1/80 regardless of the set value.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the probability of the state transition lottery is common regardless of the set value, when the set value with a high degree of advantage is set, it is easy to continuously control the advantageous state, The interest of can be improved.

The game machine of means X3 is
A gaming machine of means X1 or means X2,
The setting suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120), the setting value suggested in the setting suggestion production (first setting suggestion production, second setting suggestion production) and the set value set (currently set setting). Multiple types of setting suggestion effects (“reach!!” or “REACH” are displayed as the first setting suggestion effect, “full moon background”, “half moon background”, or “crescent moon background” The second setting suggestion effect) for displaying "
Which of the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects, depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation displays when it is determined to be “probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination) determined to transfer the game state in the state transition lottery The ratio of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect of the type is different (in the first setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-14(A), when the number of times is 50 times or less, the character “reach!!” is displayed. If it is 51 times or more, the character “REACH” is displayed.In the second setting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. If it is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, "half moon background" is displayed, and if it is 61 times or more, "crescent moon background" is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by associating the timing determined to shift the game state in the state shift lottery with the type of setting suggestive effect.

The game machine of means X4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means X1 to means X3,
Any one of the multiple production modes (normal mode (low accurate low base state), battle RUSH mode (high accurate high base state or low accurate high base state), chance time (low accurate high base state)) The production mode control means (CPU 120 for production control) capable of controlling the mode is provided,
The effect mode control means (effect control CPU 120) can control to a predetermined effect mode based on the fact that the game state is decided to be changed in the state shift lottery (probability change fall determination) (FIG. 14- As shown in FIG. 23, it is controlled in the battle RUSH mode (high accuracy high base status) from the high accuracy base state control to the 19th fluctuation display, and the “probability change” judgment is made by the probability change fall judgment corresponding to the 20th fluctuation display. Based on the determination that there is a fall, the battle RUSH mode is ended at the 20th variation display, and the variation display after the 21st time (up to the 100th time is controlled to the chance time),
The setting suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on the fact that the game state is decided to be changed in the state change lottery (as shown in FIG. 14-23, the 20th variation). The battle RUSH mode (low accurate high base state) is ended and the first setting suggestive effect and the second setting are performed on the 20th variation display based on the determination that there is a “probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination corresponding to the display. After executing the suggestive effect, the variation display after the 21st time (up to the 100th time) is controlled to the chance time)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in shifting the game state by associating the effect mode with the setting suggestion effect. In particular, even if the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

The game machine of means X5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means X1 to means X4,
The game state control means (game control microcomputer 100) can control to a specific state (high base state) which is a game state in which variable display is easily executed, and in the state transition lottery executed in the specific state. It is possible to continue the specific state on condition that it is not decided to shift the game state (as shown in FIG. 14-19, the 100th variation display after controlling to the highly accurate high base state). When it is executed, if it is not determined that there is a probability variation fall in any probability variation fall determination executed corresponding to the variation display up to and including the 100th variation display, the 101st variation. Continue the high-precision high-base state after the display),
Continuation suggestion effect that suggests that the specific state (high base state) continues (as shown in FIG. 14-17 (12), a battle corresponding to the 100th variation display that is displayed as “RUSH continues if a draw” A continuous suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect,
When it is decided to shift the game state in the state transition lottery before the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times) in the specific state, the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in the specific state. Until the specified state is continued, and when the predetermined number of times of variable display in the specific state is executed, the continuation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed (as shown in FIGS. When the 100th variation display is executed after controlling to the high base state, any of the certainty variation fall determinations executed corresponding to the variation display up to that time including the 100th variation display indicates “certain variation fallover”. If it is determined to be “Yes”, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect corresponding to the 100th variation display, and also executes the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since both the continuous suggestion effect and the setting suggestive effect may be executed when the predetermined number of times of variable display is executed, it corresponds to the predetermined number of times of variable display. It is possible to particularly pay attention to the performance that is executed as a result.

The gaming machine of means X6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means X1 to means X5,
The ratio at which the specific effect is executed corresponding to the variable display executed when being controlled to the advantageous state is such that the specific effect is executed corresponding to the variable display executed when not being controlled to the advantageous state. 14-12 (A) and (B) as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (B), when the display result is “big hit”, the battle effect is executed more than when the display result is “out”. Is high),
Rate at which the specific effect is executed in response to the variable display executed when it is decided to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (when it is determined that "probability variation fall is present" in the probability variation fall determination) The specific effect is executed corresponding to the variable display executed when it is determined not to shift the game state in the state transition lottery (when it is determined that there is no “probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination). 14-12 (A) to (D), as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) to (D), when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall, the probability variation fall determination is determined to be “no probability variation fall”. The ratio that the battle production is executed is higher than when
The setting suggestive effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the setting suggestive effect during execution of the variable display accompanied by the specific effect (variable display which is determined to be “probable change and fall” in the probability change and fall determination). The first setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect are performed while the battle effect is executed corresponding to the 100th variation display. Setting suggestion production is designed to be executed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the specific effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest when the variable display accompanied by the specific effect is executed. . Further, even if the player is not controlled to the advantageous state and the result of the state transition lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game motivation by executing the setting suggestion effect.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention relating to means A1 to means A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, accumulated balls, etc.) (processing relating to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes accumulated balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
An awarding means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) for giving a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Equipped with
When the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control microcomputer The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the gaming machine frame open sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a connection confirmation command when it is controlled in the setting change mode (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), the payout control is performed. (Even if the microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, it does not turn on the EXS signal.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the gaming control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. And the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the control is controlled to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, since the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Do not lend a ball.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can give a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game controlling means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 for outputting a connection confirmation signal is a setting change). After the mode ends, after the setting confirmation mode ends, is executed on),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The giving means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the game device, and the game device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. The game medium can be added based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
When the control is in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input, 2. Connection confirmation When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4,
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of a game in the gaming machine,
At least one of the game control means and the granting means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened ( A gaming machine frame opening sensor that can detect that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a gaming machine frame that includes a door frame opening sensor that can detect that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or not, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a). Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by
According to this, when the game machine frame or the door frame is opened to control the setting change mode, it is possible to restrict the addition of the game medium.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The grant means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns the EXS signal on) in response to the grant request signal being input from the gaming device (the BRQ signal being turned on), and the grant preparation signal When a grant command signal output from the gaming device in response to an input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the game medium is granted.
When being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the grant preparation signal is not output even if the grant request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even when the ON of the BRQ signal is detected. do not do),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being added while being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch) ) 21TM052 is on), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A6,
When controlled in the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), the game state is initialized. To notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A7,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the game machine.
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device. The inventions relating to the means B1 to B7 are made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holdings, accumulated balls, etc.) (processing relating to ball lending that consumes prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes balls, ball lending that consumes accumulated balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
A predetermined control means (a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
And a setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value,
Regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command can be transmitted, and the payout control for which the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received while the connection confirmation signal is on The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the ball lending irrespective of whether or not the period is controlled in the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid the control load when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control (power interruption, etc.) occurs while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is subsequently controlled, the setting is changed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending when the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and restarts the power supply. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is restarted after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without immediately restarting the ball lending),
It is characterized by
According to this, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the predetermined event occurs.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting control mode is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while executing the predetermined control, the predetermined control is ended (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the execution of the ball lending. When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. The ball lending will not be resumed after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B4,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the set value (after causing the display monitor 21TM029 to blink the set value), it is notified that the game state has been initialized (display Display the letter "C" on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B5,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the game machine.
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the game state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control when the game medium passes through the specific area. The invention relating to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
Based on that the game medium has passed through the specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control according to the set value (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges for jackpot determination random numbers) (special Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing jackpot determination processing in the symbol process processing),
A setting change mode control means capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200);
When the setting change mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The game machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means, when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state). In case), control to the setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state). In case), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in accordance with the condition established when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game state is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after making the display monitor 21TM029 blink the set value), the game state is initialized. To notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can understand that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to C3,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controls the progress of a game in the game machine.
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means further has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value is provided,
When controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed while the set value is being confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear processing of step S21TM1410 is performed only when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute appropriate processing when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means D1 to means D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The game machine of means D1 is
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value.
A setting value storage means for storing the setting value (a setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting value);
The setting change mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch ( The setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), and the setting change mode is controlled.
The setting confirmation mode control means satisfies the first condition (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and does not satisfy the second condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear). The setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the OFF state,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The set value storage means stores the set value before being controlled in the setting change mode while being controlled in the setting change mode (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 before the shift to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without changing with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on). If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the shift to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like in the game arcade can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns on the clear switch 21TM052 to ON state when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control) to control the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed,
It is characterized by
According to this, the store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled in the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
On the basis of the end of the control of the setting change mode, the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value is displayed blinking on display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game hall can recognize that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The game machine of means D4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D3,
Game control means having the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (a game control micro that executes a game control timer interrupt process) Computer 100),
And a production control unit (CPU 120 for production control) that executes control of production,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Displaying setting confirmation" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible for the store clerk or the like in the game arcade to understand that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled.

The game machine of means D5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D4,
Timing after power supply to the game machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) Then, when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting change switch). ) When the setting change switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch has been detected." and "the operation of the setting change switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game arcade can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of the processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of the means E1 is
A game machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing (change to setting change mode, change to setting confirmation mode) related to the change of the set value. ,
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means E2 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the game machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode capable of changing the set value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may have been controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting can be changed by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on being controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal Security signal is continuously output for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even if the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal is set by the specific signal. It is possible to understand that the change mode may be controlled.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E5 is
A gaming machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting confirmation mode can be controlled (the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on. Based on that, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that at least the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation can be performed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to understand that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling the setting value to change the setting value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting change mode is controlled.

The game machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling in the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (When the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E7,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that, and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch has been detected. ,""The operation of the setting changeover switch was detected." is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this, the clerk or the like of the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the information related to the set value, but JP 2014-200506 A. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Patent Publication (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention relating to the means F1 to F11 is made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to set values on the external device side.

The game machine of means F1 is
A game machine capable of executing a specific control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change corresponding signal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to be able to change the setting value is provided.
Outputs the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the confirmed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, a non-special mode special signal (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state during the setting change mode control period) is output, and when the setting change mode ends After the output of the special signal is once stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off at the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the confirmed set value is set) Change corresponding signal) is output,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside by the special signal whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting a special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputs a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value),
It is characterized by
According to this, it becomes possible to output from the common terminal a signal notifying whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means F5 is
A gaming machine of means F4,
When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is in the ON state during the period when the setting confirmation mode is controlled) is output. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off at the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the displayed set value is changed). Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by
According to this, the setting value can be easily specified in the external device.

The gaming machine of means F7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal),
It is characterized by
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a form that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F9,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to be able to change the setting value is provided.
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output with the end of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated previously, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal) ,
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of means F11 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means F1 to means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the processing related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting change mode). Output the setting change corresponding signal of, and output the pulse-like setting change corresponding signal of the number corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the setting confirmation mode). After the output is finished, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) at a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the big hit game state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. The number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value is output),
It is characterized by
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the setting value to the outside with a predetermined trigger, it is possible to increase the chances that the setting value can be specified in the external device.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing the setting value, it is necessary to appropriately execute the control relating to the addition of the game medium. The invention relating to means G1 to means G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to application of a game medium.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling a payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a gaming value (pachinko ball),
Specific control means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for big hit determination) capable of executing specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) A control microcomputer 100),
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
At least one of the gaming machine frame (gaming machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) (for example, gaming machine frame 3) corresponding to the gaming machine can detect an open state that can be detected. Means (game provided with a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) A payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300),
Regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or not, when the open state is detected, the giving of the game value is limited (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the game medium is not paid out in the ball lending process and the prize ball process),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value while being controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of the means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is the open state detection means (a game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a gaming machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided with a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open When the (game machine frame 3 is opened) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processes in step S21TM3530 and subsequent steps are executed),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled when the open state of the gaming machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of the setting change flag) capable of specifying that the control is performed in the setting change mode,
The specific information storage means is capable of storing the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can bring the game to a stopped state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after power supply to the gaming machine is restarted (game). In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the condition does not shift to the normal game process, and loops until the power is turned off),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, the game can be stopped when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means.

The game machine of means G4 is
A gaming machine of means G3,
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting change flag) is erased (YES in step S21TM3530 based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is set. Ends and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
The game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the game control timer interrupt process) is provided,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether to give a game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When neither opening of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the payout of the game medium is executed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the granting means for controlling the granting of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to grant the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A gaming machine of means G5,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) is
Based on the fact that the information (payout number) regarding the giving of the game value is received from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 which executes the game control timer interrupt process), the game value is added,
It has a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the added information (unpaid number) regarding the gaming value to be given,
The storage means can store the additional information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the granting means executes the granting of the game value according to the granting information stored in the storage means (the power is cut off during execution of payout of the game medium). When it occurs, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the payout that has been interrupted after the power is turned on is restarted, and the number of unpaid game media is paid out).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the additional information regarding the gaming value to be provided after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the information is stored after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to add a game value corresponding to the additional information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G6,
Can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) gives a game value based on a signal (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the addition of the game value based on the signal output from the game device is limited (the gaming machine frame door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine). When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not send the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the granting of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem associated with the granting operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work and the like while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means G1 to means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a setting value is provided,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
With the control to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
The game state of the gaming machine is not initialized due to the control in the setting confirmation mode (when the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state when controlled in the setting change mode, in step S21TM3040). If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. When the setting confirmation mode is executed Based on that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, it is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040, and the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or it is determined to be NO in step S21TM3140, and thus step S21TM3150. Do not move to),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and also whether or not to initialize the game state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
The storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the imparted information (data of the unpaid amount) to be imparted,
The added information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). Along with this, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed, so that the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not yet been paid out. Number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the grant information regarding the game value to be granted, so that management at the game store can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
The storage means (RAM 21TM302 having a buffer for storing the unpaid amount formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing the imparted information (data of the unpaid amount) to be imparted,
The added information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is executed. Also, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of unpaid number storage buffers formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the imparted information is not initialized, so that the information regarding the gaming value to be imparted can be appropriately protected.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. With regard to the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value are displayed on the external device side. It may be necessary to distinguish them, but even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The inventions relating to the means H1 to H5 are made in view of the above-mentioned actual circumstances, and an external device side divides the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the processing related to the change of the setting value. It is to provide a game machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame/door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine, and processing related to changing the set value (setting change) It is possible to output a specific signal according to the
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled in the setting change mode by executing the RAM clear). Output for 30 seconds, and when RAM clear is executed and the setting change mode is controlled, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally notify the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of the means H2 is
A gaming machine of means H1,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different between when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting check mode is controlled (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of the means H1 or the means H2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120: When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the “lock switch Is detected.", "The operation of the setting switch is detected." is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H3,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the change of set value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means H1 to means H4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the processing (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the change of set value,
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device side to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The inventions according to the means I1 to I6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of the processing related to the set value on the external device side. ..

The gaming machine of the means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 having different ranges of big hit determination random numbers),
The setting value can be changed,
In response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value, output of the specific signal (security signal) is started,
Stops the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than a predetermined period (when controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode). , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means I2,
A gaming machine of means I1,
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame/door frame open detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (the security signal indicates that RAM clear is performed. If it is not controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled in the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled in the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally notify the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value in a distinguishable manner.

The game machine of means I3 is
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The output period of the specific signal is different between when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting check mode is controlled (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is controlled). Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means I4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I3,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580);
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transfer operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed, predetermined notification is performed (the CPU 120 for effect control, When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch Is detected.", "The operation of the setting switch is detected." is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means I5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I4,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between the occurrence of the predetermined event and the process related to the change of the set value, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means I1 to means I5,
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change correspondence signal) corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
It is possible to output the special signal in a special mode capable of specifying the set value (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  Further, there has been proposed a game machine that displays a title to notify the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see JP-A-2016-101428). In the gaming machine as described in JP-A-2016-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect. The inventions relating to the means J1 to the means J8 have been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having an enhanced effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the means J1
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2(D) and (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

The gaming machine of the means J2 is the gaming machine of the means J1,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 8-2(C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J3 is the gaming machine of the means J1 or the means J2,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

The gaming machine of means J4 is one of the gaming machines of means J1 to J3,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means J5 is the gaming machine of the means J4,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is the gaming machine of any of means J1 to J5,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J7 is the gaming machine of any of means J1 to J6,
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the stick controller 31A or push button 31B),
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10(E), FIG. 8-11(I). )),
During the effective period of the detection by the detection unit, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is one of the gaming machines of means J1 to J7,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12(a)) Display, etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (such as the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 8-12(d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means is
A plurality of types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12(a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) including the above),
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. 8-12(a) and 8(d), the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12(a) and (d) may include the elements E1 to E5.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately notify that the specific image has been displayed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a game machine that can display a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to means K1 to means K7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The game machine of means K1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Equipped with display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-holding display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the aspect of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the aspect of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 11-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display aspect rather than the active display 30TM003. The proportion of selection of a mode different from the mode is low, and the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information, as the information corresponding to the common variable display, so that the interest regarding the information corresponding to the variable display can be improved. In addition to being able to perform, it is possible to make the aspect of the first information and the second information interested.

The game machine of means K2 is
A gaming machine of means K1,
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first reserved display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). , The blue mode sub-holding display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the changed mode is different between the first information and the second information, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The game machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8(2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time),
Depending on the aspect of the changed first information and the aspect of the changed second information, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is more than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The higher the jackpot expectation, the higher is the red form)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information can be focused on, and the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in the same mode as that of the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the same display color is displayed. Shape display) is displayed),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105), and a second corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105),
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable hold in a manner common to the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display) is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color) having the same display color is displayed. (Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to make the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information interested.

The game machine of means K5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K4,
The player is provided with an information effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area in which the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information along with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is displayed while the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters "REACH!!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active information are displayed. (While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information for the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The game machine of means K6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The first action effect executed when the aspect of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the aspect of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active aspect). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes the action of throwing a ball, and the sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 causes the character a to appear. Then, it is the mode to execute the action to fly the balloon.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the aspects of the first action effect and the second action effect are different, the interest can be improved.

The game machine of means K7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means K1 to means K6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the above is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different when the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed (active as shown in FIG. 11-3. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed. The expectation for a big hit is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a game machine that can display a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to means L1 to means L7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Equipped with display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for executing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-holding display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the mode of the first information changes, at least part of the notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 11-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is (When changed, the sub-holding display area 30TM104 does not display the sub-holding display 30TM004, and the sub-active display area 30TM105 does not display the sub-active display 30TM005.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information, as the information corresponding to the common variable display, the complication of the effect is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
A gaming machine of means L1,
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (6), the first reserved display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). , The blue mode sub-holding display 30TM004b is a blue star display)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the changed mode is different between the first information and the second information, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 11-8(2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time),
Depending on the aspect of the changed first information and the aspect of the changed second information, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is more than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The higher the jackpot expectation, the higher is the red form)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information can be focused on, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means L1 to means L3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed. Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in the same mode as that of the first hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the first reserved display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the same display color is displayed. Shape display) is displayed),
A second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105), and a second corresponding to the variable display being executed. A corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105),
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable hold in a manner common to the second hold display (FIG. 11-9 ( As shown in 9) and (10), when the red mode sub-holding display 30TM004c (red star display) is shifted to the sub active display area 30TM105, the red mode sub active display 30TM005c (red color) having the same display color is displayed. (Star display) is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to make the aspect of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information interested.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L4,
The player is provided with an information effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an information effect (reach effect) for informing whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area in which the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information along with the execution of the notification effect, while the second information is displayed while the notification effect is being executed. The information is made visible (as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters "REACH!!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active information are displayed. (While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information for the variable display is confirmed even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means L1 to means L5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first information display area (first reserved display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The first action effect executed when the aspect of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the aspect of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active aspect). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes the action of throwing a ball, and the sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 causes the character a to appear. Then, it is the mode to execute the action to fly the balloon.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, since the aspects of the first action effect and the second action effect are different, the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. A second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the above is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different when the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed (active as shown in FIG. 11-3. The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed. The expectation for a big hit is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), an active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display, and a gaming machine is proposed that changes the display mode of the active display each time a pseudo continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to the means M1 to M6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of the means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
The change suggestion effect executing means displays the change suggestion effect in the success mode as the change suggestion effect (the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 11-18). Effects that change the mode) and effects that suggest changes in the failure mode (as shown in (10) and (20) in FIG. 11-19, an effect in which the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed. ) Is possible,
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, within a predetermined period (for example, within a period from the start of variation until the reach state is established, a decorative pattern from the start of variation (re-fluctuation (pseudo-link) after temporary stop is performed). A combination of different decorative patterns or a pseudo continuous pattern) will be temporarily stopped, and within the period from the start of fluctuation until one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is first stopped) The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change rate is 100%. If the suggestive effect is executed and once is the success mode and once is the failure mode, the third change suggestive effect may not be executed).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention with respect to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and improve the interest.

The game machine of means M2 is
A gaming machine of the means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the final display of the active display). (The expectation of jackpots varies depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the proportion of which mode the correspondence display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The larger the number is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and even if the active display is the same display color, the larger the number of times the success suggestive change suggestion production is continuous, the higher the jackpot expectation is.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of times the success suggestion change suggestion production is continuous, and to improve the interest.

The game machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2,
It is possible to execute variable display of decorative designs,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, a temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative pattern. (Fluctuation direction does not change)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M4 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M3,
The change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18(1)). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed as shown in FIG. 11-18(4)).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The game machine of means M5 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M4,
The change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means M6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion production) in which
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D does. Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), an active display is displayed as information corresponding to the variable display, and a gaming machine is proposed that changes the display mode of the active display each time a pseudo continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention relating to means N1 to N6 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display;
Change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the correspondence display changes,
As the change suggesting effect, the change suggesting effect executing means hits the active display 30TM003 with the ball thrown by the character A as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. The effect of changing the display mode) and the change suggestion of the failure mode (as shown in (10) and (20) of FIG. 11-19, the ball thrown by the character D is flipped by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. Can be performed)
Predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state, a decorative pattern from the start of fluctuation (a combination of decorative patterns or pseudo continuous pattern in which re-variation (pseudo continuous) will be performed after temporary stop) is temporary Within the period until the stop, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the time when any one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns first stops) to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect Accordingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), [the number of executions of change suggestion effect] to [the number of executions of change suggestion effect]. The higher the ratio, the more likely it is for a display mode with a higher jackpot expectation. For example, the display mode in the case where [the number of executions of change suggestion effect in the success mode/the number of executions of change suggestion effect] is 2/3 is the blue mode. Therefore, the display mode in the case of 4/5 is a red mode with a higher jackpot expectation.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention with respect to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
A gaming machine of means N1,
The proportion controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) varies depending on the mode of the correspondence display (active display 30TM003) (as shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the jackpot expectation level depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous, the proportion of which mode the correspondence display is is different (as shown in FIG. 11-16(A), the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous. The larger the number is, the higher the jackpot expectation is, and even if the active display is the same display color, the larger the number of times the success suggestive change suggestion production is continuous, the higher the jackpot expectation is.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of times the success suggestion change suggestion production is continuous, and to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2,
It is possible to execute variable display of decorative designs,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change (as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, a temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative pattern. (Fluctuation direction does not change)
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change, it is possible to further focus on the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N3,
The change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 11-18(1)). , A change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed as shown in FIG. 11-18(4)).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N4,
The change suggestion effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which the character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate of execution of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The character D has a higher rate of executing the success mode change suggestion effect and a higher rate of changing the active mode display mode).
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means N1 to means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (a change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears, and a character D). Change suggestion production) in which
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 11-17, the character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than the character D does. Ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the user interested in which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. is there. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650),
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal in step S21TM4560), ,
And a setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (value of the security signal timer) relating to the period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a predetermined value that is common in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs the specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
An initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting unit can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When the RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value regardless of whether the control in the setting change mode ends or the control in the setting confirmation mode ends. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting unit is made common, and different output is made in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode In the specific information storage unit (the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing the specific information (setting change flag), the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on step S21TM4720, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag, and
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (step S21TM4190 transmits a set value abnormality error command, and a display monitor on the error display of step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please move." message is displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means P1 to means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The game machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of the means P1,
The setting change mode control means is such that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, all the steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are performed). Based on the determination of YES, shift to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. Can prompt change.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to carry out the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is turned on (one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). (If NO is determined in), the process proceeds to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, the progress of the game in the state where the set value is unstable can be restricted, and the appropriate game control can be realized.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
The specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (a setting value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and displayed on the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please move." message is displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

  Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means Q1 to Q5 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 stages of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). When it is determined that it is set), it controls to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting switch) Automatically controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150). The game control microcomputer 100 for executing the clear (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means is based on that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not) (Automatically controls the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power is cut off during the control of the setting change mode, the setting information is stored in the setting change mode even when the setting change condition is not satisfied. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the transition operation (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and it is possible to control the setting change mode based on It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. The specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends based on the above (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation is performed, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for changing to the setting change mode is satisfied, The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let)
It is characterized by
According to this, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to the set value stored in the set value storage means,
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). Based on the setting change mode),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. Since the set value stored in is changed, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off in the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to a set value stored in the set value storage means,
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation under the control of the setting change mode and the setting value storage area when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and end the setting change mode),
The set value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value before being stored is stored (even when the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. Is not changed, so if the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine that executes an effect that counts down the remaining time until the reach effect is started is disclosed. In the gaming machine that performs a predetermined operation such as countdown described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room to enhance the effect. The invention according to means R1 to means R7 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment of performing a predetermined operation.

The game machine of means R1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice announcement effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of effect display by performing a predetermined operation (a countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, a countup operation for adding a numerical value) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect. And a predetermined effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can be executed,
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIG. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, after displaying "3" as an initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation is performed to perform a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value).
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)) in which a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“70” set as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, by displaying "70" as an initial value on the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, a count-up operation is performed to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value), and
It is possible to execute a predetermined operation in a predetermined display area common to the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (Figs. 13-9 (2) to (5) and 13-11 (14) to. As shown in (17), it is possible to perform numerical subtraction or numerical addition in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 that is common to the countdown effect and the countup effect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect executed in the predetermined display area and improve the interest of the effect executed in the predetermined display area.

The game machine of means R2 is
A gaming machine of means R1,
The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (pseudo continuous effect) and a second suggestive effect (expectation degree notice effect),
The predetermined effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The first predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9, the countdown effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo-relational effect). ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in (14) to (17) in FIG. 13-11, a count-up effect is generated in response to execution of the expectation notice effect). Run)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, it is possible to clarify the correspondence relationship between the predetermined effect and the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of means R3 is
A gaming machine of means R1 or means R2,
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (countdown operation for performing subtraction) and a second predetermined operation (countup operation for performing addition) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, a numerical value is subtracted in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300), and the second predetermined operation is performed. When the effect is executed, the second predetermined operation is performed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, numerical values are added in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined action and the second predetermined action can be clarified, so that the player can clearly distinguish the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect.

The game machine of means R4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area is different when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9). As described above, when the countdown effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countup effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed. (Displayed in blue or red)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R4,
A display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect is executed and a display mode of the predetermined display area when the second predetermined effect is executed are different (Fig. 13-9 (2) and As shown in FIG. 13-11 (14), "3" as the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the countdown effect is executed and the sub liquid crystal display when the count up effect is executed. Different from "70" as the initial value of the count-up display displayed on the instrument 35TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means R6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R5,
For at least one of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, there are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed (the initial value of the count-up effect is the expectation notice effect. 13-6(F) and (G), the initial values of the count-up effect are "50", "60", "70", "80", and Either of "90" can be decided.),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the display mode of the predetermined display area when the predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-6(F) and (G), the same final value is used). In such a case, when the initial value of the count-up effect is small, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the initial value of the count-up effect is large).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the display mode of the predetermined display area when the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means R7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means R1 to means R6,
An effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)). ), the initial value, the change pattern, and the final value of the numerical bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice presentation of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial values of the numerical values shown in the count-up presentation of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It agrees with the value, change pattern, and final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since effects related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in the special display area, the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced. ..

  As disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), a gaming machine that executes an effect that counts down the remaining time until the reach effect is started is disclosed. In the gaming machine that performs a predetermined operation such as countdown described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-10508 (FIG. 38), there is room to enhance the effect. The inventions relating to the means S1 to S5 have been made in view of the above situation, and provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the performance of performing a predetermined operation.

The gaming machine of means S1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (pseudo continuous effect, expectation notice announcement effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A predetermined effect (countdown effect, countup effect) that changes the display mode of the effect display by performing a predetermined operation (a countdown operation for subtracting a numerical value, a countup operation for adding a numerical value) corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect. And a predetermined performance execution means (CPU 120 for performance control) that can be executed,
The predetermined effect execution means, as the predetermined effect,
The first predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-9 (2) to (5)) in which the predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) is performed after displaying the effect display (“3” defined as the initial value) in the first special mode. As shown, the countdown operation is performed after "3" which is set as the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and a countdown effect of subtracting a numerical value),
Second predetermined effect (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17) that performs a predetermined operation (addition, count-up operation) after displaying the effect display (“70” set as the initial value) in the second special mode. As shown in, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays "70", which is set as an initial value, and then performs a count-up operation to perform a count-up effect of adding a numerical value). Yes,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first predetermined effect is executed and when the second predetermined effect is executed (as shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), (The big hit expectation is higher when the count-up effect is executed than when the count-down effect is executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by focusing on which of the predetermined effects is performed in the predetermined display area.

The gaming machine of means S2 is
A gaming machine of means S1,
The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (pseudo continuous effect) and a second suggestive effect (expectation degree notice effect),
The predetermined effect execution means (effect control CPU 120),
The first predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the first suggestion effect (as shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9, the countdown effect is executed in response to the execution of the pseudo-relational effect). ),
The second predetermined effect is executed in response to the execution of the second suggestion effect (as shown in (14) to (17) in FIG. 13-11, a count-up effect is generated in response to execution of the expectation notice effect). Run)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect correspond to different types of suggestive effects, it is possible to clarify the correspondence relationship between the predetermined effect and the suggestive effect.

The game machine of means S3 is
A gaming machine of means S1 or means S2,
The predetermined operation includes a first predetermined operation (subtraction, countdown operation) and a second predetermined operation (addition, countup operation) having different operation modes,
When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined operation is performed in a predetermined display area (when the countdown effect is executed, a numerical value is subtracted in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300), and the second predetermined effect is performed. Is executed in the predetermined display area (when the count-up effect is executed, a numerical value is added in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined action and the second predetermined action can be clarified, so that the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means S4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means S1 to the means S3,
The display mode of the predetermined display area is different when the first predetermined effect is being executed and when the second predetermined effect is being executed (shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 13-9). As described above, when the countdown effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed in white, and as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), when the countup effect is being executed, the numerical value is displayed. (Displayed in blue or red)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the difference between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be clarified.

The gaming machine of means S5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means S1 to means S4,
An effect corresponding to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in a special display area (main liquid crystal display 35TM200) different from the predetermined display area (FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17)). ), the initial value, the change pattern, and the final value of the numerical value bar 35TM610 shown in the expectation notice production on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are the initial value, the change pattern, and the numerical value shown in the count-up production. , Which matches the final value)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since effects related to the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be executed in the special display area, the effect of the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect can be enhanced. ..

  As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), when the timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect) and the timer effect display reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine in which a result of (super reach effect) is derived is disclosed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution status of the suggestive effect (battle effect) suggesting that the game machine is controlled in the advantageous state. There is room to improve the interest. The inventions relating to the means T1 to the means T6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of related production.

The gaming machine of means T1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (music reach production, cut-in notice production) suggesting that the above advantageous state is controlled.
Related production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a related production (count display production) related to the execution state of the suggested production,
As the execution status of the suggestive effect, a first step (a period of 1 second to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-15 (3)) and a second step after the first step (FIG. 13). As shown in -15(4), there is a period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds in the music reach effect),
When the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestive effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13(A) to (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production is completed in the first stage) ,
It is easier to recognize the related effect when the suggestive effect is at the second stage than when the suggestive effect is at the first stage (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), music reach). When the rendering is in the first stage, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced, and the count display rendering of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. While the visibility is reduced, when the music reach production is in the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the production position, so the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. However, the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is in the first stage, it is more difficult to recognize the related effect than in the case where the suggestive effect is in the second stage, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The game machine of means T2 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (music reach production, cut-in notice production) suggesting that the above advantageous state is controlled.
Related production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing a related production (count display production) related to the execution state of the suggested production,
As the execution status of the suggestive effect, a first step (a period of 1 second to 15 seconds in the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19(3)) and a second step after the first step (FIG. 13). -19(4), the period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds in the music reach production)
When the suggestive effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestive effect of the first stage is executed and the suggestive effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13(C) and (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production is completed in the first stage.) ,
The rate at which the related effect is executed is higher when the suggestive effect is at the second stage than when the suggestive effect is at the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), music reach effect). Is higher when the musical reach effect is in the second stage than when it is in the first stage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is in the first stage, the execution rate of the related effect is lower than when the suggestive effect is in the second stage.

The game machine of means T3 is
A gaming machine of means T1,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
It is possible to change the visibility of the related effect by changing the visibility of the predetermined display area (as shown in FIGS. 13-15 (3) and (4), the music reach effect is in the first stage). In this case, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced and the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced. On the other hand, when the music reach effect is in the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the effect position, so that the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. The visibility of the counting display effect in is improved.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the visibility of the related effect while sharing the effect information displayed in the predetermined display area.

The game machine of means T4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means T1 to means T3,
The related effect is an effect for updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 13-14, the execution period of the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is music. (It is the same as the execution period (the period from T3 to T7B) from the start of the reach effect to the end of the music reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period during which the suggestive effect is being executed.

The game machine of means T5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means T1 to means T4,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As a different effect from the related effect, a predetermined effect execution unit (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) that performs a specific operation (timer subtraction) different from the predetermined operation,
When the related effect is executed, the proportion of the predetermined effect executed is lower than when the related effect is not executed (when the count display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-13(E)). Indicates that the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect is lower than that when the count display effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect matches the execution ratio of the timer effect, so the count display effect is executed. If it is done, the execution rate of the timer effect is lower than that when the count display effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects such as a related effect and a predetermined effect as effects for performing an operation, and it is possible to suppress complication of effects while diversifying effects.

The game machine of means T6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means T1 to means T5,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestion effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) in an area different from the predetermined display area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200). Continuous production) can be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of the suggestive effect being in the second stage is higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed). The percentage of music reach production in the second stage is higher than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on whether or not the special effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  As shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), when the timer effect is started in parallel with the progress of the battle effect (super reach effect) and the timer effect display reaches 0, the battle effect ( A gaming machine in which a result of (super reach effect) is derived is disclosed. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801 (FIG. 32), a related effect (timer effect) related to the execution state of the suggestive effect (battle effect) suggesting that the game machine is controlled in the advantageous state. There is room to improve the interest. The inventions relating to the means U1 to the means U6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the related performance.

The game machine of means U1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion production execution means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing suggestion production (music reach production, cut-in notice production) suggesting that the above advantageous state is controlled.
Related production execution means (CPU 120 for production control) capable of executing a related production (count display production) related to the execution state of the suggestive production,
As a different effect from the related effect, a predetermined effect execution unit (for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (timer effect) that performs a specific operation (subtraction operation) in response to the execution of the suggestive effect (cut-in notice effect). CPU 120),
The rate at which the related effect is executed varies depending on the execution status of the suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), the music reach effect is more effective than in the case where the music reach effect is in the first stage. In the case of the second stage, the ratio of executing the count display effect is higher),
The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the related effect is executed (as shown in FIG. 13-17(H), when the count display effect is executed, the count display is performed). The execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect is higher than that when the effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect and the execution ratio of the timer effect match, so the count display effect is executed. If it is, the execution rate of the timer effect is higher than that when the count display effect is not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by making the related effect and the predetermined effect related to each other.

The gaming machine of means U2 is
A gaming machine of means U1,
As the execution status of the suggestive effect (music reach effect), the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds of the music reach effect as shown in FIG. 13-19 (3)) and the first stage after the first stage There are two stages (as shown in Fig. 13-19 (4), a period of 16 seconds to 30 seconds of music reach effect),
When the suggestion effect of the second stage is executed, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the suggestion effect of the first step is executed and the suggestion effect of the second stage is not executed (FIG. 13). As shown in -13(A) to (D), the jackpot expectation is higher when the music reach production is executed up to the second stage than when the music reach production is completed in the first stage).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on whether or not the second stage suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to improve interest.

The game machine of means U3 is
A gaming machine of means U2,
The rate at which the related effect is executed is higher when the suggestive effect is at the second stage than when the suggestive effect is at the first stage (as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), music reach effect). Is higher in the case where the music reach effect is in the second stage than in the case where is the first stage).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive effect is at the first stage, the execution rate of the related effect is lower than when the suggestive effect is at the second stage.

The game machine of means U4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means U1 to means U3,
The related effect is an effect for updating the display corresponding to the execution period of the suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 13-18, the execution period of the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is music. (It matches the execution period (the period from T3 to T14B) from the start of the reach effect to the end of the music reach effect)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the period in which the suggestive effect is being executed.

The game machine of means U5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means U1 to means U4,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
The predetermined effect (timer effect) is an effect of performing an operation different from the predetermined operation as the specific operation (the timer effect is an effect of performing a timer subtraction different from the update of the effect execution period).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means U6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means U1 to means U5,
The related effect (count display effect) is an effect of performing a predetermined operation (update of the effect execution period) in a predetermined display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300),
As an effect different from the suggestive effect (music reach effect), a special effect (pseudo) in an area different from the predetermined display area (the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200). Continuous production) can be executed,
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of the suggestive effect in the second stage is higher than when the special effect is not executed (when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed). The percentage of music reach production in the second stage is higher than in the case)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on whether or not the special effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

  Note that the present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in a notice production determination process. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of some storage areas in RAM of a main board. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted/received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram showing a signal line etc. used for transmitting and receiving a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing which a payout control CPU performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the ball lending limiting method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the card unit and the pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball loan limitation method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which does not restrict a ball loan during a setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing an example in which payout is restarted after the setting change mode ends. It is a timing diagram showing an example of forcibly ending the payout due to the shift to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period when the gaming machine frame or the glass door frame is opened. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the set value is determined, and (2) is a control diagram when a power failure occurs after the set value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output mode of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output aspect and output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. .. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restricting the ball lending based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball lending without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly ending the ball lending. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and restarting a ball lending after power-off. It is a timing diagram showing a method of limiting the prize ball payout based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing diagram showing a method of restarting the prize ball payout after the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a prize ball payout, without shifting to a setting change mode after a power failure. It is a timing chart which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly ending prize ball payout. It is a timing chart which shows the method of shifting to a setting change mode and restarting a prize ball payout after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an active display. It is a flow chart which shows change production decision processing. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending|holding change pattern in a 1st change production. It is an explanatory view showing a pending change pattern in the first change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending|holding change pattern in a 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect in the first change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production aspect regarding the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production|generation aspect of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production|generation aspect of change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production|generation aspect of change suggestion production. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control diagram when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. The logo panel drive mechanism of this embodiment is shown, (a) is a front view of a logo panel drive mechanism, (b) is a P arrow view of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is a Q arrow line view of FIG. 13-2 (a). It is a front view which shows the state which moved both the 1st logo panel and the 2nd logo panel to the position which overlaps with the main liquid crystal display in front and back when seen from the front. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing at the time of change start. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C), (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the execution rate determination table of an expectation notice announcement production, (E) is an expectation notice It is an explanatory view showing a final display mode decision table of production, and (F) and (G) are explanatory views showing a display mode change pattern determination table of expectation notice production. (H) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a count-up effect, and (I) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a count-down effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a countdown production and a countup production. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the countdown production and the countup production. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the countdown production and the countup production. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the countdown production and the countup production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing at the time of change start. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table, (C), (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the final stage determination table of music reach production, (E) is cut-in notice production. It is an explanatory view showing an execution ratio decision table of, and (F) is an explanatory view showing an effect mode decision table of a cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a count display effect. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding the count display production. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the effect|action determination process at the time of a change start. (G) is an explanatory view showing an execution start stage determination table of the count display effect, and (H) is an explanatory view showing an execution ratio determination table of the cut-in notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of a count display effect and a timer effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding a count display production and a timer production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the form of the production aspect regarding a count display production and a timer production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing at the time of change start. (A) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table of active display, (B), (C) is an explanatory view showing a change pattern determination table of active display, (D), (E) is a change It is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect determination table, and (F) is an explanatory view showing a cut-in notice effect determination table. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 1st change suggestion production and the 2nd change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 1st change suggestion production, the 2nd change suggestion production, and the 3rd change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|generation aspect regarding the 1st change suggestion production and the 2nd change suggestion production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 3rd change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the 3rd change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of a non-probability change (at the time of low probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability). It is explanatory drawing which shows a probability variation fall determination table. (A) It is an explanatory view showing a game flow in the case where the positive variation falls within 100 rotations after the end of the big hit game state, and (B) An explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the case where the positive variation falls after 101 rotations after the end of the big hit game state. is there. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table in a highly accurate high base state (within 99 rotations), (C), (D) is a fluctuation pattern at the time of reliable probability falling (within 99 rotations). It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table, (E), (F) is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table in a low accurate high base state (within 99 rotations), (G), (H) is the 100th rotation. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for. (I) and (J) are explanatory views showing the variation pattern determination table for the 100th rotation, and (K) and (L) are explanations showing the variation pattern determination table in the highly accurate high base state (after 101 rotations). It is a figure, (M), (N) is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a probability change falling winning (after 101 rotations). (A) It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of 1st setting suggestion production, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect of 2nd setting suggestion production. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution timing of setting suggestion production in the case of a positive change falling within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect in the case of a positive change falling within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect in the case of a positive change falling within 100 rotations. It is a time chart which shows an example of the execution timing of setting suggestion production in the case of a positive change after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect in the case of a positive change after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect in the case of a positive change after 101 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the game flow in the case of a positive change falling within 100 rotations. It is a time chart which shows the modification about the execution timing of setting suggestion production in the case of a certain change fall within 100 rotations. It is an explanatory view showing a modified example of the effect mode in the case where the probability change falls within 100 rotations. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modified example of the presentation mode in the case of a positive change falling within 100 rotations. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a special symbol display device. It is a figure showing the shift mode of the 1st reservation indicator and the 2nd reservation indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern judgment table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of an error in the set value error or when the system is restored from the power interruption during the setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during the setting change process, and (B) is a setting value error error, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special symbol display device at the time of returning from the power failure during a setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interrupt process for game controls. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize|stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in operation|movement of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the change timing of the set value and the confirmation end timing of the set value, and the number of times the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value change processing in the characteristic part 10F. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the characteristic unit 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also referred to as the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. In addition, the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a fixed open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (four places on the left and right sides of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members are provided. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage). , The general-university game based on the passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit" symbol is given, and the jackpot symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol is "missing".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described below) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the same opening mode as the big hitting game state in the case of some kinds of big hits (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided in the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) fixed display may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the number of ordinary figure reservations is displayed by turning on the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the process for setting for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are installed.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach lost pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “missed”. -2, the variable display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1(B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1(B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach<super reach E<super reach D<super reach C<super reach. Reach B <super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8-1A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1(A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more stages is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1(B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. It should be noted that the notification mode of the title may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title characters (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of performance operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2(A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the decorative patterns showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and the “right” are stopped to be in the reach mode. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect of the super reach (also referred to as super reach effect) is finished, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2(E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2(E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect is finished, as shown in FIG. (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 so that the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2(G). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B that is confronted with is executed.

  In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect and the like, so the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  In addition, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C)→(D)→(E)...) and super reach B (FIG. 8-2(C)→(F)→(G)...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You can By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy"), thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification of the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-2(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 8-2(I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2(J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is displayed. Executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. Executed. In this way, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, in the super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super-reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability, The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced on a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display place may be changed.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, you may make it display an expectation degree suggestion display in at least one part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  As shown in FIG. 8-2(H) and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. .

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described later is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be recognized even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing because the effect of the presentation can be improved.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each of the reach effects has been executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 8-3(C), an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-3(D), A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display. The display of the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, or a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, it is not displayed as appropriate during the reach effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much due to the low-reliability reach effect, and to focus on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. After that, when developing to the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), the title of the super reach A is notified and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach that performs the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4(B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that a failure has occurred). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 displayed the black stars indicating the expectations from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and It is also possible to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5(F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Also, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified and the production effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of increasing expectations at one time, and it fits in the white stars of the indication of expectation, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of increasing expectations. You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5(G) to (L) are example operation effects of title notification and expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes and the special mode is set. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5(G). At this time, although the voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. 8-5(L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the production operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach productions (title notification, expectation level) depending on the production mode (state when the reach production is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6(A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6(B), the image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6(C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters "SP reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 has operated, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Advance notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7(B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the manner of effect. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Figure 8-9(A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are things that change, such as those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies according to the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  The "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined as either one. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9(B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined in a ratio different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title announcement depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In the present embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode of the dialogue of the character in the reach production of the super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9C, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Fig. 8-9(C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is "white", "red", and the ones that change from "white" to "red" are provided. ), the jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is achieved. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timings of changing the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, other than super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialog notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of which effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the number of colors (how many stages) to change may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue is applied when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title, like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are changed to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate all enemies with the stick controller”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of mission titles.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(B), a character 31AK041 which is a teammate character and a character which is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10(C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10(C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10(E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to the pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11(H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11(I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. Further, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect has been executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  Then, before a predetermined time when the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 8-11(K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation effective period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11(L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11(M), a fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in Fig. 8-11(L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and when the operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the example of the production operation shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, although the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. A specific image may be included and displayed when displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 that form the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12(a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter which has been closed is opened, variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set, as shown in FIG. 8-12(c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot", which indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Note that the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, but the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12(e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the variable display screen based on the original numerical design is returned. As shown in FIG. 8-12(f), all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), all of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the result of determining the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the title display color is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the decision regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the decision regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advanced. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. Moreover, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) which comprises the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 and FIG. 9-5(A), the main substrate 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided. , It also has a function to display various winning information about winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5(A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front side when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area" (Also referred to as) the number of game balls that have entered the game ball, and various winning information such as continuous ratio and winning ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (pass the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as often as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk at the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not being supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the performance control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 on the same power supply substrate, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but is capable of executing the switching operation and executing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation). It may be a possible switch.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 has a structure in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the amusement arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so the clerk at the amusement arcade leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. You can prevent it from happening.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower portion of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming ball winning each winning opening and the gaming ball entering the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above, as shown in FIG.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is provided with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 can open and close the gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 and the front surface of the gaming board 2. A game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are generated based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out condition, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full condition. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launching device. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094) Which is a signal that plays a role of supplying power from the power supply substrate) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals to/from the game control microcomputer 100 by serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted/received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the award ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting/receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the award ball request signal, and the award that has been set. A ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the prize ball payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal having the setting is set. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is made. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Note that specific signal exchanges by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 36.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal board (the external terminal board for the frame and the external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on/off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lendable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

  From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( (PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lent balls. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the on state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage not lower than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

  FIGS. 9-4A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", it will win the jackpot with a lower probability (1/300). ing. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The chances of winning the jackpot are higher than the case of "2" (1/280). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

  In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2, may be 3, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

  On the main board 11, information relating to the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting winning opening (belt), the number of winning balls at winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the large winning opening The number of prize balls due to winning the (Attacker), the total number of prize balls are input, the number of shot balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 shows that the number of prize balls due to winning the major prize opening (Attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The percentage of consecutive balls (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second start prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls from the prize hole (attacker) to the total number of prize balls A certain winning ratio (%) and a base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of award balls (the number of balls that have been obtained as consecutive winnings below) due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker) to the total number of award balls. The winning ratio is the number of prize balls from the 2nd starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls from the prize hole (attacker) among the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied by. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired below) is the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), and the great winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the second starting winning opening (Den Chu). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are variable winning objects, and the expected winning percentage of the gaming balls changes as the passable width of the playing balls changes. is there. Also, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed winning objects, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. Therefore, the assumed winning rate of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information regarding the winning of the game, regarding the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio, the winning ball to the first starting winning hole (navel) and the general winning hole (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000 pieces Number (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric player prize balls (Den Chu prize balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the 2nd starting prize hole (Den Chu), depending on the prize for the big prize hole (attacker) The number of special electric role award balls (attacker award balls), which is the number of award balls, is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning the first start prize hole (navel) and the general prize hole (sode), the number of normal electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and the special electricity The number of winning prize balls (attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, 6000 11 sets of memory are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and winning combination (%) of these totals can be calculated. In addition, regarding the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 has a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative total ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the last 60,000 prize balls. It is possible to switch and display the base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the consecutive ratio (%) of 6000 is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 displayed thereafter, the number of winning balls is 6000. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning a prize mouth (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize winning hole (Den Chu), the number of prize balls by winning the major winning prize (attacker), the prize ball Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and totaling the total number at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, display timing of 6000 consecutive ratios (%)).

  In addition, the storage area for storing the information about the winning of the game in the present embodiment is provided for each set value, and the general winning award ball, the first starting winning award mouth ball, the ordinary electric role award ball, the special electric role The prize ball, the total prize ball, and the total hit amount are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, and base in this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating the role ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of role acquisition balls is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls is the cumulative total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and Den Chu. Further, the number of consecutive winning prize balls means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be calculated by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be calculated by the following equation (3).

  Consecutive ratio = [Number of balls obtained in succession / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning roles + number of winning roles) / total number of winnings] x 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total driving] x 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls obtained is 42,000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are truncated) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning accessory balls is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning accessory balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of 2 bytes at the maximum. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down from the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, and the character acquisition ball number is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, in the same manner as the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of +12% occurs. However, if both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are 10 times, the error is +1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

The substrate case 21TM201 is made of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not obstructed by the heat radiation holes. Here, the “direct front” means the front directly from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means between the employee or the like who is going to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte of 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down from the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, and the character acquisition ball number is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area (ring buffer, 10 set total buffer (total of information on game prizes stored in a ring buffer having 10 maximum 2-byte counters), a prize ball The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, the value of the number of acquired balls is larger than the stored value of the total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area in which information about game winnings is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls for continuous winnings is greater than the value of the number of balls acquired Processing may be performed. Further, the error display and the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed together with or after the error display and the warning display. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the winning ratio (%), if the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning role balls is 19876 as an example, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876. It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When the game control microcomputer 100 performs a calculation, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, and therefore the calculation formula is replaced as follows. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down, resulting in 1987/343=57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the winning combination ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, there is an error in display from the value calculated by accurate calculation. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, when the exact value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69%→70% is displayed on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, and therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. Therefore, until the counter counts the total number of balls acquired (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) more than a specific number, the ratio (%) and the ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if the display is performed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the winning combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs that a game medium is newly won in the electric chu or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to the continuous ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. Therefore, it is preferable to calculate the winning combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) in the same interrupt and sequentially display the calculated values.

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided in two), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5(A) can display numerical values in the lower two digits, the numerical values may be displayed in this case as well without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the game medium is detected by the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric Chu, and the number of prize balls is individually counted based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after the discharge passages through which the game media won in the attacker and the game media won in the electric chu are discharged are combined, and the detection result is used. It is also possible to add up the number of character acquisition balls and the number of consecutive character acquisition balls.

  Hereinafter, the display of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided.

  The RAM 102 of the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting prize number counter, a second starting prize number counter, a first general prize number counter, a second general prize number counter, a third general prize number counter, a fourth number. A general prize number counter and a big prize number counter are provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the special winning number counter is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first big winnings The first big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the mouth and the second big prize number counter that counts the number of winnings to the second big winning port are individually provided, and the number of winnings to the first big winning port is provided. Alternatively, the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be individually counted, and the number of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general prize number counter to the fourth general prize number counter are counters that count the number of game balls detected by the first general prize port switch to the fourth general prize port switch. The special winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 9C. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, used for the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is cleared. The clear switch 21TM052 is a switch that is operated when the calculation of the ratio and the winning combination is impaired, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the winning combination. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated during the collection of data for the normal calculation of the ratio and the winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  The RTC 106 is provided on the main board 11 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 is capable of measuring the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A). A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 21TM201 is a caulked substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as "caulking substrate case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 21TM011S for certifying that the main board 11 is enclosed is attached to the board case 21TM201. The seal sticker 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal sticker 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of 7 segments which are formed by 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots which are arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 21TM029A to the fifth display portion 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5(B) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit displays the aggregated set values (1 to 6) and the RAM clear notification that notifies the completion of the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing in the setting change mode (“C”). ) Is displayed, the counting period is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display portion 21TM029C of the third digit, and the fourth display portion 21TM029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion of the fifth digit. Numerical values are displayed in percentage on 21TM029E. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 award balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls is displayed. To be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. Moreover, when the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed. In that case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B and the third display portion 21TM029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative proportion of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit "B6." is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display section 21TM029C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  The main board 11 enters from the special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening in calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first starting opening switch 22A and a second starting opening switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning opening switch to a fourth general winning opening switch and a discharge opening switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to confirm the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal).

  In this switch processing, based on the detection signal output from each switch, which entry area the game ball has entered is specified. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first starting prize number counter and the second starting prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big prize number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When a detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, or the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number When the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070 by adding the values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter the game ball into each entry area. The number (the number of winning game balls to each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including it in the switch process), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of winning game balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls for winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of prize balls for each prize hole classified here is a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball obtained by winning the first general prize hole to the fourth general prize hole (sode)). ), 1st starting prize hole award ball (award ball due to winning at the 1st starting award prize hole (navel)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball due to award winning at Den Chu), special electric role award ball (to attacker) Is the number of prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. It should be noted that the CPU 103 separately counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting winning opening, but the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first start. The number of winning game balls to the winning openings may be collectively tabulated. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning award balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer has ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter that stores the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In this way, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). In addition, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter that stores the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning in each prize hole. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and can store up to 6000 data with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each prize hole, a total sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and a total accumulation area. There is. The storage area for the total sum and the total cumulative total for 10 sets is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256×256×256=16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 pieces of data can be reserved. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 stores a ratio ratio combination ratio storage area for storing ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total cumulative total, a base of 10 sets (base 2) and a base of 10 sets of the previous time (base 1). And a base storage area for storing. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And a cumulative ratio ratio storage area for storing the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio. Each of the combination ratio ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the total ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative number is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. For example, in the case of storing an integer, the combination ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  In addition, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base for 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets, and calculates the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits of the game balls to the respective winning openings for 10 sets and the base (base 1) are stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address/data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area in the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. The same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 designates this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address/data signal line of the internal register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the internal register and transfers the data to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

  Further, the address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  A RAM area (16K byte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 is, as shown in FIG. 9-8, a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Reference data referred to by the above control program is temporarily stored in the data for the configured control program (may be simply referred to as control program data), and is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to other areas, data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing a total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for a cumulative proportion ratio of the total sum. Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area and 10 sets of continuous ratio ratio storage areas. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored.

  In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is the data of the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, the data is divided into 1 bytes and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

  In addition, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9(A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A, and the "y" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No2, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the "y" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2). Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and "A" is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Character is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display section 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, in the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E,
Base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term combination ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is, as shown in FIGS. Based on the operation of, when the set value is "1", the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, base 2 display, when the set value is "2" Short-term ratio, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, base 2 display, short-term ratio when setting value is 3, short-term ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2. It should be noted that when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is "1", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning role are displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3” is displayed, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value "4".

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the setting value is “4”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is "5", 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The ratio, base 1 and base 2 numerical values are switched to the set value “6”.

  Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the 1 display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative continuous ratio, and the total cumulative winning role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “1”.

  Note that the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, winning combination, and base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is not limited thereto. In the above, only one numerical value or only two numerical values may be displayed among these continuous ratios, winning combinations, and bases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the display monitor 21TM029, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. The present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storages in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer are updated. Further, the storages of the total ratio and total cumulative storage areas for 10 sets, and the storage of the ratio combination ratio storage area for storing the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total totals are respectively updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the numbers of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the values are “66”, “117”, “45”, and “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 10th to 10th storage areas is set to "27", "81", and "8", respectively. Update to "120", "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage regions, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then the game control main process of step S21TM1010 and thereafter. Start processing. In the game control main processing, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts its operation (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (such as CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then the RAM 102. The accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that

  With the shift to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1130). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It is possible to specify that the control is performed in the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

  Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting change mode command which designates having been controlled by the setting change mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). Based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, it waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, the display control is performed such that the set value being displayed is incremented by 1 each time the setting change operation is accepted, and is returned to 1 after 6 is reached.

  Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 sets the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, and the set value is confirmed. Then, the confirmed set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without being determined as YES in step S21TM1160), the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). (If determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match, so that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 described later.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 can confirm the set value. Switch to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  With the shift to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal from the information output circuit 112 (step S21TM1210). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, the setting of the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals is changed. It is possible to specify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode on the display device included in the external device in a identifiable manner.

  Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command which designates having been controlled by the setting confirmation mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it becomes possible to inform the image display device 5 that the game machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 while waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 causes the CPU 103 to perform the operation shown in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM1320 shown in 13 for determining whether or not the power-off detection process has been executed.

  When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (see FIG. 9-14). It is determined whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case in which the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, or (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the process moves to the setting confirmation mode on the basis of the existence, and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power failure detection process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match) because the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved. If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply was stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 102), and the step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as it is. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output An area in which the output state of the port is saved (output port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area in which the confirmed set value is stored) is also included in the portion that should not be initialized. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base for each set value is stored is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  Incidentally, in step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or if backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), initialization processing is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 Based on the fact that it is also OFF, the initialization of step S21TM1410 is immediately performed without shifting to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. When the process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting is changed. Based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the mode ends and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on, the setting is performed. There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined to be NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after shifting to the confirmation mode and ending the setting confirmation mode.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining a normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set to the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. for selectively performing processing according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

  After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like can inform that the production state or the like has been initialized. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends different according to the specified setting value.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol is determined. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (normal random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then the power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Further, in the case of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460) and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the production device such as the lamp 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the production device such as the game effect lamp 9.

  When the CPU 103 which has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes power-off detection processing (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on the condition that the game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when the game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process of step S21TM1620 is not executed, and the game is stopped as a result.

  For example, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the open state of the glass door frame 3a, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) indicates an abnormality. The level of magnetism that is determined is detected, the level of vibration that is determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band that is determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown) It is determined that a game stop error has occurred based on the detection of the radio wave.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , When the detection signal is input from the second starting opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. The prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays a winning information such as winning ratio information, a winning ratio, a base, and the like, and a display monitor for winning information such as winning ratio information, a winning ratio, a winning ratio, and a base calculated by the winning information process. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing a predetermined main side error process (step S21TM1660), the abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, the abnormality detection flag is set and the step in the next timer interruption is performed. The game may be stopped in S21TM1615 (switch processing is not executed). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, and payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform the control of the display operation in the device 4B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display device 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, and displays the variable symbol of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables setting of tilting motion of one side.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control processing, among the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, the effect After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the control board 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. Then, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display has ended It is also possible to notify the effect control board 12 of the setting value periodically by transmitting information including the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the existing command such as. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute the effect suggesting the set value at various timings such as during variable display and big hit game. May be.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the range of random numbers determined as a big hit differs depending on the set value. For example, the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winnings before the setting change is determined to be a big hit in the relationship with the setting value before the change, but is judged to be out of the relationship with the setting value after the change. On the contrary, there may occur a phenomenon in which it is determined as a big hit in relation to the set value before the change, but a big hit is determined in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of winning the start before the setting change, continue the game after the setting change (execute the game control timer interrupt process including special symbol process process) Because that is inappropriate, by clearing the pending memory (special symbol pending memory, normal symbol pending memory) by initializing the game state, the number of pending memories is set to the initial value (0). There is.

  Further, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of not permitting the interrupt in step S21TM1540, the switch process (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interrupt process is not performed, and the start winning or Passage through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed and the random numbers have not been updated while the setting change mode is being controlled. If the random number is extracted based on the start winning during the period when the setting change mode is controlled, the same random number will be obtained regardless of the timing of the starting winning, and the game will be played based on such a random value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, starting prizes and passing through the gate are invalidated.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15(A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15(B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clerk at the amusement hall or the like clears the switch (setting switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 to set values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1150).

  Thus, in the state where the set value is displayed on the first display section 21TM029A, as shown in FIG. 9-15(C), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 of the game shop clerk or the like to be set. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display portion 21TM029A is changed to 1→2→3→ It is updated and displayed like 4→5→6→1→.... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value “1” in this example) is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A when the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed. (In this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15(D), the CPU 103 detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores the set value in the RAM 102. The stored setting value (setting value “1” in this example) is the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area in this example). ) Is changed (overwritten), and the setting value (setting value “2” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display portion 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Setting completion notification) (step S21TM1200).

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off once, even if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area is displayed). The stored setting value “2”) and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value “2” in this example) are not changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in this embodiment, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed after the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off.

  Then, the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) is ended, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clearing process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) that is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 and indicates the game state at the time of power failure is cleared, and the initial value is set. By setting, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the clerk of the game hall or the like that the RAM clearing process has been executed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the store clerk or the like at the game hall recognizes that the initialization process has been executed after the setting change mode has been completed (the setting value has been confirmed). Then, by executing the processing of step S21TM1430 and thereafter, a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed.

  In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, a mode in which the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited, but the setting value most advantageous to the player (“6” in this embodiment) or the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  In addition, after the RAM clear notification, the CPU 103, after the notification of the RAM clear, causes the display monitor 21TM029 to perform a continuous ratio and a role corresponding to the confirmed set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as continuous ratio, winning combination, and base corresponding to each set value may be displayed in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value) on the display monitor 21TM029.

  When the power is shut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16(A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display on the 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16(B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. When the power is turned on (in the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of step S21TM1210 and step S21TM1220, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the set value in this example, “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the set value (in this example, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A)). The set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1230).

  Note that, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk or the like in the game hall, the first display unit The numerical value displayed on the 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game hall while the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display section 21TM029A (this example Then, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the control of the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The set value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing of step S21TM1320 and thereafter, a game is possible, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like are executable. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to the RAM clear, except when it is determined to be NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information). Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value (setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. That is, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch). ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (in order to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk at the amusement arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to (1), the operation for further executing the initialization processing (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization processing is executed. Do not perform the operation. In this way, the clerk or the like of the game arcade can select whether to control the game machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control either) at the time of turning on the power, and perform the initialization process. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the initialization process is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed except when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the clerk at the amusement hall wants to confirm the set value while the player is playing the game, even if the player turns off the power and then shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the game state remains. It will not be initialized and will not be a disadvantage to the player. On the side of the game arcade, the setting confirmation mode allows confirmation of the set value without any trouble.

  Further, the CPU 103, in association with the end of the setting confirmation mode, displays the set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029, such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. You may make it display each aggregated value of. Further, for each set value, the aggregated values such as continuous ratio, winning combination, and base corresponding to each set value may be displayed in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value) on the display monitor 21TM029.

  9-17 is a setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which the notification of the shift to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 9-17(1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode is controlled, and FIG. 9-17(2) is an image display when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17(1), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17(1), based on the fact that the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1140 in the main process, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the characters "settings are being changed" are displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice "settings are being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to inform that the mode has been changed to the game. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, white blinking manner) to notify that the setting change mode has been entered. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17(1), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right hit display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, if the video signal is not ready to be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 is not controllable) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. In other words, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (for example, a voice "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters "setting being changed" are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17(1), based on the fact that the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or in step S21TM1460, the CPU 103 is executed). Based on receiving the power-on initialization command transmitted to the production control board 12 from), the production control CPU 120 specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting change mode, It is possible to inform that effect. For example, a voice (for example, a voice "setting is being changed") is displayed on the image display device 5 to indicate that "the setting has been changed" and that the speaker 8L, 8R has output the setting change mode. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. With such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended, so that the setting change mode is changed. It will be possible to clearly grasp the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17(1), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing to enter the game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is The effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted along with the execution, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17(2), when the power is turned on (especially before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, an image is not displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is in a state of not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the fact that the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S21TM1220 in the main process, effect control is performed. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that effect. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters “setting confirmation”, and outputs a voice (for example, a voice “setting confirmation is in progress”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to inform that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, white blinking manner) to notify that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17(2), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right hitting display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 is not controllable) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, but the audio notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. In other words, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that the setting confirmation mode has been entered (for example, a voice "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when it becomes possible to supply the video signal to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters “under confirmation of setting”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), on the basis of receiving the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). Based on the fact that the backup command at power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on sent from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460 is received), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and notify that effect. For example, a voice of "setting confirmation completed" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the printer has shifted to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice "setting confirmation is in progress"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. With such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended. It will be possible to clearly grasp the end.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1480 and subsequent steps of the main processing, and the game is ready (the game control timer interrupt processing is Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demo screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-18(1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 9-18(1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and in FIG. 9-18(2), the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 9-18(3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 9-18(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main processing, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is finished (the letter “BONUS end”). It is possible to display the ending image in a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 9-18(4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When the mode of the setting suggestive effect is determined to be the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 9-18(1), when it is determined to be the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-18(2), and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 18(3) is determined, the determination value of is assigned.

  When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the “fine” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a rate of 40% (for example, 40%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low rate (for example, 20%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state is finished is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S21TM1630) in the main process will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 9-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 rises (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control processing), and the main board 11 is sent to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (a connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that the start has occurred. The connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize balls can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I/O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370 for use. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted by one signal line. Note that the connection confirmation signal becomes ready for output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 9-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various kinds of control relating to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data) and output as a control command indicating a predetermined content depending on the set content of the 8-bit data. To be done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The content of the data of the connection confirmation command is “A0(H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. Is a control command transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x(H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. If a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which a prize ball payout operation based on a prize or a ball lending operation based on a ball lending request cannot be normally performed) occurs, the first bit "x" Is set to "1". When a full-tank error occurs, "1" is set in the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the third bit "x". Further, when a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in the 4th bit "x". In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. .. The data content of the prize ball number command is “5x(H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when the game balls are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the winning opening switch corresponding to the general winning opening 10 is used to play the game balls. When it is detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, a prize ball number command "01010011" for notifying the number of three prize balls is transmitted to the general winning opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of 10 prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls is detected. A prize ball number command “0101110” for notifying 14 is transmitted. Note that either the connection confirmation command or the prize ball number command is configured to be transmitted as a prize ball request signal. It should be noted that the prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the condition for paying out the prize balls (occurrence of winning or the like) being established. In this embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the upper 4 bits are made common and the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits. You may do it.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The data content of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation is completed, so that data indicating error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command without sending error information at that timing. It is possible to do so. Data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

  The award ball preparing command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the award ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the award ball operation. This is a control command that is transmitted based on what is done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x(H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set to "x" of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in the second bit "x". Further, when the out-of-ball error occurs, "1" is set to the "x" of the third bit. When a door open error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the predetermined ball operation has not ended due to a predetermined error occurring during execution of the prize ball operation to the game control microcomputer 100. The content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100 as well. Like the connection OK command, the award ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits according to the error state (changes the predetermined bits). Further, any one of the connection OK command, the award ball preparation command, and the award ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a reception ACK signal. The prize ball preparing command is a command (signal) that is output not only when an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed but also when the prize ball operation is being executed.

  Note that the prize ball preparing command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted, based on the state where the prize ball operation cannot be performed due to an error. is there.

  9-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 9-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Further, the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command of the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparing command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100. 21 TM505 is input. In FIG. 9-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a reception ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are transmitted and received by one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparing command.

  FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission/reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , And sends a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it sends a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to the accessible state (step S21TM1860). Also, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the internal device register setting processing of step S21TM1840 and the processing of step S21TM1850, register setting for setting the channel to be used in timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and interrupt vector are set. Register setting is performed. Then, the interrupt by that channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set in the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in accordance with a command signal related to prize ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request). May be included.) is executed.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up interrupt is an interrupt that occurs when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clearing process (step S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the prize ball unpaid number counter initial value in the prize ball unpaid number counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes serial communication circuit setting processing for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Settings for.

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority order initialization process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initialization process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate the timer interrupt. When the timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not checked directly, but the state of the input port is checked. Check flag status.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for controlling the payout of the loan balls in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and for controlling the payout of the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, the information output processing for outputting the prize ball information and the ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and display control processing for turning on the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, out-of-bulb error, prepaid card unit non-connection error) are detected in error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on that the error bit is set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball payout is being performed. When the prize ball payout is completed, control is performed to turn off the prize ball LED 21TM053.

  Further, in this embodiment, the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer have a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020), a prepaid card control process (step S21TM2030), a main control communication process (step S21TM2035), and an information output process (step S21TM2060). And the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmitting and receiving various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. In addition, when the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to transmit the prize ball ACK command “D2” as a reception confirmation signal.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while in the interrupt enabled state, the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Perform interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the reception data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read reception data is a prize ball number command in the reception interrupt process. When the received data is the prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined as the prize ball number. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 9-25 is for a ball lending executed between the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the communication process of FIG. Here, as will be described later, as a method of limiting the ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the following first to fourth ball lending limiting methods.

  First, (1) the first ball lending limitation method, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). In addition, (2) the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During the period, the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) stops the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 to the payout motor 21TM289. In addition, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method is EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power supply (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power supply, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that the proper amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. Hereinafter, the first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described.

  FIG. 9-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is on, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal being both in the ON state. When the trailing edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls are paid out to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of limiting the ball lending in the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the above-mentioned first ball lending limiting method to the fourth ball lending limiting method. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-27.

  FIG. 9-27 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF while the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (paying of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is performed. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in such a case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). The state is turned off instead of the state.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (game medium payout) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. In addition, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and therefore the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Is turned off. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. As long as it is inoperable, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is usual that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  FIG. 9-29 is a main substrate when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 9-29, it is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). The PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is turned off without being turned on.

  As a result, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ. Since both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (paying out game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Since the open state of is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Then, when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade operates the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a clerk or the like in the game arcade closes the gaming machine frame 3 in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, so that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration that can be controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

  In this embodiment, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-30 is a main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and a payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on the connection confirmation signal being on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is kept in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. 100), the PRDY signal is turned on regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  If the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. 100 is in a state of being electrically connected), the PRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, the payout control board 21TM037 allows a payout operation), and the BRDY signal is in an ON state (that is, a ball lending switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which the predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned on), the CPU 103 sets While the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the EXS signal is not turned on but is turned off. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command because the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be prevented from executing the payout control of the game medium. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to inform that the ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when the EXS signal remains in the OFF state for a predetermined time after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out). To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal when the BRQ signal is turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state based on the card. The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. In addition, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled.

  Further, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is in the ON state (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example of returning the BRQ signal to the OFF state and further returning the BRDY signal to the OFF state, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on. The BRQ signal may be kept in the ON state and the BRDY signal may be kept in the ON state even after a lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The EXS signal may be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending processing according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed). When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(The method of not executing the ball lending restriction in the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. I shall. That is, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state at the timing before being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the communication processing performed between control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main substrate 11 to the payout control substrate 21TM037 is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal based on that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and that the connection confirmation command is received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is kept in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100 and When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, the PRDY signal is output regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

  If the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input while the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 determines that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and that the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is received based on the connection confirmation command. When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  In this way, even during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. On the side of the control microcomputer 21TM370, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, it is possible to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, and the setting change mode or the setting check mode is set. It is possible to reduce the control load for not executing the payout control during the controlled period. In addition, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be inspected and the workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to send the connection confirmation command even after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  In addition, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is completed and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. .. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. In addition, when the payout of the predetermined number of game media ends and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(How to restart ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted because the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the power supply is thereafter turned on to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, refer to FIG. 9-32. It will be specifically described by using. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, based on the fact that the power is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and after the power is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the setting is performed. After the completion of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the discontinued payout is restarted.

  FIG. 9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch based on a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF while the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the OFF state, not the ON state, of the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. The payout of the game medium is not executed while the process is being executed.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Then, the power supply is restarted, and the payout control is performed based on that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled when the power is turned on is ended (the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the PRDY signal is in the ON state). Microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid amount storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid amount data becomes 0 one by one. The payout operation is performed. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is subsequently restored, the setting is changed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to restart the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example illustrated in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to power failure during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. The example in which the suspended payout process is restarted after the end of the above is shown. However, this power off is caused by the clerk at the game hall turning the power switch 21TM055 to the OFF state in order to change or confirm the set value. The power cut may be generated or may be the power cut generated by turning off the power switch 21TM055 at the end of business at the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 during the payout process, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. In response to the detection of the state, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and then the process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.After the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the interrupted payout process is stopped. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power interruption)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored, specifically, referring to FIG. 9-33. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not store the unpaid amount data (or the unpaid amount storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the number of unpaid game media is not executed.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so the CPU 103 changes the setting. The connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF while the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed.

  After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, the predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before the power supply was restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Out of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out due to the suspension (forced termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and then, when the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting change mode or the setting control mode is controlled. By not executing the payout for the unpaid number after completion of the confirmation mode, the control for backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power is cut off during payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped) by not backing up the unpaid number of data. Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power is cut off, the unpaid number of data is backed up and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are restored after the power is restored. On condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid quantity is executed based on the backed up data of the unpaid quantity (restarting the payout based on the backup data), while the power is restored. When it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game medium corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not completed. The payout of the game media corresponding to the payout number may not be executed.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the timer interrupt process for the game control can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the forced termination method of ball lending that accompanies the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. In addition, the PRDY signal can be output (ON state) regardless of whether the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (ON state or OFF state). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly ending the ball lending associated with the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This makes it possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 9-34 is a timing chart showing signal transmission/reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as the reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception.

  Although not shown, there is a winning during the execution of the communication process for connection confirmation (from the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal is sent from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection OK command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, and the prize balls are paid out (the prize ball payout operation). When finished, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the payout of prize balls (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Invalid winning in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing signal transmission/reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth The general winning opening switch, and the switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a big hit determination process and the like. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are also not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it does not detect the detection signal output from each switch and does not execute the big hit determination process or the like. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game balls by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base total is not executed. In other words, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to add up each item such as ratio, role ratio, and base, so during the period in which the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is controlled, these items The processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced because the processing is out of the aggregation period.

  While controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the fact that the game medium passes through each winning opening. And That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the big hit determination process and the like are not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 on the basis of not receiving the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, during the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize balls is not executed even if the game medium passes through each winning opening.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23. It becomes possible to execute switch processing to check the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal), it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening, and it is possible to send the prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. Further, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process process including a big hit determination process.

  The gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through one of the winning openings (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the game controlling microcomputer 100 outputs a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and has received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 and outputs a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out the game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  If the setting value is likely to be changed, the switch process is executed to extract the big hit determination random number, and the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number. When the set value before the change is a big hit, but the set value after the change (the set value after the confirmation) is not a big hit, the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number, or conversely before the change. However, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number, which does not result in a big hit with the setting value of (1) but becomes a big hit with the changed setting value (setting value after confirmation). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the player or the game hall is disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, by not performing the payout of the prize balls based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the respective winning openings, and by not executing the jackpot determination process, the jackpot determination is performed. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the game hall is prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. As for the setting confirmation mode, unlike the setting change mode, it can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt processing is being executed, not when the power is turned on, and the switch processing is performed during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. And, if the special symbol process processing can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, similarly to the setting change mode, it is possible to control only when the power is turned on, and the prize balls are not paid out based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the respective winning openings, and the big hit determination is made. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). .. Therefore, because the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, etc., is a game stop error occurring during the period when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? Whether or not it is determined (step S21TM1615), if it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. In this way, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) is different between when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the game stop error occurs.

  By the way, by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100, as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, on the basis of not receiving the connection OK command during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium by not transmitting the prize ball number command. In this way, the game control microcomputer 100 does not cause the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the payout control based on the fact that the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal are not output, It is possible to invalidate the winning.

  Incidentally, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated so that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled. .. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 can be set based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is better not to execute the switch process and the special symbol process process.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration itself capable of detecting that the gaming medium has passed through each winning opening). Also good. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, the payout control command is stopped by stopping the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The payout control is not executed by the microcomputer 21TM370, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during gaming machine frame/door frame open detection)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing signal transmission/reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the gaming machine frame/door frame opening detection. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, during normal operation, a reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Receive a connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and in the configuration in which the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize balls to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down is not physically connected to the upper plate where the flowing down prize balls are stored, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it. Here, in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the award ball preparation command as the reception ACK signal is sent to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This award ball preparing command is until the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the game machine is closed.

  In this way, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the gaming medium passes through each winning opening and a winning is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the payout motor 21TM289. The prize ball payout control is not executed without driving. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game controlling microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has paid out a predetermined number of game media, transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  If the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of the prize balls, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize balls and wins the prize balls. Data of the unpaid number out of the number designated by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game controlling microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven and the payout control of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the configuration that can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is adopted. Even in this case, the payout limiting method during the opening of the gaming machine frame/door frame shown in FIG. 9-36 can be applied. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and during the period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The machine frame 3 is normally open. During the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is restricted.

  Next, the control when the power is cut off in the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 9-37(1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power interruption, divided into different charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power interruption. The power-off pattern shown in Fig. 9-37(1) shows the control when the power is cut off in the situation where "the set value is not confirmed" during "changing the set value". The set value at the time is the set value when the power was last turned on. In addition, the pattern related to the power cut shown in FIG. 9-37(2) shows the control when the power cut occurs in the situation where the “set value is confirmed” is performed during “changing the set value”. The set value at power failure recovery is the set value when the power is cut off.

  That is, FIG. 9-37(1) shows the setting when the power is cut off in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state and the “set value determination” is not performed (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 9-37(2) shows the control related to the value, and the control related to the set value in the case where the power is cut off after the operation of “set value determination” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state is performed. Showing.

  Further, FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from top to bottom according to the order of occurrence (see “Order” column and “Status” column). ). Further, in FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2), the “lock switch” column shows the ON/OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (sequence 1 to 8). In the “setting value” column, setting value data (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. Further, in the column of "display of set value" in the drawing, the display contents (the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. There is.

  When the setting change operation is performed, as shown in the top row of the "status" column in Fig. 9-37(1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on (sequence 1), and As shown in the “Lock Switch” column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. Further, in FIG. 9-37(1), the "set value" at the time of "power-on" of the order 1 is that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1" at this time. , "1".

  Further, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the “setting value display” column is blank (blank) at this stage because the power has just been turned on and the RAM 102 This indicates that the display of the set value is not started because the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not yet performed.

  After the "power-on" status, the "setting change mode start" status (order 2) is entered. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. 9-37(1), the "lock switch" column is "ON" and the "set value" column is the RAM 102. The setting value is "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed, and the "setting value display" field is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. It is “1” based on the fact that the setting value read out from and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the status of "changing set values" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37(1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the "setting value" field remains "1", but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from "1" to "2", the "setting value display" column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to "2".

  Further, when the setting value is being changed (sequence 4), the “lock switch” column remains “ON” and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37(1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the "setting value" field remains "1", but the setting information temporary storage area The setting value stored in is changed from "2" to "3" so that the "setting value display" column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. The new value is changed to "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37(1), when the power is cut off during “changing the set value” (sequence 5), the operation for fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not operated. Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for confirming the set value) has not been executed, the "set value" column remains "1". That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the power failure.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37(1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the power is turned on (sequence 6). In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the “setting value” column remains “1” and the “setting value display” column also becomes “1”. It should be noted that the same is true in the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in the order 7.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state), and when the power is cut off, the setting value of the RAM 102 is set. Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is The setting value is the value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time (before the power was turned off). In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power failure occurs after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37(2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power supply cutoff occurs before the setting value is determined will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, the "set value determination" shown in order 5 is performed after the "setting value changing" shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for confirming the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ((1) stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is "OFF" based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored setting value (the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", whereby the setting value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  When the power is cut off in this state (sequence 6), the process of overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the setting value) is executed, The “set value” column is “3”. That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the power failure.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37(2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (sequential 7), the situation of the “setting change mode start” thereafter ( In the order 8), the set value (“3” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is read. ), the “setting value” column becomes “3”, and the “setting value display” column also becomes “3”. It should be noted that the same is true in the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode in the order 8.

  As described above, when the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off during the control of the setting change mode, it means that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted. Therefore, it is a case where a store clerk or the like in the game arcade accidentally shifts the game machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on and further performs the setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, the change of the set value can be stopped and the state before the shift to the setting change mode can be restored.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involves turning off the power supply (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and then turning on the power supply, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is not turned off. When a disconnection occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed after the power is turned on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control related to the set value becomes unstable. Can be avoided, and appropriate control regarding the set value can be executed.

  FIG. 9-38 is a rendering device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) performs notification that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  FIG. 9-38(1) shows a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol) (game control) Timer interrupt processing step S21TM1660), a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the performance control board 12 (production control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt processing step S21TM1710). ), when it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated The command is transmitted to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) (step S21TM1710 of game control timer interrupt processing). That is, the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-38(2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command, and the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, even though the operation is not controlled in any of the setting confirmation modes, and to notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed.

  In this example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command, and outputs "the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected" as the abnormal operation warning notification. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the abnormal operation warning notification has a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. 9-38(2), Even during the variable display of the symbols, the clerk at the amusement hall, etc. does not control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the operation for changing the setting value is performed. It is possible to clearly understand and confirm whether or not fraud has occurred. It should be noted that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected (for example, a voice "operation of a lock switch or a setting switch has been detected"), and the game effect lamp 9 May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that the operation for changing the set value is detected.

  In the present embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation for operating (lock switch 21TM051 and clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period during which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or within the period when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the setting value is being changed illegally.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, to check the illegality. I try to suppress it.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, the ball lending is suspended or stopped, and the prize ball payout is also suspended or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island becomes open. Thereby, it is possible to see the back side surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position opposite to the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch ( It becomes possible to operate the setting changeover switch) 21TM052. That is, even when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and/or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is irrespective of whether or not the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When an operation is performed, notification that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is performed is performed to strengthen the illegal suppression.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 according to the present embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. To be done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A gaming machine frame/door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame/door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It will be in the ON state even when there is.

  From the third terminal, the all symbol determination frequency signal is output. The all symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when confirmed), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulsed signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. The all-start signal is output from the fourth terminal. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball is won at the first starting winning opening and is also output when a gaming ball is winning at the second starting winning opening. And the pulse width is 0.1 second.

  One signal for the big hit is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. Two jackpot signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state when being controlled in the jackpot gaming state, and is also in the ON state when being controlled in the high base state. That is, a period in which one jackpot signal is in the OFF state and two jackpot signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal that is output each time 10 out balls (game balls that have been launched into the game area and led to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and have a pulse width of 0. It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. The winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening It is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a prize is detected by the switch) and that is output each time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Further, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is frequently played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first start prize hole). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (for example, when a prize is won). In addition, a case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1 When the starting port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality has been detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, since the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the misconduct has been performed, It is possible to notify the outside that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40(1), when the setting change mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is kept in the ON state for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF due to the end of the setting change mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40(2), when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned off at the same time with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40(1) Similarly, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  If the RAM clear is executed without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal remains on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  In this way, the security signal remains in the ON state even while it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the security signal is input based on the input. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but regarding the security signal, the parity is set in the setting change mode (or in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even if the check result is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the device can recognize and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the control device may have been temporarily controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and input the security signal. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the security signal is input based on the input. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the RAM has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40(3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, the security signal is output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, while the security signal is not output during the period in the setting confirmation mode, and the period during which the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode. Does not output the security signal, and does not output the security signal even during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, if the setting confirmation mode is entered at power-on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is kept off because the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, no security signal is output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-40(5), the RAM clear is executed after the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. If (YES in step S21TM1320, or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40(4), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds. In addition, in a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the RAM clear is executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  In this way, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is turned off, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Become a relationship. With such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not in the ON state at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40(6), when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame/door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Even after the machine frame/door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Since there is a restriction on the assignment of the setting change, it may be difficult to assign the output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39(2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal to which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is in the ON state when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Further, when a fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When the fraudulent activity is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included, and each prize hole has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is frequently played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first start prize hole). It is determined as an abnormal prize based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (for example, when a prize is won). In addition, a case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, 10 times or more consecutive in the game control timer interrupt process). 1 When the starting port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch abnormality has been detected. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it remains ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 9-39(2), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal which is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the set value can be specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that an illegal act has been performed and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. Without this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that a process related to the setting change may have been executed). Further, with the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is changed). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off.) After that, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided in the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change correspondence signal is set in the management device. By correlating and displaying the set value determined in advance with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of a plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the administrator of the game shop via the management device, and the setting values that the administrator has decided in advance and the settings changed in the setting change work The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, it is possible to optimize the management related to the settings in a plurality of gaming machines in the gaming store by confirming the settings of the gaming machine or performing the setting change work again. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, it corresponds to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, as the special mode setting change corresponding signal, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output. In this example, the same number of pulses as the number of set values is output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 seconds, and for example, when the set value is 3, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 9-42(1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode has ended without changing the set value. Although the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode is based on that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output as.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the set value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (Setting value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value are output from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode have ended, but at a predetermined predetermined timing, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. It Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid award balls by 1000. Or an event related to the gaming machine error such as detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a, or detecting a magnetic abnormality. When it occurs), a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 9-42(1), one pulse is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal when the big hit occurs.

  As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each gaming machine. For example, the external device may not be properly input with the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even when the setting value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the setting value at a predetermined timing thereafter, and it is possible to strengthen the prevention of fraud in which the setting value is changed by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the setting value being changed in the setting change mode. In this case, when the setting change mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3 and the setting change corresponding signal is set. Three pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(2), three pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41(1), the operation for changing the setting value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting value was controlled, and the setting value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 9-41(2), the operation of changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the setting value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. There is. In this way, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. The signal output processing can be simplified.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42(3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change corresponding signal is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1 based on the setting change corresponding signal. 1 pulse is output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), one pulse is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal triggered by the occurrence of the big hit.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside of whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). The setting value stored in the area, which is the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value It is possible to output the signal for notifying the signal from the common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39(2), when the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state becomes OFF, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulses (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Setting change corresponding signal is output.

(Modification of game control main processing)
Next, another mode relating to the game control main processing of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 9-44, it is possible to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to the accessible state (step S21TM1060), moves to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43, and clears input through the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to turn on when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and initialization processing is executed (step S21TM2220). The series of processes (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) accompanying the initialization process are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG. 9-13, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. To do. The processing shown in steps S21TM2120 to S2170 is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1320 to S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 of FIG. 9-44). When the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. It is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting value changeable mode. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the fact that The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. After executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted to (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not meet the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. 9-12, and a description thereof will be omitted. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined as NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Even if the processing (1) is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by RAM clear) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON at the time of power-on is not satisfied, Are not controlled by the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the series of processes relating to step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 is the same as step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 9-13. Since it is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, description thereof will be omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2270) and then the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command after transmitting the backup command at power-off recovery or the initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270). S21TM2520) and a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by a production device such as 9. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command and then the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by a production device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating the end of the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode Since the effect control CPU 120 side can specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other modified examples of the characteristic part 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the set value is not limited to this. The switch for changing is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). May be With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A), as compared with the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when changing the set value, it becomes easy to confirm the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value, and the workability can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the setting value is displayed in the partial display area (first display portion 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 in which the game information such as the aggregated base is displayed has been shown. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 for displaying the totalized game state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, since the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped more clearly individually, the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information is facilitated. Therefore, the workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is provided but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display portion 21TM029A) in order while being controlled in the setting change mode (for example, It is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6). Stored setting values (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) are stored in the setting value storage area (setting values stored in the setting value storage area are stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be confirmed by overwriting the set value. The clerk at the game arcade displayed the setting value to be confirmed by switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value can be confirmed as the set value of the game machine.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming machine is an example of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. It may be an enclosed game machine in which a game medium is enclosed in a game machine and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed game machine, the information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037, For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the set value It may include information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit these pieces of information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ..

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is in the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, being in the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, or the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, but the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device are controlled based on being controlled in the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the like may notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display is caused to emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode. On the basis of being controlled to, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, etc. informs that it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (for example, 7 The segment indicator may emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an indicator (round number indicator) for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game, and an instruction for the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). If a display device (right-handed display device) or the like is provided to indicate that the display device is in the process of setting change mode, the display of the process is in the setting confirmation mode. Alternatively, the light may be emitted in any of the modes.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is set. The example has been shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended without the signal being turned off. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. Accordingly, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal may be turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By using this type of signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period in which the device is being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expectation suggesting effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the setting value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) of the gaming machine and the jackpot expectation. The number of selections) may be changed. For example, even if the jackpot expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (1 or 2), the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expectation suggesting effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. In addition, even if the reach has a low jackpot expectation level, the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is accordingly executed, so that the player can play the pachinko game machine 1 concerned. Since the set value can be expected to be high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the game is played. When a combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus). With such slot machines, the percentage of bonuses that are established varies depending on the set value, and it is possible to change the set value by controlling the slot machine in the setting change mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and Other Forms of Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, details and other forms of the above-mentioned characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). In addition, the gaming machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are fulcrum points respectively. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door using the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player).

  The outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that is an outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body made of synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape having a center penetrating when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a store clerk at the game arcade performs maintenance of the game board surface (for example, a measure to eliminate a ball clogging, etc.), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism part (one end side) as a fulcrum toward the front side like a door. In order to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc., which are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, in order to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism section (one end side) as a fulcrum, It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can specify that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the opened state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of specifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13, and This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIG. 9-11 and the like, illustration of some of the processes (for example, the process shown in FIG. 9-11) is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 10-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This processing is similar to the processing shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process proceeds to the setting change/confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 causes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 to match a regular value, for example, one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game hall), a value (for example, 0) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area. There is a case. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) that is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 and indicates the game state before the power supply is stopped is cleared. Although the initial value is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized. The notification that the game state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process is performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production control device 120 such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoration of power supply (step S21TM3045), The process moves to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified by notifying that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to step S21TM3510 and subsequent processes related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM3020). If the condition 3 is YES (YES in S21TM3030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070), and/or the setting value is changed. It becomes possible to confirm, and the game machine frame 3 is closed (NO in step S21TM3060), or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3070), and then shifts to the normal game processing. .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, 2) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM3060 and S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, (3) under the condition that it is determined in step S21TM3040 that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES), As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is somehow illegal. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

  In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM3060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a When it is in the closed state, the game process is shifted to the normal game process. In addition, in step S21TM3070, when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the normal game process. With the shift to the normal game processing, the processing corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 becomes executable, and FIG. The game control timer interrupt processing shown can be executed (special symbol process processing can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the setting value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), and transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the normal value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area, , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value error command is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message "setting value is abnormal" is displayed. Do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value should be changed (for example, a message "Please change the setting value" is displayed). Note that the speakers 8L and 8R may notify that there is a possibility that the set value is abnormal (for example, output a voice "The set value is abnormal."), and change the set value. You may make it notify that it is in a proper state (for example, output the voice "Please change a setting value.").

  When the CPU 103 transmits the setting value abnormality error command, it checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). .

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped is cleared. The initial value is set, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and 0 is stored in the setting value storage area. On the other hand, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each area for each set value is not cleared. The total value is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), then transmits the initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 10-2. Move to. It should be noted that the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it can specify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is off. The command transmission flag may be cleared at the time of shifting to the normal game processing (step S21TM1470-). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command when power is restored (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM3120, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). When it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the result of the data check of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, In the case where it is determined to be YES in step S21TM3020) and the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to the normal game processing, it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM is cleared to clear the area including the setting value storage area (step S21TM3150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM3120, S21TM3130, and S21TM3140, it is possible to change the setting value ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, when NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is temporarily cut off and the next power-on (1) to (3) All of the conditions are satisfied and the mode is changed to the setting change mode to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. It may be done. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command may display a message (for example, the characters “Please turn off the power.”) on the image display device 5 to prompt the power to be turned off. . Further, the CPU 103, when any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. In the processing of FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, the CPU 103 specifies the setting confirmation mode. The command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). Based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

  Further, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current setting value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set (NO) in the process of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game process. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730) and confirms whether the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and power failure occurs during setting change. It is determined that there is not (NO in step S21TM3020), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and further, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). No), the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) is not executed. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the normal process when the power is restored, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. When the fact (NO in step S21TM3060) is confirmed, the process may be shifted to the normal game process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that the RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (YES in step S21TM3530), the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0). If the operation for changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again and executes the processes of step S21TM3010 and thereafter.

  As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Can be not initialized (NO in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

  In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a waits for the open state. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting or confirm the setting, by instructing the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a to be opened. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands notifies the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened by using the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like, and also activates the lock switch 21TM051. It is operated to notify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended. For example, the image display device 5 may display a message "Open the game machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode."

  Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended and the process is shifted to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21TM051 In response to the operation of (is turned from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch ( In response to the operation of the clear switch) 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  And as shown in FIG. 9-38(2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed, even though the operation is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the operation is not controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the illegal It is possible to check whether or not

  Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. Thus, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the setting change mode is controlled, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-3(1). Is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

  Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). For the sake of explanation, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. It is updated in the order of →1→2→3→1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E→1→2→3→1.

  In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, as the information corresponding thereto, information (numerical letter E in this example) different from the number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. Is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly understand that a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, and prompt a setting change operation. If a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, and if that value (0 in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the manager of the game hall May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, the display monitor 21TM029 displays information different from the numeral (the letter E in this example). By preventing such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3(1), when a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled. , The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, if the setting change operation is performed even once and a regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, However, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, the set value is updated within the range of the regular set value during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state). The set value storage area does not store a value different from the normal value (0 in this example), and the display monitor 21TM029 also stores information different from the normal value (character E in this example). ) Is never displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3(2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, step S21TM3550 Then, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. For the sake of description, this example shows an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of →3→1→2→3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2→3→1→2→3.

  That is, when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting changing mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting changing operation is performed thereafter. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state), the set value is updated within the range of the set value, and the set value storage area does not show the set value. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), it sets a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Therefore, after that, on the game hall side, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the set value is not changed to the regular value through the setting change mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine maker sets the flag during setting change in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), the gaming machine side then goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is ended, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Restriction on ball lending based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 is a main substrate 11, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between a payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) and a card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, Do not turn on the PRDY signal. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state where it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer. Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the CPU 103 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if it is electrically connected to 100.

  As a result, while the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since the EXS signal is OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this manner, the PRDY signal is turned on while the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is supposed not to. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Then, a clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 causes the payout control board 21TM037 to output the BRDY signal based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When the predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is inoperable unless is opened, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is usual that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the game is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and power-on thereafter, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, a proper amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to grasp the control status of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, a command and a determination process therefor are necessary, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it will become.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is prevented from executing the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode or whether it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period checked in the setting confirmation mode are restricted without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. It With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized for the ball lending process and the prize ball process.

  In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of troubles due to the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate number of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work and the like of the game machine when the game machine is opened.

(Resuming ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of being set will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-5. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the game medium is being paid out. The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (closed state).

  FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. FIG. 21 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  During the period when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, while the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Thus, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, during the period in which the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal is detected. Is also in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Then, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (the PRDY signal is in the ON state), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

  Therefore, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power-off occurred (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout With respect to the unpaid number that has not been paid, the payout is executed, so that the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption while the ball lending is being executed, and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, To explain. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on that the power supply is cut off while the payout of the game medium is being executed, and the power supply is turned on to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is restarted.

  FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after opening the game machine frame 3. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10A is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is off. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period in which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned on. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state and maintaining it in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed and then opens the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. ..

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. Then, based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to determine the number of unpaid numbers. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, it is possible that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power is cut off (moves to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7(1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is a game control micro. It is input to the I/O 105 of the computer 100 and the I/O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the clerk at the game arcade operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to clear the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and clear the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both clearing RAM clearing will be executed.

  Next, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. 10-7 (2) Will be specifically described. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7(2), when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed even after the payout is not restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. do not do.

  FIG. 10-7(2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is in the on state, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state, instead of keeping it in the ON state, based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned on. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state and maintaining it in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). Has ended), and the PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout operation is performed one by one until it becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7(2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining payouts to be paid out). Even when the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed because there is no game medium.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game controlling microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout controlling microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the data of the unpaid number is initialized. Therefore, before the power is cut off (it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed (before) (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout has not been paid out. No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the unpaid number data stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is accordingly accompanied. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid number, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Modified example regarding ball lending process (switch to setting change mode) when power is cut off)
FIG. 10-8(1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the above-described clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I/O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I/O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  When the game clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. The 21TM052a is turned off. On the contrary, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 is not initialized but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on and cleared. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

  Next, regarding the processing in the case where the withdrawal is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure while the ball lending is being executed and the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, FIG. 10-8 (2) Will be specifically described. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8(2), when the power is cut off while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout in progress is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout. .

  FIG. 10-8(2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. It That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 and suspends the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk of the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after opening the game machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal but turns it off even if the VL signal is on, that is, even if it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, and the payout control is performed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if the predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 because the BRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the OFF state, not the ON state, of the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, based on that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is OFF, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. If not, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not maintaining the PRDY signal in the ON state and maintaining it in the OFF state, the ball lending process is not executed. In this way, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Therefore, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on)). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the data of the unpaid amount stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). (Because there is a medium), the PRDY signal is turned on, and the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted to complete the ball lending. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is backed up in the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned on because the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (because there are no remaining game media to be paid). Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 has been executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power failure occurs (before the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid amount that has not been paid out , The payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid amount stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized, so the ball lending is performed. It is possible to appropriately protect the data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to power failure during the ball lending process, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number storage formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is stored. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power supply is restored, a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is paid out.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (a detection signal in an open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has been shown. The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, so that the ball lending is executed. Try not to be done.

(Prize ball payout restriction based on detection of open state of game machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of limiting the payout of prize balls when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-9. FIG. 10-9 is a game control microcomputer when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  At this time, when a clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and when the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the glass door frame 3a is opened), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down is not physically connected to the upper plate where the flowing down prize balls are stored, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it.

  In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. The microcomputer 100 for use has detected the passage of the game medium relating to any one of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the special winning opening. Based on the above, a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. This award ball preparing command is until the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the game machine is closed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, each gaming medium has each winning opening. Even if the winning award is detected after passing through, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the prize ball payout control. In this way, it is possible not to execute the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game controlling microcomputer 100.

  Then, a clerk or the like in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The provided gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in a state in which neither the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 nor the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. With the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a both closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, thereby causing the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number designated by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has paid out a predetermined number of game media, transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

(Resumption of prize ball payout after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the payout of the prize balls, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the game medium is being paid out. The payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is restarted based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (closed state).

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened and the gaming machine frame/door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided during the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  This unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number counting switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the reception ACK signal is used for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This award ball preparing command is until the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 stops detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until it is closed.

  As described above, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even while the game medium is being paid out. Do not pay out game media. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game controlling microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to operate based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid quantity storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid quantity becomes zero. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed.

(Prize ball processing at the time of power failure (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-11, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure during the payout of the prize balls and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. It will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 11, the game medium payout is interrupted based on that the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, and the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. Instead, after the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is restarted.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal is received and the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted), a game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls in the award ball request signal, and transmits the award ball number command as the set award ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 10-1 is executed without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the lock switch 21TM051 being in the OFF state when the power is turned on. Shall be. Here, until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) illustrated in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a process at the time of turning on the power (after the power is turned on, the serial number shown in FIG. During the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the game medium payout is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (from power-on to the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10A (step Until the execution of S21TM1480), the payout of game media is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. To do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed and then opens the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since it is in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The game medium is not paid out.

  When the clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state, and the gaming machine frame/door frame is opened. Based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are detected. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the supply of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a thereafter, is completed. As described above, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On that condition, it is possible to restart the suspended game medium payout and complete the prize ball payout.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (moves to setting change mode))
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring during the payout of the prize balls, and the process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the power is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process that is a power-on process (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 10A is performed (step S21TM1480). () until execution)), because the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, even when the data of the unpaid number is not cleared, the state in which the payout of the game medium is suspended is maintained. It will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid amount data stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Therefore, even if the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and after), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be open. In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It becomes a state.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing). And the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect any open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, and drives the payout motor 21TM289. Let

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is performed. In the microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is not cleared (because there are remaining game media to be paid), Based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid amount stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area of the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are Since it does not exist), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game controlling microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout controlling microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM21TM302 accordingly. The unpaid quantity data stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, so that the data of the unpaid number is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14) in the prize ball processing that was executed before), the payout has not been paid out. No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power-off during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052 is operated to clear the data of the unpaid number, so that the interrupted payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is not paid out.

(Modified example regarding prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring during the payout of the prize balls, and the process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. It will be specifically described by using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. When operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-13, when the power supply is cut off while the game medium is being paid out, the current payout is stopped, and when the power is restored and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, The payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without restarting the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal is transmitted again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (from receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal until transmitting the connection confirmation command as the award ball request signal), the game is played. The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receipt of the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 dispenses the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command. During the period of paying out the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number command, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the game is played. Discontinue delivery of media. At this time, the unpaid amount data is stored in the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the clerk at the game arcade turns the power switch 21TM055 on after the game machine frame 3 is opened. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further initialization of the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. Also, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to be in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process that is a process at the time of turning on the power (controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. Until the execution of)), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared. It will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processing of step S21TM3710 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 10B is executed. When the RAM clear process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the fact that the RAM clear is executed is notified. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10A, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the payout operation is to be performed. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected does not depend on whether the setting change mode is controlled, or whether the setting confirmation mode is controlled. No, the payout of the game medium is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball process is not executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to make the closed state, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in the ON state (from step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on this, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the store clerk at the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal in the ON state and the game machine frame/door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 starts driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is not detected.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8(2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on)). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the data of the unpaid amount stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). Since there is a medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the number of unpaid data is 1 until the data becomes 0. The payout operation is performed one by one. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, based on the fact that the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, , If the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended payout of the game medium is restarted and the prize balls are paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is backed up in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8(1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed because the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the data of the unpaid quantity stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 has been executed) However, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not initialized and is executed before the power failure occurs (before the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the award ball processing (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid amounts not paid out , The payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power-off during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid quantity is not cleared and is maintained. Therefore, the suspended payout is restarted, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power supply is restored, a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is passed, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the unpaid amount is paid out.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (a detection signal in an open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has been shown. The game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be provided on the main board 11 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Thus, even if a winning is detected, the prize ball number command is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is not received, so that the payout of prize balls is not executed.

(Security signal and setting change output signal output period)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. By this security signal, as described above, the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clear), fraudulent activity detection, game stop target error detection, or the like has been performed can be notified to the outside. In addition, the security signal, from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until the period is determined to be NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game processing is executed), it is turned on.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39(1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the shift to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. From step S21TM3510 shown in 10-2, until the period is determined to be NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game processing is executed), it is turned on. With this setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when shifting to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned off, and then from the same seventh terminal of the RAM 102. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area are output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14(1), when the mode is changed to the setting change mode accompanied by the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) at power-on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the process shifts to the normal game process. Also, with the completion of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed after the setting change mode has ended and the process has shifted to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, 2 pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14(2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  In this way, the security signal remains in the ON state during the period in which it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is in the ON state when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended. (To be precise, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the process has shifted to the normal game processing), it is turned off. Regarding the security signal as well, it is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed as shown in FIG. 10-15(3). Does not immediately turn off after the setting change mode ends, and remains on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15(4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed after the shift to the normal game processing, the state becomes OFF.

  In addition, in either case of (3) and (4) in FIG. 10-15, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (correctly, setting change). The setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, and the state becomes OFF at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed), and thereafter (for example, after 50 ms or more has elapsed). Based on the fact that the set value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. This makes it possible to easily specify the setting value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14(2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is the power-on time (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds from the time of executing the clear.

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but the setting change mode is not entered. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, it is highly possible that the mode has changed to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear). If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. It is possible to recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the setting value).

  That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but it is possible that the mode has not been changed to the setting change mode. If it is recognizable by the management device and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that (only the confirmation may have been performed without changing the setting value), and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, The management device can recognize that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been entered (particularly, there is a high possibility that the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear has been entered). In this way, it is possible to distinguish what control the game machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the game machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the process based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be distinguished and recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so the RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Alternatively, step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about 30 seconds while being controlled in the setting change mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is 0 when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  In this way, since the security signal output period is different between when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, each gaming machine can change the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended (to be exact, the setting change mode Or, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was completed and the process was shifted to the normal game processing, it is turned off. Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. Further, when the security signal input period is longer than the setting change corresponding signal input period by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode is controlled and the RAM clear is executed accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it can be recognized that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without the RAM clear.

  In this way, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from different output terminals, so that the external device to which these signals are input has a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the game machine. It is possible to distinguish between the occurrence of and the fact that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be specified based on the input period of the security signal.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the setting was confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode is switched to and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15(5), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. And, even if it is less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is ended (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state) to shift to the normal game processing, at least a period of 50 ms or more, The setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on, the on state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  If the period in which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as the hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been entered. As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Regarding the setting change correspondence signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change correspondence signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine can operate on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period under control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after being turned on, and then the set value is changed. When the number of pulses of 100 ms width corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period in which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) It is not possible to recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width of 100 ms) that is output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is incorrect. May be recognized as As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, so that the external device side Then, it becomes possible to accurately specify the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1.

  10-16 is a diagram showing another example of the effect device provided in the effect control board 12. FIG. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, in addition to the game effect lamp 9 on the lamp control board 14, the first off-screen display 21TM101 outside the screen, the second off-screen display 21TM102 outside the screen, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 and the setting change state indicator 21TM104 are connected, and these are each constituted by a light emitting device such as an LED. Further, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common emission color.

  The off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 is configured by two light emitting devices. CPU120 for production control, when there is a change in the first reserved memory number, that is, when a winning in the first start winning port has occurred (when the first reserved memory number has increased), and the first special symbol. When the variable display is finished and the display result is confirmed (when the first reserved memory number decreases), the first reserved memory number that specifies the updated first reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen first reserved display 21TM101 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the first reserved memory number designated by the first reserved memory number designation command.

  For example, when the first number of reserved storages designated by the first number of reserved storages command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the first number of reserved storages designated by the first designated number of reserved storages is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the first number of reserved storages designated by the first designated number of reserved storages is 3, one light emitting device is in a blinking state and the other light emitting device is in a lighting state. Then, when the first reserved storage number designated by the first reserved storage number designating command is 4, both the light emitting devices are brought into a blinking state.

  The second off-screen second display 21TM102 is composed of two light emitting devices. CPU120 for production control, when there is a change in the second reserved memory number, that is, when a winning to the second start winning port has occurred (when the second reserved memory number has increased), and the second special symbol. When the variable display of is finished and the display result is confirmed (when the second reserved memory number decreases), the second reserved memory number for designating the updated second reserved memory number from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designation command is received, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the second hold storage number designated by the second hold storage number designation command.

  For example, when the second number of reserved storages designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. When the second number of reserved storages designated by the second designated number of reserved storages is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the second number of reserved storages designated by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one of the light emitting devices is in a blinking state and the other light emitting device is in a lighting state. Then, when the second reserved storage number designated by the second reserved storage number designating command is 4, both the light emitting devices are made to blink.

  The fourth symbol display device 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one light emitting device is a variable display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (that is, (Variable display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, it is turned off or turned on (that is, the variable display is finished), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a variable display device of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (that is, variation). (Display) is started, and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the light is turned off or turned on (that is, the variable display ends), and the display result is derived.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command that designates that the first reserved storage number has been subtracted, and the display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command that specifies the variation time of the special symbol, based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, And, the variable time of the first special symbol can be specified. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the microcomputer 100 for game control, the first special symbol. It is possible to specify that the display result has been derived after the end of the variable display of.

  Here, the production control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned set of commands associated with the start of variable display of the first special symbol, and blinks one light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 (that is, variable display). When the variation time designated by the variation pattern command has elapsed, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on in response to the receipt of the symbol determination designation command (that is, the display result is determined). ). For example, when the display result of "out of focus" is specified by the display result specification command, one light emitting device is turned off in the symbol fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" is specified by the display result specification command. In this case, one light emitting device is turned on in the symbol fixing period.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command that designates that the second reserved storage number has been subtracted, and the display result designation that designates the display result. A command and a variation pattern command that designates a variation time of a special symbol, based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to specify the variation time of the second special symbol. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game controlling microcomputer 100, the second special symbol. It is possible to specify that the display result has been derived after the end of the variable display of.

  Here, when the control CPU 120 for effect control receives the above-mentioned one set command accompanying the start of variable display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, variable display). When the variation time designated by the variation pattern command has elapsed, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on in response to the receipt of the symbol determination designation command (that is, the display result is determined). ). For example, when the display result of "out of focus" was designated by the display result designation command, the other light emitting device was turned off in the symbol fixing period, and the display result of "big hit" was designated by the display result designation command. In this case, the other light emitting device is turned on in the symbol fixing period.

  It should be noted that the emission color of the first off-screen display indicator 21TM101 may be different from the emission color of the second off-screen display indicator 21TM102, for example, the former may emit blue light and the latter may emit red light. It may be allowed to. Further, in the fourth symbol display device 21TM103, the light emitting color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A and the light emitting color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B are made different. For example, the former may be made to emit light in blue (the same emission color as the first off-screen display 21TM101 outside the screen) and the latter may be made to emit light in red (the same emission color as the second off-screen display 21TM102 outside the screen). You may do so.

  In addition, an image showing the first number of reserved memories (for example, an image of blue numbers “0 to 4”) and an image showing the second number of reserved memories (for example, image of red numbers “0 to 4”) It may be displayed on the display device 5. Further, in the case of an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a quadrangle image, blinking in white during the period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed (fluctuation), and the display result is off. Is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol fixing period, and is displayed in red in the symbol fixing period when the display result is a big hit), and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square) It is an image of, and the second special symbol is blinking (fluctuating) in yellow during the variable display, and if the display result is off, it is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol fixing period, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, an image which is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol fixing period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change state at the timing of receiving the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode. The device 21TM104 is turned on. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change state indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The status indicator 21TM104 is made to blink. Then, at the timing of receiving the setting command (see step S21TM3720 of FIG. 10-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to inform that the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change mode indicator 21TM104 (lighting state) and the setting check mode is controlled (flashing state). Is becoming Here, compared with the period from when the power is turned on to when the image display device 5 can control the image display by the display control unit 123, the lamp control board 14 emits light from each light emitting device after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-17, in the image display device 5, it is not possible to inform that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the image by the display control unit 123. Even before the display control becomes possible), the fact that the setting change mode is controlled and the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the light emission mode of the setting change status indicator 21TM104. It will be possible.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, not only the setting change state display 21TM104, but also the out-of-screen first hold display 21TM101, the out-of-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. It may be possible to notify that the setting change mode is being controlled or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled by causing a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern during light emission. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode by turning on all the LEDs that constitute the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. Being informed, and controlling the setting confirmation mode by setting all the LEDs that make up the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 to a blinking state May be notified.

  On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 has the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (for example, all are turned on at the same time). ), it is possible to inform that the setting change mode is controlled. In addition, during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 has the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second. The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display device 20 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern different from a normal light emission pattern when a game is being played (and a different light emission pattern when controlled in the setting change mode). It is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled by (for example, making all of them blink simultaneously).

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 30TM]
Next, the characteristic unit 30TM will be described. FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 30TM101 displaying the first hold storage number (first hold display 30TM001 of 0 to 4) and a second hold storage number (second hold of 0 to 4). The second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and the active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display are provided. The first reserved display area 30TM101, the second reserved display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first reserved display area 30TM101 is on the left side when viewed from the player with the active display area 30TM103 at the center. The right side is the second reserved display area 30TM102.

  When the first number of reserved storages is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first number of reserved displays 30TM001 in the first reserved display area 30TM101 in a number corresponding to the number of first reserved memories. That is, the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, is controlled to the big hit game state) Not, and, the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display region 30TM101, the first hold display 30TM001 is associated with the first hold display 30TM001 in the order close to the active display region 30TM103 (from the right as seen by the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

  Further, when the second number of reserved storages is not 0, effect control CPU 120 displays a second number of reserved displays 30TM002 corresponding to the number of second reserved storages in second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, the winning to the second start winning hole) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information that corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) that is not satisfied, and the second reserved storage number is not 0). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display region 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 is dealt with in the order close to the active display region 30TM103 (from the left as seen by the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display region 30TM103 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003, after the start condition (for example, the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied, the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the big hit game. It is the information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) that the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

  In addition, in the upper portion of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side when viewed from the player), a region different from the first reserved display region 30TM101, and the first reserved memory number (sub reserved display 30TM004 of 0 to 4) is displayed. A sub-hold display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 which is a different area from the active display area 30TM103 and which displays a sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is to be displayed on the sub-holding display area 30TM104 based on the determination that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is displayed at the time of the start winning (when the winning at the first starting winning opening occurs). The number of sub-holding displays 30TM004 corresponding to one holding storage number is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, the sub-holding display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning hole) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). Not, and, the second number of pending storage is 0 and the first number of pending storage is not 0) is the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is not established. In addition, the sub-active display 30TM005, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied after the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and is controlled to the big hit game state). It is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-holding displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-holding display region 30TM104, a variation corresponding to the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the order close to the sub-active display region 30TM105 (from the right as seen by the player). The display start condition is met.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11A, the sub-holding display 30TM004 has a star-shaped contour, and has a contour different from that of the first holding display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). The sub-holding display 30TM004 is smaller than the first holding display 30TM001 in size and is therefore less noticeable and less visible to the player. The sub active display 30TM005 also has a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). The sub-active display 30TM005 is smaller than the active display 30TM003 because it is displayed in a smaller size, which makes it less visible and less visible to the player.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 11A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative pattern being executed in the image display device 5, and the sub-active is also displayed. A sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. In this way, as the information corresponding to the one variable display (common variable display) being executed, the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 in different modes are displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 and the sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  Corresponding to the first number of reserved memories being 4, four first reserved displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101, and four sub reserved displays are displayed in the sub reserved display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as the information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed yet, the different information such as the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the 1st hold display 30TM001 and the 1st hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the 1st 1st hold display 30TM001 and the common variable display (hold memory) are simultaneously displayed. It is displayed on the screen.

  In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen, It is possible to diversify the effect using the hold display and improve the interest. Similarly, a plurality of types of active display (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed (variable display of the first special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol) are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the effect using the active display and improve the interest.

  Here, as will be described later, when it is determined that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the determination at the time of starting winning, while the first holding display 30TM001 is displayed in the first holding display area 30TM101, The sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104. Further, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105, and further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. The information (the rectangular frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 11A) will not be displayed either.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and/or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of the start winning. The first change effect is a special mode different from the normal mode (white circle display in this example) of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize. (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) Display) or a golden mode (in this example, a golden circle display) is a notice effect. Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, white star-shaped display) of the sub-holding display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start prize. The notice effect is displayed in a blue mode (blue star display in this example) or a red mode (red star display in this example).

  FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the CPU 120 for effect control first sets a set of commands at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a It is confirmed whether or not a command to specify addition of the number of 1-hold storages has been newly received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of the big hit. CPU103, based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, determines whether or not it is a jackpot, and determines the jackpot type when it is a jackpot, and designates the determination result Output the specified command. In addition, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern in the winning determination result. The CPU 103 determines, based on the random number for variation pattern type determination extracted at the time of starting winning, whether or not normal reach, super reach, and the like, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first reserved storage number addition designation command is an effect control command that designates that the first reserved storage number has increased by one.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designating command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. To do. If one set of commands for starting winning is not newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends.

  If a new set of commands for starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on that at least the first change effect is determined to be executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the first change effect and the final display mode, and whether to execute the second change effect and the final display mode, which will be described later. The determination is made based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 11-3) (step S30TM1030).

  By executing the processes of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processes of step S30TM1030 and subsequent steps are executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is generated. Alternatively, the second change effect can be executed.

  FIG. 11C is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode”. It is possible to determine any of “” and “golden mode”, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode”. It is possible to determine any of the above, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Of these, “no display” means that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), the starting winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white at a rate of 4%). Triangle display), 18% of which is blue (blue circle), 21% of which is green (green circle), and 16% of which is red (red circle). ), and a golden mode (golden circular display) is obtained at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display which is the determination target at the time of the start winning is different from the normal mode (white round display) is 69 % Will be executed.

  On the other hand, if the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, if the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), it is based on the starting winning (new first reserved memory) The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, a green mode at a rate of 20%, A ratio of 25% results in a red mode, and a ratio of 35% results in a golden mode. That is, the first change effect that makes the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the start winning different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

  In this way, when the first change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, if the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the gold mode, the jackpot rate is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), with respect to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the expectation of being a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. .

  Further, as shown in a change pattern of the first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 prior to the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. May be Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display mode with a higher degree of expectation than that. It has been changed to. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the expectation degree of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the ratio in which the special mode is selected as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio in which the other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5 described later, the ratio of the special pattern included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the ratio of other modes. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when it is displayed in other modes. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit compared to when it is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher expectation. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), when the determination result at the time of the start winning is “out” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “out”), The sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first holding storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70% but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). Is 1%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning the start is displayed at a rate of 30%, which corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of the winning start. The second change effect that makes the mode of the displayed information (hold display or active display) different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), The sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first holding storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40% but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio of the final display mode being the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). Is 25%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of winning a start is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of a winning start. The second change effect that makes the mode of the displayed information (hold display or active display) different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

  In this way, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the proportion of a big hit is higher than when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. In addition, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of a big hit is higher than when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the jackpot rate is the highest. As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), with respect to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

  Further, as shown in a change pattern of a second change effect described later, when the display mode is a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub-holding display 30TM004 before the sub-active display 30TM005. There is. When the sub-holding display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift, or a display having a higher expectation than that. It is designed to change according to the mode. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004, the expectation to be a big hit has a relationship of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second It may be decided to execute the change effect (display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 and make the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 different from the normal mode).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and not to display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is decided to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually Aspect)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 decides (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is the normal mode), and executes the second change effect (sub-hold display 30TM004 and The sub active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 may be determined to be a mode different from the normal mode).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute the (4-1) first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the sub hold display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is usually Aspect)).

  In the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute neither the first change effect nor the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, (4-1) and (4) above. In the case of any of 4-2), the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed in the normal mode. The first reserved display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first reserved memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory is started, The active display 30TM003 corresponding to does not change from the normal mode to another mode (change patterns 101, 201 when the final display mode is the “normal mode” shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, 301, 401).

  In addition, in the case of corresponding to the above (4-2), although the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first holding memory) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the corresponding sub active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (1), (2-1), and (2). In the case where either of -2) or (3) is applicable, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

  When it is determined to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, when the above (1) is satisfied, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of reserved memories (the first number of reserved memories after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 ( 11-4 and 11-5) together with the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the determined sub-active display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode (see FIG. 11-6 ).

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect and not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, in (2-1) and (2-2) above. In any case, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final of the determined active display 30TM003. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5). In addition, in the case of the above (2-2), although the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first holding memory) is displayed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage is started, the corresponding sub active display 30TM005 does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 11-6). , Change patterns 601, 701, 801, 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  When the CPU 120 for effect control decides to execute the second change effect without executing the first change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, in the case of the above (3), the step is performed. In S30TM1210, based on the updated first pending storage number (first pending storage number after receiving the first pending storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined sub-active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 11-6).

  When the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3). In the case (corresponding to), the prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In addition, when neither the notice effect of the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning (first holding memory) is displayed (in the case of (4-2) above). If applicable), also set the look-ahead counter.

  In the look-ahead counter, a value corresponding to the first reserved storage number updated based on the start winning (the value designated by the first reserved storage number designating command) is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the look-ahead counter is decremented by 1 each time (each time the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received). That is, the value of the prefetch counter is decremented every time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of the start winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and/or the second change effect (or the secondary hold display 30TM004 although the second change effect is not executed is displayed). (Variable display) will be executed.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change effect, it sets the change prohibition flag (steps S30TM1080 and S30TM1140). While the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new starting prize is generated, it is determined to be YES in step S30TM1020 described above, and thus the new starting prize (new first reserved memory) is dealt with. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new starting winning (new first holding memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display that is the target of the first change effect ends.

  11-4 and 11-5 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the first change effect. When the number of first reserved memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) by the start winning, (i) the n-th first reserved display 30TM001 corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101. The timing (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning shifts to a position (active display area 30TM103 side) having a higher variation rank in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n≧2) and (iii) Timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning is displayed ), there is a possibility that display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 11-4 and FIG. 11-5, what is the display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern? It shows whether the display mode is set. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode in which a white circle is displayed, and “special” indicates a special mode in which a white triangle is displayed. “Blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue round display, and “red” indicates a red mode that is a red round display.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-4(A). Select a table.

  When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result that is designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In addition, in the description of FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of start winning). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. In the change pattern, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the special mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in a special mode after the active shift.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 105 is The change pattern is such that after the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ) Means that the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 remains in the blue state after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105.

  Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode. In addition, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the final green mode after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 107 is In the change pattern, the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the active shift timing (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. When the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402). ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the red mode finally after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). ˜412), the active display 30TM003 remains in the red state after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107.

  Here, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the gold mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of active shift (in the case of change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the gold mode. Further, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will change from the blue mode to the gold mode finally after the active shift. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). ˜412), the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red mode to the gold mode after the active shift.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-4(B). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 201 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start prize (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 201 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, the change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is off or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204. The change pattern 202 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift The change pattern 203 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at a timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in the special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also changed at the active shift timing. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208. The change pattern 205 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the blue mode. The change pattern 206 shows the first reserved display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of winning the start and then announces the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 207 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the first reserved display of the target in the special mode. After displaying the 1 hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is kept in the blue form at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 208 is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 208 displays the first notice display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning and then keeps the first notice display of the notice target in the blue state at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first reservation display of the notice target in the blue mode even at the timing of active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. The change pattern 209 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the red mode. The change pattern 210 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start and then announces at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 211 is a change pattern that changes the first reserved display of the target in the blue mode without changing the first reserved display of the target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the 1 hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red form at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 212 is a change pattern that does not change. The change pattern 212 displays the first reserved display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first reserved display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5(C). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 301 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 301 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each 302. The change pattern 302 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The change pattern is such that the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305. The change pattern 303 is that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The change pattern 304 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue state at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to a blue mode and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 305 is that the first hold display of the notice target is blue when the start winning is made. After being displayed in the mode, the first reservation display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first reservation display of the notice target in the blue mode even at the timing of active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310. The change pattern 306 is that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern that changes the first reserved display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display of No. 1 is displayed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notice display of the notice target is also made at the timing of the second hold shift. The hold pattern is a blue pattern and is not changed, but is a change pattern that changes the first reserved display of the notice target to the red form at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 308 is the first hold display of the notice subject at the time of winning the start. After being displayed in the blue mode, the first reservation display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that is changed and does not change the first reserved display of the notice subject in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 309 is that after displaying the first reserved display of the notice subject in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red state, and the active shift timing is changed. However, the change pattern 310 is a change pattern that does not change the first reserved display of the notice target in the red mode, and the change pattern 310 is the timing of the first hold shift after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning the start prize. Therefore, the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first reservation display of the notice target is also changed in the active shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the 1-hold display is not changed in the red mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the golden mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-5(D). Select a table.

  When the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the change pattern 401 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 401 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. At the timing of the hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and even in the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each 402. The change pattern 402 is such that after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice of the active shift timing is also changed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of No. 3 is not changed in a special mode.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404. The change pattern 403 is that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. The change pattern 404 is a change pattern in which the 1st hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is such that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning and then the first notice display of the notice target is made at the timing of the first hold shift. The 1st hold display is not changed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed even in the second hold shift timing, and the first hold is the notice target in the third hold shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the display is not changed in the blue mode and the first reserved display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change patterns 405 to 412. The change pattern 405 is such that the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 406 is a change pattern for changing the 1-hold display to the red mode, and the change pattern 406 shows the first-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start and then the first-change notice of the first hold shift timing. The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the third hold shift. The change pattern 407 is for changing the first reserved display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing, and the change pattern 407 is after the first reserved display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form, and the third hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a red mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 408 is a notice at the time of starting winning. After displaying the first hold display of the target in the blue mode, the first hold display of the target of warning is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the notice is issued at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 409 is a change pattern for changing the first hold display of the target to a red mode, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is held at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 410 is a change pattern in which the display is not changed as it is, and the change pattern 410 is the first hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue form at the time of starting winning. The display will remain blue No, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is kept in the red form even at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 411 changes the first reserved display of the notification target to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first reserved display of the notification target in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. The change pattern 412 is a change pattern that does not change the first notice display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 412 is the first notice target at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which after displaying the hold display in the red mode, the first hold display of the notice target does not change in the red mode even at the timings of the first, second, and third hold shifts and active shifts.

  In the case where the final display mode determined is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, the change pattern 408, the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, and the change pattern 412, respectively. ing.

  FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. In the case where the number of first reserved memories becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning and it is decided to display the sub reserved display 30TM004 and the sub active display 30TM005, (i ) The first to nth sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the first holding storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is a sub-display. The timing (timing at the time of starting winning) displayed in the active display area 30TM105, (ii) the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting winning is at a position with a higher variation rank in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 (the sub-active display area 30TM105). Timing (when n≧2), and (iii) the timing when the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (sub-active display corresponding to the starting winning) 30TM005 is displayed), the display information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 11-6, the display mode of the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display is changed at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star-shaped display, and “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star-shaped display. "Red" indicates a red mode in which a red star is displayed.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 11-6(A). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 601 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In the description of FIG. 11-6, the active shift means that the sub-holding display 30TM004 is shifted from the sub-holding display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the variation which is the determination target at the time of starting winning). The sub active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801, change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol specifying command, which is the off or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notification target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-holding display of the notification target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the active shift timing (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). In the case of ~905), the sub active display 30TM005 remains in the blue state after the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 605 is the start pattern. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change pattern 902 described later). ~905), the sub active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906 described later). In the case of ˜912), the sub active display 30TM005 remains in the red state after the active shift.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6(B). Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the change pattern 701 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 701 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and even in the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704. The change pattern 702 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, but at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 703 is a change pattern for changing the sub-holding display of the notice target to the blue mode. The change pattern 703 displays the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the notice pattern of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display is changed to a blue mode and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed to the blue state at the timing of the active shift. A change pattern 704 is a noticeable sub-holding display in the blue state at the time of winning the start prize. The change pattern is such that the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the blue state at the timing of the first holding shift and the timing of the active shift after the display.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708. The change pattern 705 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then change the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and to make the notice target at the timing of the active shift. Is a change pattern for changing the sub-holding display of No. 1 to the red form, and the change pattern 706 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice target in the blue form at the time of winning the start, and then, at the timing of the first hold shift, the sub-holding subject of the notice. The change pattern 707 is a blue pattern for changing the display of the notification target sub-holding display at the timing of the active shift without changing the display as it is in the blue mode. After the display, it is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the noticeable sub-hold display is not changed to the red mode at the active shift timing. Reference numeral 708 denotes a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is displayed in red at the time of the start winning and then the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in red at the timing of the first hold shift and the active shift. .

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6(C). Select a table.

  Regarding the case where the final display mode determined is the normal mode, the change pattern 801 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outlier or the big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 801 is that the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. It is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern according to the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, which is the outfall or the big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 802 to 804. The change pattern 802 is that the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. Is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed to the blue state at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 803 is the noticeable target at the time of starting winning. After the sub-hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 804 does not change the display as it is in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 is the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to advance notice is not changed in the blue state.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, according to the determination result at the time of winning the start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808. The change pattern 805 is to display the sub-holding display of the notice subject in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then change the sub-holding display of the notice subject to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and the timing of the second hold shift. Is a change pattern for changing the sub-holding display of the notice target to the red mode and changing the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the blue mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. In the change pattern 807, the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 807 is the first time after the noticeable sub-holding display is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. It is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to a red state at the timing of the hold shift, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed to the red state at the timing of the second hold shift and the active shift. The pattern 808 does not change the noticeable sub-holding display in the red state at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the active shift after displaying the noticeable sub-holding display in the red state at the time of winning the start prize. This is a change pattern.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 11-6D. Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the change pattern 901 has a probability of 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). The judgment value is assigned as determined by. The change pattern 901 displays the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then displays the sub-hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined in accordance with the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, which is out or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 902 to change pattern 905. The change pattern 902 is such that after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the third time is displayed. Is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is changed to a blue state at the timing of the hold shift, and the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed to the blue state at the active shift timing. After displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is held at the timing of the second hold shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-holding display in the normal mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is made at the timing of the second, third hold shift and the active shift. Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of No. is not changed in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is the first, second, and third hold shifts after the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning the start prize. It is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the blue state at the timing and the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, according to the determination result at the time of the start winning (the display result designated by the symbol designating command, the deviation or the big hit), A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 906 to 912. The change pattern 906 is that the secondary hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the secondary hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to blue at the timing of, the sub-holding display of the notice is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 does not change as it is, and the change pattern 907 is such that the sub-holding display of the notice subject is displayed in the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift after the sub-holding display of the notice subject is displayed in the normal form at the time of winning the start. The sub-holding display of the notice subject remains unchanged in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the third hold shift. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the noticeable sub-holding display is not changed in the red state at a timing, and the change pattern 908 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the noticeable sub-holding display in the normal mode at the time of winning the start prize. The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice of the notice target is changed at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display is not changed as it is in a red state. A change pattern 909 is that the sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in the blue form at the time of winning the start and then the notice target is given at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. The sub-holding display of is not changed in the blue mode, the sub-holding display of the notification target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-holding display of the notification target is kept in the red mode at the active shift timing. The change pattern 910 is a change pattern that does not change, and after displaying the sub-holding display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Change without changing the sub-holding display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and not changing the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red form at the timing of the third hold shift or the active shift. The change pattern 911 is a change pattern 911. The sub-holding display of the notice target is displayed in a blue mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-holding display of the notice target is red at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display of the notice target is not changed in the red state at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 912 is the notice target at the time of winning the start prize. This is a change pattern in which after displaying the sub-holding display in the red mode, the sub-holding display of the notice target does not change in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, and third holding shifts and the timing of the active shift.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, the ratio of the first change effect in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode is determined by the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the second change effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  As described above, in the lower part of the screen, the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is executed with high frequency, and thus the player with respect to the notice effect Can keep the interest of. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 with low visibility, the percentage of the big hit is different depending on whether or not the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are themselves displayed. It will be noted whether or not the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, since the jackpot expectation degree when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, whether or not the display mode changes. Will also pay attention to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active displayed at the top of the screen). The size and shape of display 30TM005) are different. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions within the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed in a circle, and the other icon (sub hold display 30TM004 or sub active display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. As a result, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily recognize the difference (the display information is of different types). In addition, it is possible to diversify the effect by the icon corresponding to the variable display and improve the interest.

  In addition, as in the relationship between the red mode first hold display 30TM001 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red mode sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed at the top of the screen, a common display color corresponding to the common variable display is displayed. Icons (however, the shape is different between the round and star shapes) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variable display.

  Also, like the relationship between the red-colored active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-colored sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen, an icon of a common display color corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. (However, the shape is different between a round shape and a star shape). This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the jackpot expectation level is different depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode). The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red-form sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest jackpot expectation), so that the player becomes interested in both the hold display forms, and the hold display is displayed. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11C, the jackpot expectation degree is different depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red mode). Since the combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest jackpot expectation), the player becomes interested in both active display modes, and enhances the attraction of the effect of changing the active display mode. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (when the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited during active shift), or the display color is changed to a higher expectation. As a result, the player can be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the sub-holding display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the second change effect is displayed. ), the display color is at least the same (that is, whether the display color is inherited during active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This allows the player to be interested in how the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11C, the active display 30TM003 having high visibility is provided with more display modes than the sub active display 30TM005 having low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 to 11-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is when changing the mode of the sub hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. More change patterns are provided. In this way, the first change effect and the second change effect can be prevented while preventing the effect from becoming excessively complicated by varying the type of effectable effect and the effect pattern depending on the visibility of the active display and the hold display. I am trying to appropriately raise the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of first change effect and second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9. 11-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when performing.

  First, in FIG. 11-8(1), in the state where the first reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is started on the image display device 5 (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-7). (Variable display) is being executed. At this time, the normal display active display 30TM003 (white circular display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the normal display first reservation display 30TM001 (white circular display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed three times. At this time, the sub hold display 30TM004 is not displayed and the sub active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

  Then, when the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns is being performed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-8(2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-7), a new winning is made. It is assumed that the start winning for the ball device 6A occurs and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the determination winning start (the gold mode in this example). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the fact that the first storage number is 4, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-7 and FIG. 11-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. However, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the starting winning (first reserved memory) that occurs thereafter is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub hold display 30TM004 that is the target of the second change effect is displayed. )) to the end of the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (sub-hold display 30TM004) (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-7).

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, special mode, blue mode, or red mode). In addition, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start prize is given. The corresponding sub-holding display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the secondary hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of reserved memories is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the sub reserved display area 30TM104 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-holding display 30TM004 is a holding display corresponding to the variable display that is the subject of advance notice by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(3), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8(4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), and at the same time, The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased. The sub-holding display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. In this shift display, the normal mode sub-holding display 30TM004, which was displayed as the sub-holding display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8(4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(5), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. The 1st hold display (the 1st hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the 1st hold display 30TM001a of the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 in normal mode (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1 The images are shift-displayed one by one on the side of the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8(6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004b which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-8(7), the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-8(8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), and also, The 1st hold display (the 1st hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the 1st hold display 30TM001b of the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) and the blue mode displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are deleted. The sub-holding display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display) is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-7), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reservation display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first reservation display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display of the notice target is changed from the blue form to the red form (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-9(9), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red form) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. In addition to deleting the sub active display 30TM005 displayed in, the sub pending display (red pending display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode) displayed in the sub pending display area 30TM104 is displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105. After the shift display, the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). In the period from T7 to T8 of 11-7, in the active display area 30TM103, the red active display 30TM003c is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example). The change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. In addition, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described below may be executed.

  If the sub active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 within the period shown from T7 to T8 in FIG. 11-7. Change the mode. For example, when the final display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 determined at the time of winning the start is a red mode and the sub active display 30TM005 is displayed in a blue mode immediately after the shift display, in the variable display of the notice target, The sub active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the letters "REACH!!" are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, since the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden at the timing when the reach state is established, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from decreasing and the interest to decrease. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-7).

  As described above, as the reach effect is executed in the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which have at least a part of the display area in common with the area in which the reach effect is executed, are hidden. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display which are displayed in an area different from the area in which the reach effect is executed, the sub-holding display can be continuously displayed in the upper part of the screen even while the reach effect is being executed. The player can see them. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of held memories even during the execution of the reach effect, and can grasp the display mode of the sub-held display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case of deciding to execute only the first change effect at the time of winning the start prize will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-12. FIG. 11-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production image.

  First, in FIG. 11-11(1), in the state where the first reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is started on the image display device 5 (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-10). (Variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Is displayed three times.

  Then, when the variable display of the left, right and right decorative patterns is being executed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-11(2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), a new winning is made. It is assumed that a start winning is generated in the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the determination winning start (the gold mode in this example). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example). In addition, in this example, it is assumed that it is determined that the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is also not executed). Further, at this time, based on that the first number of reserved memories is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control does not display the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed by the determination at the time of the start winning, and Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. However, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the starting winning (first reserved memory) that occurs thereafter is prohibited. In the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, from the time when the first hold display 30TM001, which is the target of the first change effect, is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 ends. The period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 11-10) is set.

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. During the period, the first hold display of the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, special mode, blue mode, or red mode). In addition, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not to execute the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process in step S30TM1030 is not executed), so that a new start prize is given. The corresponding sub-holding display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a new start winning is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the secondary hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new starting winning can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first number of pending storages is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth first pending display 30TM001 displayed in the first pending display area 30TM101 is the notice target by the first change effect. Is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11(3), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-11(4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11(4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the first reserved display 30TM001a which is a white triangular display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11(5), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. The image display device is configured to shift-display one by one the first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 to the active display region 30TM103 side. At step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11(6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (the first reserved display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-11(7), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-11(8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), and also The image display device is configured to shift-display one first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side. At step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11(8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, starts the variable display. Then, the first reserved display of the notice target is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (the first reserved display 30TM001c, which is a red round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (9), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display region 30TM103 as shown in FIG. 11-12 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-10), and at the same time, The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shift-displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next change in the image display device 5 is performed. Start display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display that is the target of the first change effect (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed). In the period from T7 to T8 of 11-10, in the active display area 30TM103, the red active display 30TM003c is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 11-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display region and the right symbol display region. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the letters "REACH!!" are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden at the timing when the reach state is established. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends (until the timing shown at T9 in FIG. 11-10).

  As described above, when it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of winning the start prize, a new start prize is given until the end of the variable display which is the target of the first change effect. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on a new start winning is not executed. In this way, after the display mode of the first reserved display 30TM001 in the highly visible first reserved display region 30TM101 is once changed (after being set to a mode different from the normal mode), a new start prize is generated thereafter. Even in such a case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start winning in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 having low visibility, the player is focused on the first change effect having high visibility, The change display that is different from the change display that is the target of the first change effect is prevented from being complicated by the execution of the second change effect.

  In the present embodiment, when a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is the normal mode). Is displayed in a different mode), if a new starting prize is generated, it is possible to execute the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new starting prize, but at that time The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be lower than that before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  In addition, when a new start winning occurs after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), not only the second change effect but also another notice It may be possible to limit the execution of the effect. For example, the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the variable display is executed (for example, the first reserved memory number is changed from 3 to 0). It is possible not to execute the countdown effect by displaying "3", "2", "1", and "0" along with the subtraction by one. Further, the background change effect of changing the background image to the special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new start winning is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although an example in which execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is prohibited is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is usually If a new start winning is generated during a period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new starting prize can be executed, but the new starting prize is supported. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning is not displayed, or the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the new starting winning is displayed, but the display mode is normally set. The mode may not be changed).

(Modifications regarding the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. However, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect that acts on the first hold display 30TM001, and the second hold display 30TM004 is operated. The mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-holding effect effect.

  11-13, 11-14, and 11-15 are specific examples of a case where the first hold effect effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub hold effect effect is executed in the second change effect.

  First, FIG. 11-13(1) illustrates a state in which the first display memory number is 3 and the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 displays the normal mode active display 30TM003 (white circular display), and the first reserved display area 30TM101 displays the normal mode first reserved display 30TM001 (white circular display). ) Is displayed three times. At this time, the sub-holding display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is also not displayed. Further, the guide (square frame) showing the sub active display area 30TM105 is not displayed either.

  Then, when the variable display of the left, right, and right decorative patterns is being performed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-13(2), a new start winning is generated for the winning ball device 6A, It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the determination winning start (the gold mode in this example). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning as the determination target. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal mode sub active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the sub active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the first storage number is 4, four sub-holding displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104.

  In this example, since the first number of reserved memories is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the sub reserved display area 30TM104 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-holding display 30TM004 is a holding display corresponding to the variable display that is the subject of advance notice by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13(3), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time displays the first hold display area 30TM101 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold displays 30TM001 are shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. The sub-holding display 30TM004 is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode that was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the normal mode sub-holding display 30TM004 that was displayed as the sub-holding display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

  Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, displays the first reserved display of the notice target from the normal mode to the special mode (during execution of the variable display). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold effect effect and the type of the first hold effect effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(4), an effect in which the character A appears and a ball is thrown toward the first reserved display 30TM001 of the notice target is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(5), the effect control CPU 120 sets the special notice of the first hold display of the notice target in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode (first reserved display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example) is changed. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-13(6), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(7), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, displays the first reserved display area 30TM101 first. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105 is displayed. While deleting the active display 30TM005, the sub-holding display (the sub-holding display 30TM004 (white star display in the normal mode)) displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is shift-displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side. Then, the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, displays the first reserved display of the notice target from the special mode to the blue mode (during execution of the variable display). In this example, it is recognized that the first hold display 30TM001b), which is a blue round display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold effect effect and the type of the first hold effect effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, during the execution of the variable display, the preliminary hold target sub-holding display is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example). Then, it is recognized that the sub-holding display 30TM004b) which is a blue star display is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect and also determines the type (character type) of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first holding action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(7), the character B appears and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001a of the notice target is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first reservation display 30TM001a of the notice target, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reservation display 30TM001a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13(8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display of the notice target in blue from the special mode in response to the execution of the first hold effect effect (action effect B). The mode (first reserved display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display in this example) is changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14(9), the character a appears and an effect is performed in which the balloon is blown toward the preliminary reservation display 30TM004. As shown in FIGS. 11-14(10) and 11-15(11), the balloon that the character a has flown flies toward the preliminary reservation display 30TM004, which is the target of advance notice, and reaches the position of the secondary reservation display 30TM004. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the preliminary reservation target sub-holding display 30TM004, the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (sub-holding display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (13) and (14), displays the sub-holding display of the notice target in the normal mode in response to the execution of the sub-holding effect (action effect a). From the blue mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004b, which is a blue star display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (15), the variable display of the decorative pattern is terminated on the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time displays the first hold display area 30TM101 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 of the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b of the blue mode) is shift-displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display area 30TM105. While the active display 30TM005 is erased, the sub-holding display displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 (the sub-holding display 30TM004 in the normal mode (white star display) and the sub-holding display 30TM004b in the blue mode (blue star display) )) are shifted and displayed one by one on the side of the sub active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  Here, at the time of starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, displays the first reserved display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red mode (during execution of the variable display. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first reserved display 30TM001c) which is a red round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first holding action effect and the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (type of character). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120, when starting the variable display, based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, changes the sub-holding display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red mode (this example) during execution of the variable display. Then, it is recognized that the sub-holding display 30TM004c) which is a red star display is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding effect effect and also determines the type (character type) of the sub-holding effect effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

  Based on these determination results, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect C). In the example illustrated in FIG. 11-15 (17), the character C appears and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first reserved display 30TM001b of the notice target is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first reservation display 30TM001b of the notice target, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first reservation display 30TM001b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reservation display of the notice target from the blue mode to the red state in response to the execution of the first reservation operation effect (operation effect C). The mode (first reserved display 30TM001c, which is a red round display in this example) is changed.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-holding effect effect (effect effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 11-15 (19), a character b appears and an effect is performed in which a balloon is blown toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b that is the subject of advance notice. As shown in FIGS. 11-15(20) and 11-15(21), the balloon blown by the character b flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b, which is the target of the advance notice, and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004b. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b.

  In this example, as shown in (21) and (22) in FIGS. 11-15, when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004b of the notice target, the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (sub-holding display 30TM004F. ) Changes to. Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (23) and (24), executes the sub-holding effect effect (action effect b), and displays the sub-holding display of the notice target in a blue mode. From the red mode (in this example, the sub-holding display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). ..

  In this way, the effect mode is different between the first hold action effect executed when changing the mode of the first hold display and the sub hold effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub hold display. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of having a plurality of types of holding correspondence displays (first holding display and sub-holding display).

  As shown in FIGS. 11-13 to 11-15, the effect in which the character appears and performs an action on the icon may be executed when changing the display mode of the active display. Further, it may be executed when changing the display mode of the sub active display. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is displayed in response to the character A appearing and executing the active action effect of performing the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). In addition, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active display is performed and the sub-active display is performed in response to executing the sub-active action effect of performing the action of blowing the balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, since the effect modes are different between the active action effect executed when changing the mode of the active display and the sub active effect effect executed when changing the mode of the sub active display, a plurality of types are produced. The interest due to the presence of the display (corresponding to the active display and the sub-active display) corresponding to the above can be further improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of the first change effect and the execution ratio of the second change effect may be different depending on the current set value (1 to 6) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion of the first hold display 30TM001 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). Also, the sub-holding display 30TM004 may be displayed at a high rate (or the sub-holding display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 itself are displayed) in a mode different from the normal mode. Further, as compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of times the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed is larger when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, 3 times). ) The change pattern may be selected at a high rate, and the change pattern for which the display color of the sub-holding display 30TM004 is changed frequently (for example, twice) may be selected at a high rate.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning occurs, but as described above, the active display mode during the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect for changing the display mode of the active display is executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to execute a change suggesting effect that suggests that there is a possibility of changing. This change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  When the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display is performed, the effect control CPU 120 has a different display form of the active display during the active shift and a final display form of the active display determined when the start winning is generated. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during execution of the variable display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variable display.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode when starting the variable display. FIG. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, the determination value is assigned to each of the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the golden mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "○" in FIG. 11-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

  When the active display during active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 11-16(A). As shown in FIG. 11-16(A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the special mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is executed twice, and the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 011 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the special mode.

  When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The change suggestion effect in the change patterns 012 and 013 is executed three times, of which the success mode is twice and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 012, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 013 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display as the special mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern for executing the suggestion effect and changing the active display to a blue color.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 014 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The display is changed to a blue mode, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is then executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode. The change pattern is a change pattern 015. After the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is produced. To change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display unchanged in the blue mode, and then execute a change suggestion effect of the success mode to perform the active display. Is a change pattern for changing the color to green.

  When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect in the change patterns 016 and 017 is 5, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 016 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The display is changed to a blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode, After that, it is a change pattern in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode, and the change pattern 017 is the success mode change suggestion effect after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift. To change the active display to a special mode, and then to execute a change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to green. A change pattern that changes to a mode, then executes a change suggestion effect of a failure mode and does not change the active display as a green mode, and then executes a change suggestion effect of a successful mode and changes the active display to a red mode Is.

  Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of times the change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern 018 is 5, and the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 018 is such that after the active display is displayed in the normal mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. Change the display to a blue mode, then change the active display to a green mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and then change the active display to a red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, After that, it is a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

  When the active display during the active shift is in the special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active mode change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 11-16(B). As shown in FIG. 11-16(B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the blue mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is executed twice, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. The change pattern 021 is such that after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to activate the active display. It is a change pattern in which the display is kept in the blue state.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The change suggestion effect in the change patterns 022 and 023 is executed three times, of which the success mode is twice and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 023 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the green mode, and thereafter, the change mode effect suggestion of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in the special mode during the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern for executing the suggestive effect and changing the active display to a green mode.

  When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of times of execution of the change suggesting effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. The change pattern 024 is such that after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and activated. Change the display to a green mode, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the red mode, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display in the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern 025. After the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is performed. To change the active display to a green mode, then execute a change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display unchanged in the green mode, and then execute a change suggestion effect of the success mode to perform the active display. Is a change pattern for changing the color to red.

  Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is executed four times, of which the success mode is four times and the failure mode is zero times. The change pattern 026 is such that after the active display is displayed in the special mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. A change that changes the display to a green mode, then executes a change mode production of success mode to change the active display to a red mode, and then executes a change mode production of success mode to change the active display to a gold mode It is a pattern.

  When the active display during the active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode as shown in FIG. 11-16(C). As shown in FIG. 11-16(C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the green mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is executed twice, and the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the green state.

  When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned such that the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 are selected with a probability of 80% and 20%, respectively. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is executed three times, of which the success mode is twice and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. The change pattern 033 is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed to the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and thereafter, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestive effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

  Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned such that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is executed three times, of which the success mode is three times and the failure mode is zero times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed and activated. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a gold mode.

  When the active display during the active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, as shown in FIG. 11-16(D). As shown in FIG. 11-16(D), in the active display change pattern determination table for red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. The judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is executed once, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 0. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in a red mode during the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16, within one variable display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach display is started after the variable display is started. Within the period until the condition is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, particularly, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the more the display color is changed to the jackpot expectation. The percentage is high.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage when the n-th change suggestion effect is executed, the higher the number of times the success-mode change suggestion effect is executed is, the higher the ratio of the (n+1)th change suggestion effect is executed. Is configured. For example, at the stage when the second change suggestion effect is executed (when n=2), if both of the success modes are successful, the third change suggestion effect is always executed. When one of the two times is the success mode and the other is the failure mode, the change suggestion effect of the third time may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n=3 and the case of n=4. In this way, when the change suggesting effect is executed, the more the number of times of execution of the success suggesting change suggesting effect executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state is the same, the same change. Since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is high within the display period (within the period from the start of the variable display until the reach state is established), the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed, particularly the success mode The attention is paid to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed, which can enhance the interest.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed] to the [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] within one variable display period, the larger the jackpot expectation. The rate at which the display mode changes to a high degree is high. Specifically, [the number of times of execution of change suggestion effect of success mode/the number of times of execution of change suggestion effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In the case of 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, it is 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, it is 4/5, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If so, it is 5/5. As described above, the larger the [number of executions of change suggestion effect of success mode/number of executions of change suggestion effect] is, the higher the rate of change of the active display to the display mode of high jackpot expectation is. Pays attention to the relationship between the number of times of execution of change suggestion production and the number of times of execution of change suggestion production of a success mode, which can enhance interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to the display mode with a higher jackpot expectation. Specifically, the number of consecutive success mode change suggestive effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and is the number when the final display mode is the green mode. It is 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, and how many times it is continued.

  Further, in the present example, when the final display mode has the same display color, it is easy to select a change pattern having a larger number of succession mode change suggestive effects. For example, in the blue mode, the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is selected more than in the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern 012 (two continuous) is selected. 014 (three consecutive) is selected at a higher rate, and in the red mode, the change pattern 016 (four consecutive) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (three consecutive). In this way, even if the final display color is the same, it is possible to further enhance the player's expectation by facilitating the success suggestion change suggestion production to continue.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of times of execution of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect, based on the change pattern shown in FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is the success mode or the failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. As the types of change suggesting effects, a change suggesting effect A in which the character A appears, a change suggesting effect B in which the character B appears, a change suggesting effect C in which the character C appears, a change suggesting effect D in which the character D appears, and the character. There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the n-th time is a success mode and the change suggestion effect at the (n+1)th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Success mode, with next performance execution] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, with next effect execution], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  When the change suggesting effect executed at the n-th time is the success mode and the change suggesting effect at the (n+1)th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Success mode, no next production execution] table is selected. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  When the change suggesting effect executed at the n-th time is the failure mode and the change suggesting effect at the (n+1)th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Failure mode, performance is performed next time] is selected. In the case where the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, there is next effect execution], the character A is 37%, the character B is 32%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 1%, and the character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  When the change suggesting effect executed at the n-th time is a failure mode and the change suggesting effect at the (n+1)th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start prize, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. Failure mode, no next production execution] table is selected. In the case where the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no effect is performed next time], the character A is 35%, the character B is 30%, the character C is 30%, the character D is 5%, and the character E is 0%. The judgment value is assigned so that the probability is selected.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect, based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 11-17. Therefore, when the nth and n+1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E are selected in the n+1th change suggestion effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n+1th time may be executed, while n+1. There is a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears the same as the nth time is executed at the first time. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 11-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of being a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of being a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggesting effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a 100% probability of being a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the degree of expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E will be displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the current change suggestion effect is the last).

  In this way, since the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high jackpot expectation rate depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be done. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is different depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

  Not limited to the effect types shown in FIGS. 11 to 17, for example, an effect type in which the display mode of the active display changes at a low rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also low may be provided. It is possible to provide an effect type in which the display mode of the display is changed at a high rate and the change suggestion effect is executed at a high rate next time.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-18 to 11-20. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 11-18, 11-19 (9) to (12), and FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the golden mode at the time of the start winning. In addition, it is an example of a case where the mode at the time of active shift is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 018. . Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the green mode at the time of the start winning. And an example in which it is decided to set the mode at the time of active shift to the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is set to the change pattern 014. Is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on that, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect No., and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is determined that the change suggestion effect D of the success mode is executed based on the determination and the fifth change suggestion effect, and the success mode in which the character E appears with respect to the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that the change suggestion effect E is decided to be executed.

  11-18(1), the active display 30TM003 (white circular display) of the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the variable display of the left middle right decoration pattern is executed on the image display device 5. It shows the state.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect A in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(1), the character A appears from the right side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character A performs the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, and subsequently, FIG. As shown in -18(2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the normal mode active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image that reminds that the active display has exploded. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18(3), in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003a (white triangular display) of a special mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. ..

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect B in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(4), the character B appears from the left side of the screen, the effect image in which the character B performs the action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, and subsequently, FIG. As shown in -18(5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character B hits the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18(6), in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in a blue mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect C in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-18(7), the character C appears from the right side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character C performs the action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-18(8), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19(9), in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003d (green circular display) in a green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19(10), the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character D performs the action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, and subsequently, As shown in FIG. 11-19(11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (12), in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in a red form. It

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the success mode change suggestion effect E in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which a transparent member (such as a glass plate) forming the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-20(14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in a mode in which the crack range is expanded is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(15), an image in which the transparent member forming the screen of the image display device 5 is broken (screen crack image 30TM210) is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-20(16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, an active display 30TM003e (golden circular display) in a gold mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. It

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (18), the screen crack image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 11-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. A reach state in which the same decorative pattern (“7” in this example) is stopped in the display area is established, and the letters “REACH!!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen (area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). The performance is executed. Here, as described above, when the reach is established, the gold-colored active display 30TM003e is hidden and the rectangular frame indicating the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information will not be displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 11-18 and FIGS. 11-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be the green mode at the time of the start winning. In addition, it is an example of the case where the mode at the time of active shift is determined to be the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 014. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on that, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect No., and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it is determined and the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode is decided to be executed based on the fact that the change suggestion effect of the fifth time is not executed.

  11-18(1) to 11-19(9) are the same as the effect examples of the change pattern 018 described above (the first change suggesting effect to the third change suggesting effect), which will be described. 11-19 is omitted and an example of effects shown in (10) and (20) to (22) of FIG.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the failure mode change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-19(10), the character D appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character D performs the action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, and subsequently, As shown in FIG. 11-19(20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D has not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the green active display 30TM003d is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and instead, the character D throws and does not hit. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19(21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is finished, the active display area 30TM103 continuously displays the active display 30TM003d in the green mode. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after completion of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), the reach state in which the same decorative design (in this example, “4”) is stopped in the left design display region and the right design display region is established, and “reach!! The reach effect in which the character "" is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103) is executed. Here, as described above, the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the reach state is established, so the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target ends.

  As shown in FIG. 11-18(1) to FIG. 11-20(19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state in which the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is continuously executed on the image display device 5. , The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggesting effect of a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area to establish the reach state. That is, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the change suggesting effect a predetermined number of times, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped, the direction of variable display is changed, and the reach state is changed. Not established. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the change suggestion effect is performed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not change, so that the change suggestion effect can be more focused.

  Although FIG. 11-16 shows a change pattern in which the failure mode change suggestive effects are not continuous, the invention is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which failure mode change suggestive effects are continuous may be provided. .. Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed three times and then the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed twice. Further, an effect pattern may be provided in which the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed once or more, but the success mode change suggestion effect is not executed even once, so that the display mode of the active display does not change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-16, the display mode of the active display does not change when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display mode is always displayed when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed. Although the example in which the display mode changes is shown, the display mode is not limited to such a mode, and when the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, it is activated at a higher rate than when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed. It suffices that the display mode of the display is changed, and for example, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display does not change even if the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the change of the failure mode. An effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes even when the suggestive effect is executed may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode, the special mode. An example of changing from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a gold mode has been shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode, and when a change suggestive effect of a successful mode is executed. May be provided with a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display is changed to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation level is higher by two levels or more (for example, a normal mode to a green mode, a blue mode to a gold mode, etc.). Further, the rate of change in the display mode in two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears When the display mode is changed, the rate of change of the display mode by two stages or more is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate of change of the display mode is two stages or more. Is also good. Further, when the change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative design is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the fluctuating display of the decorative design is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped and then re-varied is executed once or more, before the temporary stop of the decorative design. You may make it perform the change suggestion production of a success mode. For example, when the temporary stop is performed n times, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (the change suggestion effect of the success mode of n times is continuously executed), and thereafter. By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the (n+1)th temporary stop is not executed. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the change pattern in which the pseudo-continuous change is not executed even once, only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed. May be provided. Further, when the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed on the basis of the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n+1 times), the change suggestion effect of the success mode of n+1 times is continuously performed. An effect pattern that is executed but does not execute the change mode effect suggestion of the failure mode may be provided.

  In the case of such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (the character. Perform an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and performs an action, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed and the first time. After the re-fluctuation of No. is started, the character B appears and takes action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-fluctuation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and take action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern (that is, the period in which the variation mode of the decorative pattern is changed), the change suggestive effect can be noticed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect of the decorative pattern from being lowered when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, when performing the effect of changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started in the state where the decorative pattern is displayed in the vertical direction (the character appears). It is preferable that the change suggesting effect be terminated (the character performs an action to change the display mode of the active display) before changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern to the horizontal direction. For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the first character appears and performs an action, and the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative pattern changes from the vertical direction. After the change in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and take action to change the display mode of the active display from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing at which the variation display direction of the decorative pattern changes, it is possible to pay attention to the change suggestion effect and display the variation of the decorative pattern. It is possible not to reduce the effect of the effect when the direction changes.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect is an example that is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a mode, and the change suggestion effect is the display mode of the hold display. It may be a production that suggests that the change. For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. When the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is a similar action (effect that acts on the active display or the hold display, for example, the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, but in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, while the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display, In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character may not perform the action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. It should be noted that the action suggested by the appearing character may be different between the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect. For example, in the success mode change suggestion effect, an active display or a pending display to be changed The action of throwing the ball in the direction of (the effect that acts on the active display or the hold display) is performed. You may make it perform the effect).

  In the above-described embodiment, the larger the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period. Is higher, the higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the jackpot expectation degree is. . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary suspension of the decorative pattern (the combination of the decorative patterns or the pseudo continuous pattern in which re-variation (pseudo continuous) will be performed after the temporary stop) It may be a period, or may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern again after the decorative pattern is changed again (that is, a period between pseudo-runs). In addition, the predetermined period may be a period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the first stop of any one of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and all the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right from the start of variation of the decorative pattern It may be a period until the fixed stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggesting effects are executed, there may be a plurality of patterns of periods from the end of one change suggesting effect to the start of the next change suggesting effect. For example, when the interval from the end of the change suggestion effect 1 to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the rate of success of the next change suggestion effect is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation degree is high. May be higher. Further, when a large number of times of change suggestion effects are executed, the interval may be gradually shortened, and accordingly, the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased. According to such a form, the player determines whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed when the change suggestion effect 1 is finished and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interest.

  In the above embodiment, the rate of changing the display mode of the active display may be different depending on the current set value (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case where the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion in which the display mode of the active display is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do it. In addition, compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) changes the display color of the active display more frequently (for example, 3 times or more) The pattern selection rate may be high, that is, the success mode change suggestion effect may be executed and the success mode change suggestion effect may be continuous. Further, compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the change suggestive effect of the specific type is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6) (for example, the effect in which the character X having a low appearance frequency appears). May be executed at a higher rate.

[Another example of power-on processing]
Next, another example of the power-on process will be described.
12-1 to 12-3 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 and 9 -11 and FIGS. 9-43 to 9-44, and processes corresponding to the processes shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some of the processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11) are omitted from the drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This processing is similar to the processing shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0-5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the set values stored in the set value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as normal values, and six-stage set values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 4 in this example is described above. 9-4, etc., and the setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6, shown in FIG. 9-4.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is set in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is damaged, it may not be a normal value. If the set value is a legal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode is changed to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580) and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is executed, and when the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is executed. It has been done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the process related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

  The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at power restoration is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified by notifying that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent processes related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 12-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the set value can be confirmed.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( Change of the set value and / Or, it becomes possible to confirm. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

  In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state in order to bring the setting value into a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), but (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, provided that the setting has been performed.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is somehow illegal. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

  In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

  On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described below without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the mode is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is performed. Move on to (send setting command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 determines that , And proceeds to step S21TM4120. When it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set in the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, if the backup RAM area data is checked (step S21TM4010) and the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

  If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 12B is executed.

  On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in the step S21TM4140, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state In (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing of step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

  Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message "Setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The user is informed that an operation for changing the set value is performed (the set value is confirmed). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after turning off the power" is displayed. It should be noted that similar notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeat step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

  In this loop processing, the CPU 103 performs a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4200) and then displays the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, whereby "the set value is not a regular value (0 to 5)". Despite that there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all of which are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered.” Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a calling lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine). To be done.

  During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. A weight of 4 ms is provided to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal externally, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered)).

  The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set at the time of power-on, and it is determined to be YES in step S21TM4030), in any of the cases, the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing and special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 9-14), the set value in the set value storage area is set to a regular value. Need to let. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, it is possible to change the setting value ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, when NO is determined in any of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) described above.

  Once the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the game player cannot shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. I won't. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily cut off so that all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 presets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3. In the process of FIG. 12-2, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When the regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as the regular value in the setting value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure is input, and when the power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 checks whether the power supply is stopped. Immediately before the power supply stops operating due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area.

  Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repetitive processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620, or the repetitive processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed), the power supply When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk at the amusement hall normally recognizes the range of the set values as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk at the amusement hall will actually see it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the setting value of. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). When the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, when the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, when the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility of being present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the control is in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). Based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and then proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, if the regular set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area is 3 when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off last time). If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 responds. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

  Here, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and send the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

  In addition, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the set value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes of step S21TM4540 and subsequent steps are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (step S21TM1670 of FIG. 9-14) when the process is then shifted to the normal game process. The security signal will continue to be output until. For example, when the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 12-4(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are confirmed. Corresponding to the end of control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determines which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process (without (without). Further, the processing for setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determine which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and the output end control between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. The control load can be reduced.

  Also, output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, a security signal that is common to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (1000 ms) is set. The timer is set. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it was controlled.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-4(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily sent in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the value of the timer, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 to be described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

  When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 12-4(2), when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. 1 sec has passed, and when the setting change mode has been controlled, 30 sec has passed from the end of the setting change mode.

  Specifically, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM clear is not performed and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt permission is given. In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 9-14), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled ( When the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (for example, in FIG. 9-14) In the information output processing of step S21TM1670 shown), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 30,000 ms to 0 ms. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process. ) To 0 ms until the security signal is output, the game control timer interrupt process may be started after the security signal is output.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the output period of the security signal different between the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode and the case of controlling in the setting change mode, while making the output control of the security signal common.

  As a result, in the external device, it is possible to know whether the initialization process has been executed and the control has been performed in the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been executed and has been performed in the setting change mode. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial state can be specified. It is possible to presume that the conversion processing is executed and the setting change mode may be controlled.

  The security signal is output even when the game stop target error such as the magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets the abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the abnormality detection flag being set when the power is restored.

  If the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is not executed). Therefore, the value of the abnormality detection flag is set to the initial value in the signal output process. It remains set without being converted, and the security signal can be continuously output for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to the period from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode until 1 second has elapsed. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-13 is executed), and therefore, in the subsequent signal output processing. The anomaly detection flag is cleared (it is unclear whether or not an anomaly was detected when the power was cut off), and as a result, the setting change mode ends during the security signal output period. From the time until 30 seconds elapse (a period corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear).

  In addition, in the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 12-2, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is first set after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. The value of the security signal timer set to 1 may be at least a period during which the output of the security signal can be recognized by the external device side, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the power is cut off after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the setting values as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly displayed in the image on the CPU 120 side for effect control. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) designated by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 is set. The effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

  Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command to perform the effect control. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of setting values designated by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the CPU 120 side for effect control, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, or an effect that suggests the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it becomes unnecessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value designated by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined to be YES in S21TM4020, the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040). Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the processing at the time of recovery from power failure without RAM clearing.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as that of step S21TM1340 and subsequent steps shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, the processing of step S21TM1340 to step S21TM1370 and step S21TM1480 to step S21TM1540, that is, the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, is executed, and after the interrupt permission, FIG. It suffices to move to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing) shown in 14. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode has been controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode has ended, the CPU 103 determines that the RAM clear flag is 0 Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command for power-off recovery (step S21TM1370), and the normal game process is started.

  In the production control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), restoration from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed. Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like performs recovery from power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that the RAM has not been cleared.

  On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, the process at the time of turning on the power, which involves clearing the RAM, may be executed.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the same processing as the step S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) and the subsequent steps shown in FIG. 9-13. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) to step S21TM1460, a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer described above (step S21TM1465), and processes of steps S21TM1480 to S21TM1540, that is, a backup RAM when the power is turned on. If the data check result of the area is abnormal, the process may be executed, and after the interruption is permitted, the game control timer interruption process (including the special symbol process process) shown in FIG. 9-14 may be performed. .

  As shown in FIG. 12-3, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining a normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

  The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows. If it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

  After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process to be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize (have been broken). Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the game state or the like in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 (when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to inform that the RAM has been cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data of 1.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. When the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Value), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is.

  Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (see FIG. 9-14). The information output process of step S21TM1670 shown), and thereafter, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed due to interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The output of the security signal is stopped at the timing.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21 described above). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

  Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process (FIGS. 9-14) is executed, and the process proceeds to the normal game process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol is determined. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (normal random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process when power is restored (process after step S21TM1340), but is not limited to such a form. When it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the game machine frame 3 or the glass). It is also possible to shift to the process when power is restored (the process after step S21TM1340) depending on the state of the door frame 3a.

  In addition, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Can be prevented from being initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 to set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state or the like. There is.

  As described above, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting value was unstable because it was controlled in the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the set value that the game hall is trying to confirm is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game is stopped (step S21) without shifting to the normal game processing. S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 are controllable, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stopped state (step S21TM4220).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in the state where the set value is unstable, and to supply the power when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that it was in the setting change mode when the disconnection occurred.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3, the CPU 103 determines the condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) ( When all of the steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is displayed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

  In the example shown in FIG. 12-5, each 7-segment display 21TM029A to 21TM029D included in the display monitor 21TM029 displays the letter “E”, thereby causing an abnormality in the clerk at the amusement hall (in the setting change mode). There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off under control). In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received the setting value error command, causes the image display device 5 to display a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off”. After turning the power off (power switch 21TM055 is OFF), the store clerk, etc., shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is ON) and changes the set value. Perform a notification to urge (confirm the set value).

  In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If it is determined to be YES), the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the side of the production control board 12 ("Power is turned on again after power off." Please move to the setting change mode”).

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated. ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “in the setting change mode” or a message “please perform the setting change operation to change the set value” can be displayed on the image display device 5. With this, a clerk at the amusement hall can understand that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the preset set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any one of the conditions is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled, and the game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190). .. As a result, an error display (step S21TM4210: display “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please change to the setting change mode").

  In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please change to the setting change mode”) is also performed, and as a state of the gaming machine, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the condition for changing to the setting change mode after the power is restored is It will be notified that the condition is not established. In this case, the clerk at the amusement hall understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after once turning off the power, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

  Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error is displayed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029). This automatically shifts to the setting change mode without prompting the user to avoid unnecessary error display and promptly change the setting value appropriately.

  On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

  When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) are not satisfied, different commands may be transmitted as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

  For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for the transition is satisfied). The CPU 120 for effect control, which has transmitted the command indicating that the command has been received, displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled in the setting change mode" It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), the lock control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  And as shown in FIG. 9-38(2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed, even though the operation is not controlled by either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the operation is not controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the illegal It is possible to check whether or not

  Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. Thus, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether or not the condition is satisfied.

  In the processing shown in FIG. 12-6, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If YES (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. It is different from the process shown in FIG. 12-1 in that the process is controlled to the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled to the game stopped state (the process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3.

  Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12-6, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. Is set, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. Based on the establishment of the three conditions, the setting change mode is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570). If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) are set. Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

  As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, it is possible to improve workability for determining the set value.

  Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled in the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to step S21TM4620 in FIG. 12-2).

  As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation once changes the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While making different, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode, It is arranged to appropriately shift to the normal game processing.

  Here, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the setting change mode is controlled, a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be given. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits the setting value error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Perform the corresponding process), and the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting value error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once and then switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the process shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-3 and 12-6, it is impossible to shift to the normal game process when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, the gaming machine manufacturer sets the setting change flag in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), and then the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is ended, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and to take a measure to fix the set value.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control in the case where the power is cut off while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 12-7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-2 and the above-described FIG. 10-2, in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated to set the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. It will change itself.

  First, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -7(1).

  As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled to the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read set value is set to 1 "1", which is obtained by adding, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from "1" to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power supply was cut off in the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in the order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 12-6 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

  In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored when the power is restored. The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the preset setting value may have already been set, and in this case, the clerk at the amusement arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the setting value again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to the normal game processing, workability can be improved.

  Next, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG. 12-7(2).

  The order 1 to order 4 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the confirmed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on), and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

  Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-7 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, , Valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area when power is restored).

  The storage control of the set values shown in FIG. 12-7 may be applied, and the storage control of the set values shown in FIG. 9-37 may be applied. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is set when the setting change mode is controlled. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area and the setting change mode is ended (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting information temporary storage area The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in response to the change of the set value stored in the.

  With such a configuration, even if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the power is cut off without completing the operation for ending the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set to the power supply. It has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stopped state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

  In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting values (for example, for all of the setting values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to a gaming machine (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

[Explanation on Characteristic Section 35TM]
Next, a gaming machine including the characteristic unit 35TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-1 to 13-20. The gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 includes one image display device, but the gaming machine may include a plurality of image display devices. In the example of FIG. 13-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first image display device and a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second image display device. Further, as the movable body 32 described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorative bodies having a light transmitting property, are provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the two image display devices shown in FIG. 13-1, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, which is the first image display device, corresponds to the image display device 5 shown in FIG. It is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. That is, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays information that can be displayed by the image display device 5 described above. For example, a background image of a decorative design is displayed and variable display of the decorative design is executed. In addition, an effect image such as a notice effect associated with the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays a hold display and an active display (display corresponding to variable display).

  The sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, which is the second image display device, is provided below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. On the front side (player side) of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a first logo panel 35TM410 and a second logo panel 35TM420 at the downward movement end are arranged. On the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, an image for changing the mode (for example, emission color) of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 having light transmittance, an image simulating a 7-segment display, etc. are displayed. It is possible.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, with an image simulating a 7-segment display, the remaining time until the suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol) is executed, the jackpot expectation degree (for example, the winning expectation in the battle effect) It is possible to notify the player of a numerical value indicating a degree), an elapsed time since the start of the suggestion effect (for example, a music reach effect of playing a song when a reach state is established), and the like. The numerical values shown by the images simulating these 7-segment displays are images related to the effect (including variable display of the decorative pattern) executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and are executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is an image related to the production time.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 is vertically driven by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is vertically driven by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. Hereinafter, a main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a first logo panel 35TM410 and a first logo panel driving mechanism 35TM510, and a logo panel including a second logo panel 35TM420 and a second logo panel driving mechanism 35TM520. The drive mechanism 35TM001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4.

(Logo panel drive mechanism)
13-2 shows the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, FIG. 13-2(a) is a front view of the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001, and FIG. 13-2(b) is P of FIG. 13-2(a). FIG. 13C is a view on arrow Q of FIG. 13B. As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-3, the logo panel drive mechanism 35TM001 is arranged near the center of the game area on the game board 2. FIG. 13-2(a) shows a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the downward movement end and overlap the front and rear sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 13-2(b) and FIG. 13-3, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is located below the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and in front of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (on the player side). It is arranged. Both the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are rectangular in a front view, and the width and height of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are larger than the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged side by side at the same distance from the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when they are at the downward movement end. The first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged on the left side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged on the right side of the front surface of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at positions overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The width and height when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged in parallel are substantially the same as the width and height of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Therefore, from the player's point of view, when the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the downward movement end, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is covered by the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It looks like you are.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are made of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, the contour of the character information "FEV" and the contour of the character information "ER!" are formed by unevenness modeling. For example, in a transparent synthetic resin plate, the character part (the part surrounded by the outline of the character) is formed thin and the other part is formed thick, so that the translucency of the character part is made transparent. It is configured to be higher than the luminous property.

  Instead of or in addition to such a structure, a contour member formed of a material such as a colored and opaque synthetic resin on a transparent synthetic resin plate and formed in accordance with the contour of the character May be attached. The first logo panel is made of a plurality of materials having different translucency so that the translucency of the material of the character portion (the portion surrounded by the outline of the character) is higher than that of the material of the other portions. The 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 may be formed.

  In this way, by making the translucency of the character part higher than the translucency of the other part, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (the first logo) located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. When the panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are moved to the upper performance position, among the information displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200) located behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, Positions corresponding to the character portions of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 (the area surrounded by the outline of "FEV" and the area surrounded by the outline of "ER!") (positions facing each area) The information displayed in <1> has higher visibility than the information displayed in the positions corresponding to other parts.

  The first logo panel 35TM410 can be moved in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a) by the first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510. Further, the second logo panel 35TM420 can be moved in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a) by the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520. The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 and the second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 have the same structure and are symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of FIG. 13-2(a).

  The first logo panel drive mechanism 35TM510 includes a first rack 35TM511, a first pinion 35TM512, a first motor 35TM513, a first support plate 35TM514, and the like. The second logo panel drive mechanism 35TM520 includes a second rack 35TM521, a second pinion 35TM522, a second motor 35TM523, a second support plate 35TM524 and the like. The first rack 35TM511 is fixed to the left side surface of the first logo panel 35TM410, and the second rack 35TM521 is fixed to the right side surface of the second logo panel 35TM420. The first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521 are formed in an elongated prism shape in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a).

  The first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524 are formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the vertical direction in FIG. 13-2(a). The first rack 35TM511 is guided by the first guide 35TM515 integrally formed on the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, so that the first rack 35TM511 can move in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a). Similarly, the second rack 35TM521 is guided by the second guide 35TM525 integrally formed on the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524 so that the second rack 35TM521 can move in the vertical direction in FIG. 13-2(a).

  A first motor 35TM513 and a second motor 35TM523 are attached to the back surfaces of the first support plate 35TM514 and the second support plate 35TM524, respectively. The first pinion 35TM512 fixed to the output shaft of the first motor 35TM513 meshes with the first rack teeth 35TM511A formed on the left side surface of the first rack 35TM511. Similarly, the second pinion 35TM522 fixed to the output shaft of the second motor 35TM523 meshes with the second rack teeth 35TM521A formed on the right side surface of the second rack 35TM521.

  As described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 as movable bodies are connected to the effect control board 12, and the operation of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is the effect control board. 12 (effect control CPU 120).

  Specifically, the first motor 35TM513 for driving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the origin detection sensor 35TM519 for detecting whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is located at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (Photo sensor), second motor 35TM523 for driving the second logo panel 35TM420, origin detection sensor 35TM529 for detecting whether or not the second logo panel 35TM420 is located at the downward movement end, that is, the origin position. (Photo sensor) is connected, and the operation of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is controlled by controlling the operations of the first motor 35TM513 and the second motor 35TM523. CPU120 for production) can be individually controlled, and whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position (initial position), the production control board 12 (production). It can be detected by the control CPU 120).

  When the production control CPU 120 rotates the first motor 35TM513, the first logo panel 35TM410 fixed to the first rack 35TM511 moves in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a). Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 rotates the second motor 35TM523, the second logo panel 35TM420 fixed to the second rack 35TM521 moves in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a).

  The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are independently movable in the vertical direction of FIG. 13-2(a), and both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved. It can be moved upward or downward in FIG. 13-2(a).

  Plate-shaped first contact members 35TM516 and second contact members 35TM526 are fixed to the lower ends of the first rack 35TM511 and the second rack 35TM521, respectively. A first lower end stopper 35TM517 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514, and a first upper end stopper 35TM518 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the first support plate 35TM514. Similarly, a second lower end stopper 35TM527 is fixed to the lower end of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524, and a second upper end stopper 35TM528 is fixed to the upper end side of the front surface of the second support plate 35TM524.

  When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves upward in FIG. 13-2(a), the first contact member 35TM516 contacts the first upper end stopper 35TM518 at the upward moving end of the first logo panel 35TM410, The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the correct effect position at the upward movement end. When the first logo panel 35TM410 moves downward in FIG. 13-2(a), the first contact member 35TM516 abuts the first lower end stopper 35TM517 at the downward moving end of the first logo panel 35TM410, The logo panel 35TM410 stops at the accurate origin position of the downward movement end (also referred to as an initial position or a retracted position). Whether or not the first logo panel 35TM410 is at the origin position is detected by the origin detection sensor 35TM519 (photo sensor).

  Similarly, when the second logo panel 35TM420 moves upward in FIG. 13-2(a), the second contact member 35TM526 abuts the second upper end stopper 35TM528 at the upward moving end of the second logo panel 35TM420. , The second logo panel 35TM420 stops at the correct effect position at the upward movement end. When the second logo panel 35TM420 moves downward in FIG. 13-2(a), the second contact member 35TM526 abuts the second lower end stopper 35TM527 at the downward moving end of the second logo panel 35TM420, and The logo panel 35TM420 stops at the accurate origin position of the downward movement end (also referred to as an initial position or a retracted position). Whether or not the second logo panel 35TM420 is at the origin position is detected by the origin detection sensor 35TM529 (photo sensor).

  In the state of FIG. 13-2(a), both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are arranged at the origin position overlapping with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and back, and the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the player can see the whole. However, since the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are formed of a translucent material, the player can display the sub liquid crystal display through the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. It is possible to visually recognize the information of the container 35TM300.

  That is, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position changes according to the display image on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. At this time, the character portions of “FEV” and “ER!”, that is, the portion where the outline for effecting is formed, has higher visibility than the other portions, so the player can more clearly display the sub liquid crystal display. The display image on the display 35TM300 can be visually recognized, and the change in the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped more clearly.

  FIG. 13-4 is a front view showing a state in which both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a front view. That is, in FIG. 13-4, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are simultaneously moved to the effect position that is the upward movement end of FIG. 13-4, and the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM410 are moved. The panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, regarding the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower part is lowered, and regarding the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the overall visibility is improved. The player can clearly see the information displayed on the entire sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Further, in this state, the modes of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position may change according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the part displayed at the bottom). become. At this time, regarding the character portion of "FEV" in the first logo panel 35TM410 and the character portion of "ER!" in the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can clearly distinguish the main portion from the other portions. The display image on the liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be visually recognized, and the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be grasped more clearly.

  Although not shown, the first logo panel 35TM410 may be independently moved to a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a front view. That is, the first logo panel 35TM410 is moved to the effect position that is the upward movement end, and the first logo panel 35TM410 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower left part is lowered, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the left half is improved, while the right side is improved. Visibility is reduced by half. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the left half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult to clearly see the information displayed on the right half.

  Further, in this state, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 in the presentation position changes in accordance with the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the portion displayed in the lower left part). In addition, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position changes according to the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (particularly the portion displayed on the right half). At this time, regarding the character portion of “FEV” in the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 more clearly than other portions, and The change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 can be clearly understood. Regarding the character portion of "ER!" in the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can more clearly see the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as compared with other portions, and more clearly. The change in the image displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

  Similarly, although not shown, the second logo panel 35TM420 may be independently moved to a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a front view. That is, the second logo panel 35TM420 is moved to the effect position which is the upward movement end, and the second logo panel 35TM420 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, with respect to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the visibility of the lower right part is lowered, and with respect to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the visibility of the right half is improved, while the left side is improved. Visibility is reduced by half. While the player can clearly see the information displayed on the right half of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the information displayed on the left half.

  Further, in this state, the mode of the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position changes according to the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (particularly the part displayed in the lower right part). Further, the mode of the first logo panel 35TM410 at the origin position changes depending on the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (particularly the part displayed on the left half). At this time, with respect to the character portion of “ER!” in the second logo panel 35TM420, the player can visually recognize the display image of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 more clearly than other portions. It is possible to more clearly grasp the change in the image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Regarding the “FEV” character portion of the first logo panel 35TM410, the player can visually recognize the display image of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 more clearly than the other portion, and the character can be more clearly displayed. The change in the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be grasped.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-2 to 13-4, the logo panel driving mechanism 35TM001 displays both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 between the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It can be moved at the same time as one body or independently. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of patterns for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, and to provide a plurality of patterns for changing the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is possible, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

  In addition, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the origin position to the presentation position, the screen visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 improves and the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 decreases. To do. On the other hand, as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move from the effect position to the origin position (return to the origin position), the screen visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 improves and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Screen visibility is reduced.

  In this way, the visibility of the different display means, that is, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, changes according to the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are decorations. And the visibility of each display means can be associated with each other, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Pseudo continuous production)
As described above, the variation pattern is determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). Here, when it is determined that the variation pattern is one in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or more, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command designating the variation pattern displays the decoration based on the variation pattern on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. During the variable display period of the symbol, the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or more.

  Pseudo continuous production, in the period from the start of variable display of the decorative design until the decorative design is fixedly stopped and the display result is derived and displayed, in each display area of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. This is an effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed again. By executing the pseudo-relational effect, it is as if within the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed once, that is, within the variable display period of the decorative symbol based on the one variation pattern command corresponding to one reserved memory. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed plural times.

  In the pseudo continuous production shown in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern consisting of numbers is temporarily stopped in the display region of the left symbol and the display region of the right symbol, and then, from the letters "NEXT" in the display region of the middle symbol. After the pseudo continuous symbol (in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 shown as “NEXT” shown in FIGS. 13-9(5) and 13-10(10)) is temporarily stopped, the left The variable display of the decorative symbol in each display area of the symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is restarted (so-called revariation is performed). Here, the "state in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative pattern does not completely stop and moves slightly up and down, but is not limited to this, a state in which the decorative pattern is swinging, It may be a state in which the decorative pattern is repeatedly expanded and reduced, and a state in which the decorative pattern is in a form (deformed) different from that at the final stop (at the time of finalizing the pattern).

(Countdown production)
In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 based on the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect, until the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the display area of the middle symbol (re-variation is performed). It is possible to execute a countdown effect for notifying the remaining time (until it is notified) in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as will be described later, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed, but the pseudo continuous effect may be executed without executing the countdown effect.

  In the countdown effect in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the sub liquid crystal is at a timing when the remaining time until the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the display area of the middle symbol is 3 seconds. "3" is displayed on the display device 35TM300, "2" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 when the remaining time is 2 seconds, and it is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 when the remaining time is 1 second. "1" is displayed, and "0" is displayed at the timing when the remaining time is 0 seconds (timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the display area of the medium symbol). The remaining time until the temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the countdown effect is displayed by an image simulating a 7-segment display.

  In this way, as the time (seconds) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the countdown effect, "3" which is set as the initial value is displayed first. After that, by performing the countdown operation, the time (seconds) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is decreased by 1 every 1 second, and at the timing when the final value becomes “0”. Pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped in the display area of the medium symbols. That is, it is notified that the re-change will be executed.

  In addition, when the variable display is executed based on a variation pattern involving a plurality of pseudo continuous effects, and when it is determined to execute the countdown effect, the countdown effect is corresponding to each pseudo continuous effect. Will be executed. That is, the same number of countdown effects as the pseudo continuous effect are executed within one variable display period of the decorative pattern based on one variation pattern (reserved storage).

  In this example, the initial value of the countdown effect is "3" regardless of the variation pattern and the display result. As a result, when "3" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player immediately starts the countdown until the suggestion effect with high jackpot expectation (in this example, the pseudo effect effect) is executed. It is possible to understand that.

(Expectation notice announcement)
Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started by the game control microcomputer 100 (variation pattern setting process shown in S111 of FIG. 5). At that time, there are cases where it is determined to have a fluctuation pattern with super reach. For example, in a variation pattern involving super reach, after a reach state is established in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, a battle effect in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle with each other is executed (FIGS. 13-11 (13) and (18)). ), when the final display result is a big hit (when the big hit symbol stops fixed), the teammate character executes a victory effect to win over the enemy character, and when the final display result is a miss (the hit symbol is fixed) In the case of stopping), a defeat effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

  The anticipation degree notice effect in the present embodiment is an effect for notifying the victory expectation degree (that is, the jackpot expectation degree) in which the teammate character wins over the enemy character in the battle effect. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-11 (14) to (17), the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 after the reach state is established (after the battle effect is started), and the entire width of the numerical bar 35TM610 is displayed. The winning expectation level (big hit expectation level) is suggested by the ratio (0 to 100%) of the range of the colored part to. The victory expectation degree indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is indicated, and finally reaches the final value. When the victory expectation degree indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 reaches the final value, the victory expectation degree indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 is not updated even after 5 seconds from the timing.

(Count up production)
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a count-up effect in which the expectation of winning is displayed as a numerical value (numerical value) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in correspondence with the expectation notice effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. . Here, as will be described later, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation notice effect is always executed, but when the expectation notice effect is executed without executing the count-up effect. There is also.

  The count-up effect is to display the degree of expectation of victory indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a two-digit numerical value (number). Therefore, the victory expectation (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is updated by 10 every 5 seconds after the initial value is displayed, and finally reaches the final value. When the victory expectation degree (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the victory expectation degree (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is not updated even after 5 seconds from the timing. ..

  In this way, the expectation of victory indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the expectation of victory indicated by numerical value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 match, and the expectation of victory indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 is the same. In response to the change from the initial value to the final value, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 also changes from the initial value to the final value.

  The numerical value as the degree of expectation of victory displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is displayed by an image simulating a 7-segment display as in the case of the countdown effect. However, unlike the case of the countdown effect described above, the initial value and the final value of the count up effect are respectively provided in plural, and the jackpot expectation degree depends on the combination of the initial value and the final value (that is, the change pattern). It is different. Further, the display mode is made to differ depending on the expectation of victory (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In this example, the degree of expectation of victory (numerical value) is in the range of "50" to "70". If it is, it is displayed in blue, and if it is in the range of "80" to "100", it is displayed in red. Further, when the expectation of victory (numerical value) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value, the player is informed that the expectation of victory has reached the final value by blinking the numerical value. I am trying.

  In this way, as the victory expectation degree displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the count-up effect, the value (50 to 90 in this example) set as the initial value is displayed first. After that, a count-up operation is performed based on the determined change pattern (number of changes), so that the victory expectation degree displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 increases by 10 every 5 seconds, and finally, The final display mode is set when the value (60 to 100 in this example) is reached. That is, the final winning expectation (big hit expectation) is notified by the blinking numerical value.

(Variation start effect determination process)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. The “big hit” or “out” and the big hit type when the “big hit” is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (predetermined). Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using the random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of the preliminary determination of the display result.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. 13-6(A) when the predetermined display result is “disconnection”. In this example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is out of alignment, and the variation pattern of the non-reach is the reach mode and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode. ) Is performed, a variation pattern of the out-of-reach is provided. As a variation pattern of this super-reach deviation, a variation pattern of the super-reach deviation (without pseudo-relation) in which the pseudo-relation effect is not executed and a variation pattern of the super-reach deviation (1 pseudo-relation) in which the pseudo-relation effect is executed only once. A pattern and a variation pattern of out-of-reach (twice pseudo-repetition) in which the pseudo-reproduction is executed twice are provided.

  In the example of FIG. 13-6(A), a variation pattern of non-reach loss is determined at a rate of 90%, a variation pattern of out-of-reach loss (no pseudo-relation) is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 4%. Thus, the variation pattern of out-of-reach (pseudo-repeated) is determined, and the variation pattern of out-of-reach (pseudo-repeated) is determined at a rate of 1%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines the change pattern based on the big hit change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-6(B). In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode, and the super reach jackpot variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect (battle effect) is executed is set as the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot in which the pseudo link effect is not executed (without pseudo link). A variation pattern, a variation pattern of a super reach big hit (pseudo consecutive 1 time) in which the pseudo continuous production is executed only once, and a variation pattern of a super reach big hit (pseudo consecutive 2 times) in which the pseudo continuous production is executed twice. , Are provided.

  In the example of FIG. 13-6(B), the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (without pseudo-repeating) is determined at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (one pseudo-repetition) is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the variation pattern of the super-reach jackpot (pseudo consecutive twice) is determined at a rate of 50%.

  In this way, when the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the jackpot is more likely to occur than when the variation pattern of super reach is not selected. Further, in the variation pattern of super reach, the ratio of big hits is higher in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed than in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, and when the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once. The proportion of big hits is higher when the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice. That is, the jackpot expectation in the change pattern of super reach has a relationship of super reach (no pseudo-repeating)<super reach (1 pseudo-repeating)<super reach (2 pseudo-repeating).

  In addition, in this example, an example in which the pseudo continuous effect may be executed up to two times is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times or more. May be. Further, the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect that can be selected only when the big hit occurs may be provided. For example, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed four times, the big hit always occurs, that is, the super reach big hit (pseudo It is also possible to provide a variation pattern of 4 consecutive times) but not a variation pattern of out of super reach (4 pseudo consecutive times).

  CPU103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designating command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designating command for designating the variation pattern, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation Command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type when it becomes big hit), and variation time of special symbol and effect contents ( Reach and pseudo-relation, etc.) variation pattern command to specify, a set of commands, based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol It is possible to specify the variation time and the effect contents (reach, pseudo-relationship, etc.). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game controlling microcomputer 100, the special symbol (first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

  FIG. 13-5 is a flowchart showing the variation start time effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. While setting a production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production) based on the command and the variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-5.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the anticipation degree notice effect based on the expectation degree notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIGS. 13-6 (C) and (D)) (step S35TM1010). ..

  FIG. 13-6(C) is an execution rate of the expectation notice production when the display result is disappointing, and is a determination value for determining whether or not the expectation notice production is executed for each of the deviation variation patterns. Has been allocated. When the variation pattern is “out of reach”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. If the variation pattern is “out of super reach (no pseudo-relation)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 90%, and to execute at a rate of 10%. Further, when the variation pattern is “out of super reach (one pseudo-repetition)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 80%, and to execute at a rate of 20%. .. Further, when the variation pattern is “out of super reach (two pseudo-repetitions)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 70% and at a rate of 30%. ..

  FIG. 13-6(D) is an execution rate of the expectation notice production when the display result is a big hit, and is a determination value for determining whether to execute the expectation notice production for each of the big hit variation patterns. Has been allocated. When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot (without pseudo-repeating)”, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and executes it at a rate of 60%. To decide. When the variation pattern is “super reach big hit (pseudo-repeated once)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 30%, and to execute at a rate of 70%. .. When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot (pseudo consecutive twice)”, it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production at a rate of 20%, and it is determined to be performed at a rate of 80%. ..

  In this way, in the case of super-reach, the proportion of expectation notice productions executed is higher than in the case of non-super-reach, and in the case of super-reach, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous productions are executed, The rate of expectation notice production being executed is high. As described above, the larger the number of times the pseudo-relationship is performed, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Therefore, when the expectation notice production is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the expectation notice production is not executed. Is high.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S35TM1020), the final display mode (final value) of the expectation notice effect is finally displayed as the expectation notice effect. A determination is made based on the mode determination table (see FIG. 13-6(E)) (step S35TM1030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the expectation notice production (NO in step S35TM1020), the process proceeds to step S35TM1090 described later.

  FIG. 13-6(E) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode of the expectation notice production. As shown in FIG. 13-6(E), in this embodiment, according to the display result, “60”, “70”, “80”, “90”, and It is possible to determine any numerical value of "100", and a judgment value is assigned to each of these numerical values.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6(E), when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “out”), the end of the expectation notice production is performed. The display mode is “60” at a rate of 40%, “70” at a rate of 30%, “80” at a rate of 20%, “90” at a rate of 10%, and “0” at a rate of 0%. 100". On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the final display mode of the expectation notice production is 9%. The ratio becomes 60", the ratio of 15% becomes "70", the ratio of 30% becomes "80", the ratio of 45% becomes "90", and the ratio of 1% becomes "100".

  In this way, the final display mode of the expectation notice production is a big hit as the winning expectation degree (the ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width of the number bar 35TM610) indicated by the number bar 35TM610 increases. The ratio is high, and the jackpot expectation degree has a relationship of “60”<“70”<“80”<“90”<“100”. Further, when the final display mode of the expectation notice production is "100", it is decided that a big hit will be made.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the expectation notice production on the basis of the display mode change pattern determination table of the expectation notice production (see FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G)). (Step S35TM1040).

  FIGS. 13-6 (F) and (G) are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the display mode change pattern of the expectation notice production. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the expectation notice production is to be executed and the final display mode of the expectation notice is determined, the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode to the determined manner. Any initial value (first display mode) is determined. In this example, any one of "50", "60", "70", "80", and "90" can be determined as the initial value of the expectation notice presentation effect. On the other hand, a judgment value is assigned to each.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6(F), when the display result is “out” (that is, when the determination result specified by the display result specification command is “out”), the determined expectation notice production When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is set to "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is 1). That is, in the case where the final display mode is “60”, there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes the minimum initial value “50” to the final value “60”. The initial value is determined to be "50".

  Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is “70”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 2 times) and the initial value at a rate of 60%. The value is determined to be “60” (the number of changes is 1). Further, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is “80”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 3 times) and the initial value is at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 50% (the number of changes is 1). Further, in the case where the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 10% (the number of changes is 4 times) and the initial value is at a rate of 20%. The value is determined to be "60" (3 changes), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 30% (2 changes), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 40%. (1 change).

  As shown in FIG. 13-6(G), when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the determined expectation notice effect When the final display mode is "60", the initial value is set to "50" at a rate of 100% (the number of changes is 1). That is, in the case where the final display mode is “60”, there is no change pattern other than the change pattern that changes the minimum initial value “50” to the final value “60”. The initial value is determined to be "50".

  Further, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "70", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 60% (twice the number of changes), and is initially at a rate of 40%. The value is determined to be “60” (the number of changes is 1). Further, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is “80”, the initial value is determined to be “50” at a rate of 50% (the number of changes is 3 times), and the initial value is at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 2), and the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 1). When the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "90", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 40% (the number of changes is 4 times), and the initial value at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (the number of changes is 3 times), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (the number of changes is 2 times), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 10%. (1 change). Further, when the final display mode of the determined expectation notice production is "100", the initial value is determined to be "50" at a rate of 35% (the number of changes is 5 times), and the initial value at a rate of 30%. The value is determined to be "60" (4 changes), the initial value is determined to be "70" at a rate of 20% (3 changes), and the initial value is determined to be "80" at a rate of 10%. (The number of changes is 2) The initial value is determined to be "90" at a rate of 5% (the number of changes is 1).

  In this way, when the display mode change pattern and the initial value of the anticipation degree notice effect are determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect corresponding to the execution of the expectation degree notice effect (step S35TM1050). ). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the count-up effect based on the table for determining whether or not to execute the count-up effect shown in FIG. 13-7(H).

  As shown in FIG. 13-7(H), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned such that the execution ratio of the count-up effect is different depending on the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is determined that the count-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%, and 20 It decides to carry out at the rate of %. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the count-up effect at a rate of 25%. , Decided to execute at a rate of 75%.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the expectation notice production is executed, there are times when the count-up production is executed and cases where the count-up production is not executed, and when the count-up production is executed, , The percentage of big hits is higher than when the count-up effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the count-up effect is executed, the expectation advance notice effect is always executed.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the count-up effect (YES in step S35TM1060), it determines the final display mode of the count-up effect (step S35TM1070), and further changes the display mode of the count-up effect. The pattern and the initial value are determined (step S35TM1080). Then, the process proceeds to step S35TM1090. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the count-up effect (NO in step S35TM1060), the process directly proceeds to step S35TM1090.

  Here, as described above, in the expectation notice production executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the expectation of victory indicated by the numerical bar 35TM610 (the ratio of the range of the colored portion to the entire width (100%) (0 % To 100%)) and the degree of expectation of victory indicated by a numerical value in the count-up effect executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are in a matched state. Therefore, the final value in the count-up effect is finally determined to be the same value as the winning expectation degree indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1030 (step S35TM1070). In addition, the change pattern of the expectation of victory shown as a numerical value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same pattern as the change pattern of the expectation of victory indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the pattern determined in step S35TM1040. (Step S35TM1080). In addition, the initial value in the count-up effect is determined to be the same value as the winning expectation degree initially indicated by the numerical value bar 35TM610 in the expectation notice effect, that is, the value determined in step S35TM1040 (step S35TM1080).

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the expectation notice production and the display mode of the count-up production corresponding thereto are increased by 10 from the first display mode (initial value) to the final display mode (final value). Assuming that the configuration is such that the initial value is “n”, it changes stepwise to the final value such as “n+10”, “n+20”, “n+30”,... For each change. Further, the change pattern of the expectation notice production and the change pattern of the count-up production corresponding thereto change from the first display mode (initial value) at least once (10). When the display mode (initial value) is “n”, the minimum value of the final display mode (final value) is “n+10”.

  As shown in FIG. 13-6(E), with respect to the expectation degree notice effect and the count-up effect corresponding thereto, the jackpot expectation degree increases as the final value of the victory expectation degree increases. Here, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the initial value determined based on the final value of the expectation of victory, that is, according to the change pattern and the number of times of change. For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-6(F) and (G), when the final value of the winning expectation is “90”, when the initial value is “50” (the number of changes is 4), the jackpot expectation is Is the highest, and when the initial value is "60" (3 changes), the big hit expectation is the second highest, and when the initial value is "70" (2 changes), the big hit expectation is 3. It is the second highest, and when the initial value is "80" (the number of changes is 1), the jackpot expectation is the lowest. In this way, when the final value of the winning expectation is “N (70≦N)”, the jackpot expectation is highest when the initial value is “50”, and when the initial value is “N-10”. Has the lowest expectation of a big hit. That is, the larger the range of change in the winning expectation from the initial value (the greater the number of changes), the higher the jackpot expectation.

  As described above, with regard to the anticipation degree notice effect and the corresponding count-up effect, since the big hit expectation degree differs depending on the initial value and the change pattern (the number of changes), the expectation degree notice effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when executed, and correspondingly the initial value and change pattern (number of changes) when the count-up effect is executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 It can be noticed.

  In step S35TM1090, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern involving pseudo continuous production. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is executed once or more during the variable display period of the decorative pattern to be executed. When the variation pattern does not involve the pseudo continuous effect (YES in step S35TM1090), the variation start time effect determination process ends. When the variation pattern involves the pseudo continuous effect (NO in step S35TM1090), it is determined whether or not to execute the countdown effect (step S35TM1100), and the variation start effect determination process is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 13-7(I), in this embodiment, the determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the countdown effect differs depending on the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is determined that the countdown effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and 45% is determined. Decide to run at a rate of. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), it is decided not to execute the countdown effect at a rate of 40%, It is decided to execute at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, there are times when the countdown effect is executed and times when the countdown effect is not executed. When the countdown effect is executed, the countdown effect is The jackpot rate is higher than when it is not executed. On the other hand, when the countdown effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-7 (H) and (I), in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, when the count-up effect corresponding to the expectation notice effect is executed, the count-down effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect is executed. The expectation of a big hit is higher than that when it is done. As a result, the player pays attention to which effect, the count-up effect or the count-down effect, is performed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the interest of the effect of updating the numerical value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Can be made

  Regarding the big hit expectation degree, the big hit expectation degree is the highest when both the countdown effect and the count up effect are executed, and the countdown effect is not executed but the count up effect is secondly hit. The expectation is high and the countdown effect is executed, but the countup effect is not executed. The expectation for the big hit is the third highest. If neither the countdown effect nor the countup effect is executed, the expectation for the big hit is the lowest. Is becoming

(Specific examples of countdown effect and countup effect)
Next, specific examples of the countdown effect and the countup effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-8 to 13-11. FIG. 13-8 is a time chart when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed, and FIGS. 13-9 to 13-11 show the main liquid crystal when both the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image displayed on indicator 35TM200 and sub liquid crystal indicator 35TM300.

  In the example shown below, the pseudo continuous effect is determined to be the variation pattern of the super reach executed twice, the expectation notice effect is determined to be executed, and both the countdown effect and the count up effect are executed. It is assumed that the performance is decided to be executed.

  First, FIG. 13-9(1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing a variable display of the left, right and middle decorative patterns (variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-8). Shows. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. In, the entire character is displayed. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear direction in front view.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-9(2), the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. (At the timing of T2A shown in FIG. 13-8), depending on the timing 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo-relational pattern determined based on the variation pattern. Then, the first countdown effect is started by displaying the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in the white mode) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the effect position (T2A to T2B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the presentation position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, so that the visibility of the lower part of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing T2A in FIG. 13-8 (timing T3 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-9(3). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Then, the updated value (in this example, “2” in white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing T3 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T4 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-9(4). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Then, the updated value (in this example, “1” in white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing T4 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T5 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-9(5). 35TM200 design display area 5L decorative pattern (in this example, the numerical design "2") is temporarily stopped, the design display area 5R decorative pattern (in this example, the numerical design "4") is in a state of temporary stop Then, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the final value after updating (in this example, The white mode "0") is displayed.

  Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T6A to T6B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of “FEV” and the character portion of “ER!” are not separated but are integrally moved from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front view, so that the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Then, at a timing 1 second after the timing T5 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T6B in FIG. 13-8), as shown in FIG. 13-9(6), the symbol display area 5L of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed. In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the first re-variation display of the decorative symbol is executed and the first countdown effect is finished. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white mode) is erased to return to the state in which the value related to the countdown effect is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear direction in a front view.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, as shown in FIG. 13-10(7). (At the timing of T7A shown in FIG. 13-8), according to the timing 3 seconds before the temporary stop timing of the first pseudo continuous symbol determined based on the variation pattern. Then, the second countdown effect is started by displaying the initial value of the countdown effect (in this example, “3” in the white mode) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position are simultaneously moved to the effect position (T7A to T7B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the presentation position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, so that the visibility of the lower part of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing T7A in FIG. 13-8 (timing T8 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-10(8). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, a countdown operation is performed to reduce the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 when variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Then, the updated value (in this example, “2” in white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing T8 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T9 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the main liquid crystal display device to display, as shown in FIG. 13-10(9). In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the 35TM200, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the countdown operation for decreasing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed. Then, the updated value (in this example, “1” in white mode) is displayed.

  Next, at the timing 1 second after the timing T9 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T10 in FIG. 13-8), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the main liquid crystal display as shown in FIG. 13-10(10). 35TM200 design display area 5L decorative pattern (in this example, the numerical design "3") is temporarily stopped, design display area 5R decorative pattern (in this example, the numerical design "5") is temporarily stopped Then, the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C. In addition, a countdown operation for reducing the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 1 is performed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the final value after updating (in this example, The white mode "0") is displayed.

  Then, the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position are simultaneously moved to the origin position (T11A to T11B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of “FEV” and the character portion of “ER!” are not separated but are integrally moved from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position which overlaps the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front view, so that the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, at a timing 1 second after the timing of T10 in FIG. 13-8 (timing of T11B in FIG. 13-8), FIG. 13-10 (11) shows the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. In the area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the second variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the second countdown effect is finished. In this example, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (in this example, “0” in the white mode) is erased to return to the state in which the value related to the countdown effect is not displayed. At this time, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front and rear direction in a front view.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern “” is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters “REACH!!” are displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T12 in FIG. 13-8).

  Then, after the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect according to the variation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (13). Here, the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 along with the execution of the battle effect (timing of T13 in FIG. 13-8).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing immediately after the battle effect is started based on the variation pattern (timing of T14A in FIG. 13-8 ), as shown in FIG. And the count-up effect is executed. In other words, when the expectation notice production is started, the battle presentation is temporarily suspended to hide the teammate character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters of "winning expectation" and The numerical value bar 35TM610 is displayed and the determined initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the count-up effect is started.

  In this example, it is assumed that the initial value of the expectation notice production and the count-up production are determined to be 70, and the final value thereof is determined to be 90 (that is, the change pattern with the number of change times of 2 is determined). Based on this, initially, the ratio of the colored portion in the numerical bar 35TM610 is “70”% of the entire bar, and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 displays “70”. In addition, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “50” to “70”, the numerical value “70” is displayed in blue on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the count-up effect and, at the same time, moves the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the effect position (T14A to T14B). As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and attention is paid to the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as the count-up effect is executed, and the change pattern from the initial value to the final value. Can be made The timing for moving the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 from the origin position to the presentation position to improve the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is before the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Alternatively, it may be after the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing T14A in FIG. 13-8 (timing T15 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11(15). Count-up operation to update the ratio occupied by the colored part from "70"% to "80"% of the entire bar and to increase the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from "70" to "80". (1st change). In addition, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “80” to “100”, the numerical value “80” is displayed in red on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. ..

  Next, at a timing 5 seconds after the timing T15 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T16 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value bar 35TM610 in the numerical value bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11(16). Count-up operation to update the ratio occupied by the colored part from "80"% to "90"% of the entire bar and to increase the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by 10 from "80" to "90". (2nd change). In addition, in response to the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 being in the range of “80” to “100”, the numerical value of “90” is displayed in red on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. ..

  Next, at the timing 5 seconds after the timing T16 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T17 in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value bar 35TM610 as shown in FIG. 13-11(17). The display mode is not changed according to the percentage occupied by the colored portion reaching the final value (“90%” of the entire bar), and the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value (“90”). ") is reached, the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is blinked ("90" is blinked in a red mode). As a result, the player is informed that the display state of the expectation notice production and the count-up production has reached the final display state and no further update will be performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 reaches the final value (“90”), it is not immediately notified that the final value has been reached (FIG. 13). In (T16) of -8 and FIG. 13-11 (16), the blinking mode is not set immediately), and a certain period (for example, 5 seconds) is a mode (non-blinking mode) that suggests that it may change. The information is displayed, and then, the fact that the final value has been reached is notified (changed to a blinking mode at the timing of (T17) in FIG. 13-8 and FIG. 13-11 (17)). By doing so, the player cannot immediately know whether or not the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is the final value, that is, whether or not there is room for further change. The interest in the numerical value displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be maintained.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative elements of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position to the origin position (T18A to T18B shown in FIG. 13-8). That is, the character portion of “FEV” and the character portion of “ER!” are not separated but are integrally moved from the effect position to the origin position. As a result, the visibility of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position overlapping the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front view, so that the visibility in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered. ing.

  Next, at the timing 5 seconds after the timing T17 in FIG. 13-8 (timing T18B in FIG. 13-8), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. And, the count-up effect is ended, the battle effect is restarted, and the ally character 35TM605 and the enemy character 35TM606 are displayed again. With the end of the expectation notice production, the characters and numerical value bar 35TM610 of the "winning expectation" are hidden on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the numerical value indicating the winning expectation is also hidden on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Here, as described above, in T18A to T18B of FIG. 13-8, since the decorations of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the origin position, the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is displayed. The visibility is improved and the player can concentrate on the battle production.

  Thus, the countdown effect accompanied by the subtraction operation of the displayed numerical values shown in FIGS. 13-9(2) to (5) and FIGS. 13-10(7) to (10), and FIG. 13-11(14). Since the count-up effect accompanied by the addition operation of the displayed numerical values shown in (17) to (17) can be executed in the common sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the numerical value updating operation executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 can be performed. It is possible to diversify the accompanying effect and improve the interest of the effect performed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  In addition, a countdown effect and a countup effect are provided as effects accompanied by different types of update operations (subtraction, addition), but numerical values are shown by images simulating a 7-segment display for any type of effects. By performing such an effect on the common sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to provide consistency as an effect and to effectively use a common display area to create multiple types of effects. Can be run.

  Further, in this embodiment, in response to the pseudo continuous effect being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the countdown effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 from 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous effect is executed. Corresponding to the expectation notice effect being executed on the liquid crystal display 35TM200, the count-up effect is executed at the same time as the expectation notice effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In this way, a countdown effect is provided corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect as one effect that suggests the big hit expectation degree, and a count up effect corresponding to the expectation notice announcement effect as the other effect that suggests the big hit expectation degree. By providing, the correspondence between the performances is clarified.

  In the present embodiment, as the operations performed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown operation corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and a countup operation corresponding to the expectation notice announcement effect are provided. Since the former action causes the numerical value to decrease and the latter action causes the numerical value to increase, it is a completely contradictory operation. Therefore, the player has the effect corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and the expectation notice announcement effect. It is possible to clearly distinguish the corresponding production.

  In the countdown effect, 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped, "3" is displayed as the initial value, and the update format is such that 1 is subtracted every 1 second, while in the countup effect. Immediately after the start of the battle effect, any one of "50" to "90" is displayed as an initial value, and 10 is added every 5 seconds, which is an updating method. In this way, by varying the initial value and the change pattern of each effect executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the player can easily understand which effect is being executed. Furthermore, the subtraction cycle of the countdown effect (1 second in this example) and the addition cycle of the count up effect (5 seconds in this example) are made different, so that the player can perform which effect. You can easily understand what is happening.

  Note that the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countdown effect is performed and the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the countup effect is performed may be different. Well, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the countdown effect is executed may be different from the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 9 when the count up effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the numerical range "0 to 3" in the countdown effect and the numerical range "50 to 100" in the countup effect do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect being executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the numerical range in the countdown effect may partially overlap with the numerical range in the countup effect. For example, the countdown effect may be subtracted from the initial value “10”. Alternatively, the count-up effect may be added from the initial value “10”. According to this, when the initial value is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to focus on which effect is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the countdown effect, the numerical value is displayed in white regardless of the numerical value range. On the other hand, in the count-up effect, the numerical value is displayed in the blue mode (“50” to “70”) or the red mode (“80” to “100”) according to the numerical range, and the final value is set to the blinking mode. .. In this way, the difference between the countdown effect and the countup effect can be clarified by making the display mode of the numerical value during execution of the countdown effect different from the display mode of the numerical value during execution of the countup effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, within one variable display period, the countdown effect is executed in the periods T2A to T6B and T7A to T11B in FIG. 13-8, and the period T14A to T18B in FIG. 13-8. Now, we are performing a count-up production. In this way, the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed at different timings so that the countdown effect execution period and the countup effect execution period do not overlap (when one effect is being executed, the other By not performing the effect), complication of the effect can be prevented, and both the countdown effect and the count-up effect can be executed in the common area (the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in this example).

  In addition, in this embodiment, in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 different from the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in which the count-up effect is executed, the numerical value bar 35TM610 is displayed in a mode that matches the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect. Will be. That is, the numerical value displayed in the count-up effect and the proportion occupied by the colored portion in the numerical value bar 35TM610 match. In this way, the display effect is further enhanced by displaying the winning expectation degree, which is the common effect information, in different modes by using different display devices such as the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 and the main liquid crystal display device 35TM200. it can.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which the countdown effect and the countup effect are executed as the effect related to the display result of the variable display being executed has been described, but the invention is not limited to such an embodiment and is executed. A countdown effect or a countup effect may be executed as the prefetching notice effect associated with the display result of the variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, the number of remaining variable displays until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed is performed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 every time the variable display is executed. You may make it perform the production which counts down. In addition, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300 shows the expectation degree of the target fluctuation until the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the starting winning is executed. You may make it perform the production which counts up to. As in these examples, the countdown effect and the countup effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when the pseudo-relational production is executed, the pseudo-relational pattern, which is a decorative pattern that suggests that the decorative symbol is changed again, is temporarily stopped. Not limited to such a form, when the pseudo-relational effect is executed, a predetermined pattern including a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern including a number) that can appear or can be definitely stopped even when the pseudo-reciprocal effect is not executed The combination of the decorative patterns (for example, the combination of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern being “2”, “4”, “6”) may be temporarily stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the decorative design is temporarily stopped, first, the left design and the right design are provisionally stopped, and finally the middle design is temporarily stopped. However, in such a form Not limited, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may be temporarily stopped at the same time.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example in which the initial value of the countdown effect is always "3" (the countdown effect is started from 3 seconds before the pseudo continuous symbol 35TM600 is temporarily stopped) has been described. Not limited to the form, a plurality of initial values may be selectable at different ratios according to the variation pattern or the display result. For example, when the number of times the pseudo-repeating is executed is one, in the first countdown effect, the ratio of "3" being the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" being the initial value is 20%. If the number of times the pseudo-repeating is performed is two, the proportion of the initial value of “3” is 20% and the proportion of the initial value of “5” is 80% in the first countdown effect. May be. Also, when the display result is out of proportion, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the countdown effect, but when the display result is a big hit. In the countdown effect, the ratio of “3” being the initial value may be 20% and the ratio of “5” being the initial value may be 80%.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, when the change pattern of the super reach accompanied by the pseudo continuous effect is determined twice and the countdown effect is determined to be executed, the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice. Although an example in which the countdown effect corresponding to each is executed (the countdown effect is executed the same number of times as the pseudo continuous effect) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a super reach involving two pseudo continuous effects is performed. When the variation pattern is determined, there may be an effect pattern in which the countdown effect is executed for one pseudo linked effect while the countdown effect is not executed for another simulated linked effect. You can

(5) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the pseudo continuous effect is always executed when the countdown effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous effect is executed even when the countdown effect is executed. The production may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the expectation notice production is always executed when the count-up production is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the count-up production is executed. The expectation notice production may not be executed in some cases.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the countup effect by the image simulating the 7-segment display on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 has been described. Not limited to such a form, an actual 7-segment display is provided in place of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and light emission control of the 7-segment display is performed, whereby the numerical value of the countdown effect and the numerical value of the count-up effect are obtained. May be displayed (emits light).

(7) In the sub-liquid crystal display 35TM300, the effect control CPU 120 allows the number of remaining fluctuations (time saving times) that can be controlled to a time saving state and the number of remaining fluctuations (ST (special time) times) that can be controlled to a probability changing state. It is possible to display the number of rounds in the big hit game state. During the period in which the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a countdown effect or count up is performed compared to the period during which the information (numerical values) related to these gaming states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 It is also possible to reduce the ratio at which the effect is executed. According to such a configuration, in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to restrict the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) related to the game state, so that the player can enjoy more. The important latter can be notified with priority.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the countdown effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in correspondence with the pseudo consecutive notice effect as the first suggestion effect executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is executed. The example in which the count-up effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 corresponding to the expected degree notice effect as the second suggestion effect to be executed is shown. Not limited to such a form, a countdown effect is executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect, and a countdown effect is executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect (for example, the remaining time until the expectation notice effect is counted down. You can do so. Conversely, the count-up effect may be executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect, and the count-up effect may be executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect. In this way, the numerical value updating operation corresponding to the first suggestive effect and the numerical value updating operation corresponding to the second suggestive effect may be the same operation.

  Further, there are a case where the countdown effect is executed corresponding to the first suggestive effect, and a case where the countup effect is executed, and a case where the countup effect is executed corresponding to the second suggestive effect, and a countdown. There may be a case where the effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to execute effects involving different types of actions corresponding to the common suggestive effect.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, both the countdown effect and the countup effect are display devices different from the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in which the pseudo-relational effect and the anticipation notice effect are executed as the suggested effect. Although the example executed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and one or both of the countdown effect and the count-up effect execute the pseudo-relation effect and the expectation notice effect that are suggestive effects. The main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be executed.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, in the countdown effect, an example is shown in which the remaining time until the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is updated by subtraction, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is subtracted and updated. Alternatively, for example, the remaining time until the movable accessory such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operates may be subtracted and updated. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the numerical value related to the jackpot expectation degree is added and updated in the count-up effect has been shown, but the numerical values related to other indicators may be added and updated. You may make it add and update the elapsed time after moving a movable accessory, such as the 1st logo panel 35TM410 and the 2nd logo panel 35TM420, to a production position.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to execute the countdown effect of subtracting the numerical value and the countup effect of adding the numerical value, and the countdown effect and the countup effect can be executed in the sub liquid crystal display which is a common area. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated as such a gaming machine, the gaming machine having such a configuration is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and may be a slot machine.

  The slot machine includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, three reels of a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) on the outer periphery of which a plurality of kinds of symbols as identification information are drawn. The player sets the bet number (1 to 3 medals) and operates the start lever to start the rotation of each reel, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. Thus, the rotation is stopped within the range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

  The types of winning combinations include small winning combinations, special winning combinations, and re-playing combinations. Here, in the winning of the small winning combination, the player can obtain a profit that the predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of the small winning combination. In the winning of the special role, the player can obtain a benefit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB). In the winning of the re-gaming combination, it is possible to obtain the benefit that the next game can be played without consuming a new medal for setting the bet number.

  In such a slot machine, after the bonus ends, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the amount of decrease in the gaming value by increasing the winning probability of the re-playing role as compared to the normal time, as a state advantageous to the player. There is one that controls to a possible replay time (referred to as RT) and ends RT when an end condition including winning a predetermined falling winning combination is satisfied. In addition, there is one in which the effect state can be controlled during an assist time (referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect (for example, guiding the pushing order) that notifies the internal lottery result can be executed. A state in which the game state is RT and the effect state is controlled by AT is also referred to as assist replay time (ART). By the main control unit sets a flag corresponding to each gaming state, a winning combination, etc., and executes processing (including transmission of a production control command to the sub control unit) corresponding to the set flag The game is controlled.

  The lottery for the roles, the lottery for the AT, the lottery for the RT, the lottery for the ART, and the additional lottery for the number of times AT, RT, and ART are stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), for example. The game is performed based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag, and the winning flag of the winning combination is stored. Whether or not the winning combination is actually realized is determined by the winning flag and the operation timing of the stop button stored in the RAM.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above-described embodiment includes a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as a first display device, a sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 as a second display device, and a movable body 32. As described above, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420, which are light-transmitting ornaments, are provided, but the slot machine similarly has the main liquid crystal display as the first display device and the second logo panel 35TM420. A sub liquid crystal display as a display device may be provided, and a movable body may be provided with a first logo panel and a second logo panel which are decorative bodies having a light transmitting property.

  In such a slot machine, the sub controller can control the remaining number of times (AT number) that can be controlled to the AT state, the number of remaining times (RT number) that can be controlled to the RT state, and the ART state in the sub liquid crystal display. It is possible to display the remaining number (ART number) and the like. During the period when the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display, the countdown effect or the count up effect is better than when the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. The rate of execution may be low. According to such a configuration, it is more important for the player to limit the simultaneous display of the numerical value of the countdown effect or the numerical value of the countup effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state on the sub liquid crystal display. It is possible to give priority to the latter.

(Example of related production related to the execution status of suggestive production)
Next, an example of executing the related effect related to the execution state of the suggestive effect that suggests that the big hit game state is controlled will be described. In the example shown below, a music reach effect and a cut-in notice effect can be executed as suggestive effects. Further, it is possible to execute a count display effect as a related effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect. Further, a timer effect can be executed as an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. Hereinafter, each of these effects will be specifically described.

(Directed by Music Reach)
The music reach effect is an effect that can be executed when the change pattern of the super reach is selected as the change pattern, and is a suggestive effect that can be executed as one type of the super reach effect after the reach state is established. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-15(3) to (6) and FIGS. 13-19(3) to 13-20(12) described later, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, it is an effect of displaying an image in a mode according to the reproduction time of the music on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200.

  In the present embodiment, on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, images of characters (A to C) corresponding to the reproduction time of the music and images of notes (35TM700 to 35TM720) corresponding to the reproduction time of the music are displayed. In the first stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 1 second to 15 seconds), one character (character A) and one kind of note (note 35TM700) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, In the second stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 16 seconds to 30 seconds), the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays two characters (character A, character B) and two types of notes (note 35TM700, notes 35TM700). 35TM710), and in the third stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 31 seconds to 60 seconds), three characters (character A, character B, character C) and a main liquid crystal display 35TM200 are displayed. Three types of notes (note 35TM700, note 35TM710, note 35TM720) are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 13-13 described later, the music reach effect ends in the first stage, in the second stage, and in the third stage (when the music is output to the end). ) And, depending on the display result and the variation pattern, it is determined in advance to which stage to proceed. When the music reach production reaches the second stage, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it ends in the first stage, and when it reaches the third stage, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it ends in the second stage. Is high. As a relationship between the final stage number of the music reach production and the jackpot expectation degree, the relation of 1st stage<2nd stage<3rd stage is established.

  The timing at which the reproduction of the music related to the music reach effect is started is the timing before the fixed stop timing of the decorative pattern by the music reproduction time. Therefore, when the music reach effect ends in the first stage, the reproduction of the musical composition is started 15 seconds before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped at the timing when the musical composition is reproduced for 15 seconds. Will be done. Also, when the music reach effect ends in the second stage, the music composition starts to be played 30 seconds before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped at the timing when the musical composition is reproduced for 30 seconds. Will be done. Also, when the music reach effect ends in the third stage (when the music is played to the end), the reproduction of the music is started 60 seconds before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the music is reproduced for 60 seconds. The decorative pattern is fixedly stopped at the timing of reproduction (timing at which the music is reproduced to the end).

  With such an effect structure, when the reproduction of the music related to the music reach effect is started, the player expects that the music is reproduced as long as possible before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped.

(Count display effect)
The count display effect is an effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect, and is shown in FIGS. 13-15(3) to (6) and FIGS. 13-19(4) to 13-20(12) described later. As shown, the reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Specifically, it is an effect of displaying the elapsed time (seconds) from the start of reproduction of the music on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and displays the reproduction seconds (1 to 60) by an image simulating a 7-segment display. I am trying.

  In the count display effect, the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is "1", and the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every 1 second. In this way, in the count display effect, the operation of adding and updating the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 by one every second is performed. As a result, the player is notified of the reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect. Therefore, the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the first stage is "15", and the final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect ends in the second stage is "30", The final value of the count display effect when the music reach effect reaches the third stage is "60".

  With such an effect structure, the player can clearly understand the reproduction period after the music is started. By understanding that the longer the reproduction period of the music is, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Therefore, it is expected that the numerical value (music reproduction time) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is increased as much as possible. ..

  The display mode of the numerical value (reproduction time) may be different according to the range of the numerical value (reproduction time) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. For example, in the range of 1 to 15, the numerical value in blue is displayed. It is also possible to display the numerical values in red in the range of 16 to 30, and blink the numerical values displayed in red in the range of 31 to 60.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled. As shown in FIG. 13-20 (10) which will be described later, when another effect such as a super reach effect (music reach effect) is being executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, it is more effective than the other effect being executed. This is a notice effect executed in a display mode with high priority. As the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, there are a plurality of effect modes (“CHANCE” and “intense heat”) in which the displayed characters are different, and the ratio of selecting each effect mode varies depending on the display result (Fig. 13-13(F)).

  From the player's point of view, when an image related to another suggestive effect or the like is displayed, the player suddenly has a display mode (display layer is higher than the image related to the other suggestive effect, etc. The cut-in image appears to be displayed on the front side of the image related to the suggestive effect, etc.), so that it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Further, it also becomes of interest in which of the plurality of effect modes the cut-in notice effect is executed.

(Timer production)
The timer effect is an effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and is an effect for displaying the remaining time (seconds) until the cut-in notice effect is executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. As shown in FIGS. 13-19(6) to 13-20(9), which will be described later, a cut-in advance notice effect is executed as the timer effect (a “CHANCE” or “hot heat” cut-in image is displayed. 3 seconds ago, first, "3" is displayed as an initial value in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. The numerical value displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is decremented and updated by 1 every 1 second, and the cut-in image is displayed at the timing of "0".

  In this way, the timer effect is an effect executed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 different from the display area (sub liquid crystal display 35TM300) in which the count display effect is executed, and is different from the count display effect. As an operation, a subtraction operation of the remaining time until the start of the suggested effect (a countdown operation until the cut-in notice effect is executed) is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the timer effect is always executed.

(Variation start effect determination process)
As shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol normal process (step S110) of the special symbol process process (step S25), the CPU 103 displays the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the random number value for determining the display result. The “big hit” or “out” and the big hit type when the “big hit” is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (predetermined). Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by using the random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of the preliminary determination of the display result.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. In this example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is off, and the non-reach variation pattern is the non-reach variation pattern, and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is normal reach. There is provided a variation pattern of the outlier and a variation pattern of the outreach in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the superreach effect is executed and the display result is out.

  In the example of FIG. 13-13(A), the non-reach deviation variation pattern is determined at a rate of 90%, the normal reach variation pattern is determined at a rate of 8%, and the super reach variation is determined at a rate of 2%. It will be decided by the pattern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines the change pattern based on the big hit change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13B. In this example, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is a big hit. The variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern are the reach mode and the super reach effect is executed to display the result. The variation pattern of the super reach jackpot, which is a jackpot, is provided.

  In the example of FIG. 13-13(B), the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is determined at a rate of 95%.

  In this way, when the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the jackpot is more likely to occur than when the variation pattern of super reach is not selected. That is, the jackpot expectation in the variation pattern of this embodiment has a relationship of normal reach<super reach.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13(A) and 13(B), non-reach, normal reach, and super reach are provided as the variation patterns. As shown in (B), as a variation pattern of super reach, super reach without pseudo continuous production (no pseudo continuous production), super reach with one pseudo continuous production (one pseudo continuous production), and multiple times. It is also possible to provide a super-reach (pseudo-repeating twice) accompanied by the pseudo-repeating production.

  As described above, the CPU 103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern, and the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first The reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type when it becomes big hit), and variation time of special symbol and effect contents ( Reach and pseudo-relation, etc.) variation pattern command to specify, a set of commands, based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol It is possible to specify the variation time and the effect contents (reach, pseudo-relationship, etc.). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game controlling microcomputer 100, the special symbol (first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

  FIG. 13-12 is a flowchart showing a variation start time effect determination process. Unlike the processing shown in FIG. 13-5, this variation start effect determination processing determines whether or not to execute the music reach effect, the count display effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the timer effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. While setting a production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production) based on the command and the variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-12.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the music reach effect is executed and the final stage when the music reach effect is executed by using the final stage determination table of the music reach effect (FIGS. 13-13 (C) and (D)). (See step S35TM2010).

  FIG. 13-13(C) shows the execution ratio of the music reach effect when the display result is out of alignment, and the determination for determining whether or not to execute the music reach effect and the final stage for each of the out-of-range variation patterns. A value has been assigned. When the variation pattern is “out of reach”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to perform the music reach effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of normal reach”, it is determined that the music reach effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “out of super reach”, it is decided not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 40%, and to execute up to the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of the music reach production at a rate of 20%, and to execute up to the third stage of the music reach production at a rate of 10%.

  FIG. 13-13(D) shows the execution rate of the music reach effect when the display result is a big hit, and the determination for determining whether or not to execute the music reach effect and the final stage for each of the big hit variation patterns. A value has been assigned. When the variation pattern is “normal reach jackpot”, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to perform the music reach effect at a rate of 100%. When the variation pattern is “super reach jackpot”, it is decided not to execute the music reach effect at a rate of 20%, and to execute up to the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 10%. Then, it is decided to execute up to the second stage of music reach production at a rate of 30%, and to execute up to the third stage of music reach production at a rate of 40%.

  As described above, when the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (when the reproduction period of the music is up to 15 seconds), the final stage of the music reach production is the second stage (the reproduction period of the song). When the number is up to 30 seconds), the jackpot expectation is higher. Further, when the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage (when the reproduction period of the music is up to 30 seconds), the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage (when the reproduction period of the music is 60 seconds). It is a second, and when the music is played to the end), the jackpot expectation is higher. In other words, regarding the reliability of the music reach effect (big hit expectation), the relationship of 1st stage<2nd stage<3rd stage is established.

  Next, when it is determined to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM2020), effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to perform the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM2020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM2040).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the count display effect at a rate of 100% when the music reach effect is executed, and 100 when the music reach effect is not executed. The percentage display effect is not executed.

  Here, the numerical value update period in the count display effect matches the music reproduction period in the music reach effect. Therefore, when it is decided to end the music reach effect in the first step, the final value in the count display effect is decided to be “15”, and when it is decided to end the music reach effect in the second step. Determines "30" as the final value in the count display effect, and determines "60" as the final value in the count display effect when it is determined to end the music reach effect in the third stage. In this way, the final value of the count display effect is determined based on the final stage of the music reach effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-13(E)) (step S35TM2050).

  FIG. 13-13(E) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and the determination value for deciding whether to execute the cut-in notice effect is allocated corresponding to the presence/absence of the count display effect. There is. When the count display effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 45% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 55%. Further, when the count display effect is executed, it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed at a rate of 98% and the cut-in notice effect is executed at a rate of 2%.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notification effect (YES in step S35TM2060), the effect mode of the cut-in notification effect is changed to the effect mode determination table of the cut-in notification effect (FIG. 13). -13(F)) (step S35TM2070). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S35TM2060), the process ends as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 13-13(F), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is different according to the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect (characters in the cut-in image) is 80%. The ratio becomes 1st mode "CHANCE", and the ratio of 20% becomes 2nd mode "heat." On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the effect mode (characters of the cut-in image) of the cut-in notice effect is , 20% is the first aspect “CANCE”, and 80% is the second aspect “heat”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (step S35TM2080), and ends the process.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, it is decided to execute the timer effect at a rate of 100%. Therefore, the execution rate of the timer effect is shown in FIG. It matches the execution ratio of the cut-in notice production shown. As shown in FIG. 13-13(E), when the count display effect is executed, the ratio of the cut-in notice effect executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed. That is, when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the timer effect is executed is lower than when the count display effect is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where both the count display effect and the timer effect are executed, the execution period of the count display effect and the execution period of the timer effect overlap (the timer effect during the execution of the count display effect. Therefore, the operation of adding and updating the reproduction time of the music and the operation of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the cut-in image display are simultaneously performed in parallel. As a result, the production may be complicated and the player may be confused. In the present embodiment, when the count display effect is being executed, by lowering the execution ratio of the timer effect compared to when the count display effect is not being executed, both effects are achieved while diversifying the effect. The simultaneous execution is restricted to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Specific example of counting display production corresponding to music reach production)
Next, a specific example of the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-14 and 13-15. FIG. 13-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect is not executed, and FIG. 13-15 corresponds to the music reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, when a count display effect is performed and a timer effect is not performed.

  In the example shown below, the production control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach production to be the third stage based on the variation pattern of the super reach, and correspondingly sets the numerical value of the music reproduction time. It is determined that the count display effect to be updated up to 60 is executed, while the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect are not executed.

  First, FIG. 13-15(1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing a variable display of the left, right and right decorative patterns (variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-14). Showing. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. In, the entire character is displayed. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position which overlaps the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-15(2), the effect control CPU 120 displays “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern “” is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters “REACH!!” are displayed on the upper portion of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIGS. 13-14).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the music reach effect in response to the reach state being established. FIG. 13-15(3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (the music reach effect started at the timing of T3 in FIG. 13-14) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts the reproduction of the music at the start timing of the music reach effect, and displays the characters A, the notes 35TM700, and the characters “Music Reach START!!” on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as the first stage effect. Display it. With the start of the music reach effect, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  The effect control CPU 120 starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reproduction is started, and displays "1" as the initial value of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Then, while the music is being reproduced, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every 1 second. Here, at the timing when the music reach effect is started, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 (on the player side), so that the player is in charge of the sub liquid crystal display. It is difficult to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the display 35TM300.

  During the period in which the music reach effect is in the first stage (the period during which the music reproduction time is 1 to 15 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side). Since the state of being maintained continues, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, although the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 arranged behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is lowered, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. With the above, it is possible to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15(3), since it is possible to visually recognize that the numerical value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is “8”, the player can play the music reproduction time (see FIG. 13-14). It is possible to understand that the elapsed time from the timing T3 shown) is 8 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds (timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (4), the second stage of the music reach effect. Move to. In the second stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A and B, and the notes 35TM700 and 35TM710. That is, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the type of character and the type of note to be displayed are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  In addition, as the music reach effect reaches the second stage, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the effect position. (T4A-T4B shown in FIGS. 13-14). That is, the character portion of “FEV” and the character portion of “ER!” are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the presentation position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, since both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, the visibility of the lower portion of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  During the second stage of the music reach effect (the period during which the music reproduction time is 16 to 30 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is produced. Is more visible than in the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can more clearly grasp the music reproduction time. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15(4), "16" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the second stage (16 to 30 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds (timing T5 shown in FIG. 13-14), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-15(5), shows the third stage of the music reach effect. Move to. In the third stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 31 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A, B, and C, and the notes 35TM700, 35TM710. And the note 35TM720 are displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the type of character to be displayed and the type of note are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  During the period in which the music reach effect is in the third stage (the period during which the music reproduction time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is produced. Is more visible than in the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can more clearly grasp the music reproduction time. In the example shown in Fig. 13-15(5), "31" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-14), the music is reproduced until the end, and the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the completion of the reproduction of the music. In the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (6), the effect control CPU 120 has a combination of decorative symbols whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. Further, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the characters "big hit!!" on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (the final reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves the decorative bodies of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position to the origin position with the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect (FIG. 13- 18 T7A-T7B). Accordingly, the visibility of the final value (“60” in this example) of the count display effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the visibility of the final value is the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  As described above, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) of the music reach effect, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 have the sub liquid crystal. Since it is located at the origin position which overlaps with the display device 35TM300 in the front and back, when viewed from the front, the visibility of the count display effect (the period when the numerical value is 1 to 15) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300 is reduced. On the other hand, while the effect control CPU 120 is executing the second stage (16 seconds to 30 seconds) and the third stage (31 seconds to 60 seconds) of the music reach production, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM410. The logo panel 35TM420 is located at an effect position that does not overlap the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in front view, and the visibility of the count display effect (the period of the numerical value of 16 to 60) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. is doing.

  As described above, the visibility of the count display effect can be switched by improving or reducing the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 with the displacement of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420. There is. As a result, regarding the count display effect executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, it is possible to easily change only the visibility while performing a certain addition operation according to the music reproduction time.

  When the music reach effect shifts from the first stage to the second stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 move to the effect position to improve the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is improved, it is emphasized that the music reach production has shifted from the first stage to the second stage, that is, the period when the expectation of a big hit is high and the interest can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the music reach effect is in the first stage, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are in the effect position, and the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved. Then, the numerical value (1 to 15) of the counting display effect is clearly recognized by the player even though the jackpot expectation level is still low. As a result, the interest of the music reach effect and the count display effect is rather lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displayed during the period in which the first stage of the music reach production is executed regardless of whether the music reach production is finished in the first stage. By setting it at the origin position, the visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is reduced, and the decrease in interest is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is executed at a rate of 100%, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is finally executed in the music reach effect. The execution ratio of the count display effect may be changed according to the number. For example, when the music reach effect ends in the first stage, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 100%, and when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, 100%. The count display effect may be executed at the ratio of. Here, when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage or the third stage, the count display effect is started at the timing when the music reach shifts to the second stage (that is, addition from the initial value “16”). Perform update operation). With such a configuration, during the period in which the second stage or the third stage of the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is executed to reproduce the music displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. It becomes possible to visually recognize the time (16-), but during the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is not executed, so that the music reproduction time is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Since it is not done, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17 (G) described later, when the music reach effect is executed up to the second stage, the count display effect corresponding to this is started from the first stage (initial value “1”). There may be a case where it is performed and a case where it is started from the second stage (initial value “16”). Further, when the music reach effect is executed up to the third stage, the count display effect corresponding to this is started from the first stage (initial value “1”) and the second stage (initial value “16”). )) and the third stage (initial value “31”). With such a configuration, the timing at which the count display effect is started can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

  As described above, as the variation patterns of the super reach, the super reach without the pseudo continuous production, the super reach with one pseudo continuous production, and the super reach with two pseudo continuous productions are provided. You may do it. Then, it is preferable that the jackpot expectation degree in this case has a relationship of super reach (without pseudo-repeating)<super reach (1 pseudo-repeating)<super reach (2 pseudo-repeating). In the case of such an effect configuration, when the pseudo-relational effect is executed (when the super-reach of the pseudo-repetition once or the pseudo-repetition twice is selected), the pseudo-relational effect is not executed (pseudo-relational effect). It is preferable that the ratio of performing the music reach effect and the count display effect up to the second stage or the third stage is higher than that in the case where the super reach of none is selected).

  Further, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed a plurality of times (when the super reach of the pseudo continuous two times is selected), the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once (the super reach of the pseudo continuous one time is selected. The ratio in which the music reach effect and the count display effect are executed up to the second stage or the third stage may be higher than that in the case of being performed). With such an effect configuration, the player is interested in whether or not the pseudo-relational effect is executed and whether or not the pseudo-reciprocal effect is executed a plurality of times, and the interest is improved. be able to.

(Other example regarding effect determination process at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 13-16 is a flowchart showing another example of the effect determination process at the start of variation. In this variation start effect determination process, different from the process shown in FIG. 13-12, when performing the music reach effect, the timing to start the count display effect according to the final stage number of the determined music reach effect. It is possible to make different.

  Specifically, in the process shown in FIG. 13-12, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is always executed from the first stage of the music reach effect (the initial value of the count display effect is Although it is always "1", in the process shown in FIGS. 13-16, when the music reach effect is executed, the count display effect is started from the second stage (sub liquid crystal display). There is a case where the initial value displayed on the 35TM300 is "16"), and the count display effect is started from the third stage (when the initial value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is "31"). (See FIGS. 13-17(G)).

  Further, the execution ratios of the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect are set to be higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed (FIG. 13-17 (H See)). Therefore, there is a high rate that the countdown operation in the timer effect until the start of the cut-in notice effect and the operation of updating the music reproduction time in the count display effect are simultaneously executed in parallel.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the production control CPU 120 receives a set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation command for displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. And setting of a production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production) based on the variation pattern designating command, and variation of the decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern. The effect to be executed during the display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-16.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the music reach effect and the final stage based on the final stage determination table of the music reach effect (see FIGS. 13-13 (C) and (D)) (step S35TM3010). ).

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the music reach effect (YES in step S35TM3020), whether or not to execute the count display effect is determined by the execution start stage determination table of the count display effect (FIG. 13-17). (See (G)) (step S35TM2030). On the other hand, when it is determined not to perform the music reach effect (NO in step S35TM3020), it is determined not to execute the count display effect (step S35TM3040).

  FIG. 13-17 (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the execution start stage determination table of the count display effect, and the execution start stage of the count display effect for each of the final stages of the determined music reach effects. A determination value for determining is assigned. When the final stage of the music reach effect is the first step, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the count display effect from the first step of the music reach effect at a rate of 1% (sub liquid crystal display). It is determined to display "1" as an initial value on the 35TM300) and not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 99%.

  When the final stage of the music reach effect is the second stage, it is determined that the count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 3% (the initial value for the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Is determined to be displayed as "1"), and it is determined to execute the count display effect from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 25% ("16" is set as the initial value to the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). It is decided to display), and it is decided not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 72%.

  When the final stage of the music reach effect is the third step, it is determined that the count display effect is executed from the first step of the music reach effect at a rate of 5% (the initial value for the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. "1" is displayed, and the count display effect is determined to be executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 30% ("16" is set as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300). It is decided to display), and it is decided to execute the count display effect from the third stage of the music reach effect at a rate of 60% (it is determined to display "31" as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Then, it is decided not to execute the count display effect at a rate of 5%.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the count display effect is started from the first stage of the music reach effect, "1" is displayed as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then the music reach effect is displayed. The adding operation according to the music playing time is continued until the final value (“15” for the first stage, “30” for the second stage, “60” for the third stage) according to the final stage. Will be. When it is determined that the counting display effect is started from the second stage of the music reach effect, "16" is displayed as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then the final stage of the music reach effect is displayed. The adding operation according to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value (“30” in the second stage, “60” in the third stage). When it is determined that the counting display effect is started from the third stage of the music reach effect, “31” is displayed as the initial value on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and then the final stage of the music reach effect is displayed. The addition operation according to the music reproduction time is continued until the final value (“60” in the third stage).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), when the final stage of the music reach effect is the second step, the count display effect is not executed at a rate of 72%, and (i) at a rate of 3%. The count display effect is executed from the first stage of the music reach effect, and (ii) the count display effect is executed from the second step of the music reach effect at a rate of 25%. That is, the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 3% of (i), while the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 28% of (i)+(ii). When the final stage of the music reach production is the third stage, the count display production is not executed at a rate of 5%, and (iii) The count display production is executed from the first stage of the music reach production at a rate of 5%. Then, the count display effect is executed from the second stage of the music reach effect at a rate of (iV) 30%, and the count display effect is performed from the third step of the music reach effect at a rate of (V) 60%. That is, the percentage of the count display effect being executed in the first stage of the music reach effect is 5% of (iii), while the percentage of the count display effect being executed in the second stage of the music reach effect. Is 35% of (iii)+(iV), and the ratio of the count display effect being executed in the third stage of the music reach effect is 95% of (iii)+(iV)+(V).

  According to the ratio shown in FIG. 13-17(G), the ratio of executing the count display effect is the lowest when the music reach effect is in the first stage, and the count display is performed when the music reach effect is in the second stage. The ratio of executing the effect is next lower, and the ratio of executing the count display effect is the highest when the music reach effect is the third stage.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice effect execution ratio determination table (see FIG. 13-17(H)) (step S35TM3050).

  FIG. 13-17(H) is a table showing the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and a determination value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is allocated corresponding to the presence/absence of the count display effect. There is. When the count display effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 95% but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 5%. Further, when executing the count display effect, it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%, but to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 60%.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect (YES in step S35TM3060), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is changed to the cut-in notice effect effect determination table (FIG. 13). -13(F)) (step S35TM3070), the timer effect is determined to be executed (step S35TM3080), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the cut-in notice effect (NO in step S35TM3060), the process ends.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13-13C and 13D, the relationship between the final stage of the music reach effect and the jackpot expectation is “first stage”<“second stage”<“ Since the third stage” is reached, the player expects that the music reproduction time is as long as possible, that is, the number of the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is as large as possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), the rate at which the count display effect is executed is higher when the music reach effect is at the second stage than when the music reach effect is at the first stage. The ratio is higher, and the count display effect is executed at a higher rate when the music reach effect is at the third stage than when the music reach effect is at the second stage. Therefore, the player is also interested in the timing when the count display effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect, the timer effect is executed at a rate of 100%, so the execution rate of the timer effect matches the execution rate of the cut-in notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 13-17(H), the ratio of the cut-in notice effect executed is higher when the count display effect is executed than when the count display effect is not executed. . That is, when the count display effect is executed, the rate at which the timer effect is executed is higher than when the count display effect is not executed. In this way, by increasing the execution ratio of the timer effect while the count display effect is being executed, the count display effect and the timer effect can be related to each other and the interest can be improved.

(Modification of counting display effect and timer effect)
Next, modified examples of the count display effect and the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-18, 13-19, and 13-20. 13-18 is a time chart in the case of executing the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and FIGS. 13-19 and 13-20 are An example of the effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the count display effect corresponding to the music reach effect is executed and the timer effect corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is executed is shown. FIG.

  In the example described below, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stage of the music reach effect to be the third step based on the change pattern of the super reach, and the count display effect in the first step of the music reach effect. It is determined that the count display effect is executed in the second and third stages of the music reach effect, and the cut-in notice effect and the timer effect of the first aspect are executed during the execution of the third step of the music reach effect. Shall be decided to execute.

  First, FIG. 13-19(1) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is performing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs (variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 13-18). Showing. At this time, although nothing is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, a background image related to the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 may be displayed. For example, when a part of the character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, the other part of the character is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, so that the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 and the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 are displayed. In, the entire character is displayed. The first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located at the origin position which overlaps the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in the front view.

  At this time, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 disposed behind the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 is in a reduced state, but the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are transparent. By having the property, it is possible to visually recognize the screen of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. However, since the count display effect has not yet been executed at this point, the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is in a state where no numerical value is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 13-19(2), the effect control CPU 120 displays “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern “” is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters “REACH!!” are displayed on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 (timing T2 in FIG. 13-18).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the music reach effect in response to the reach state being established. FIG. 13-19(3) shows a state in which the first stage of the music reach effect (the music reach effect started at the timing of T3 in FIG. 13-18) is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 starts the reproduction of the music at the start timing of the music reach effect, and displays the characters A, the notes 35TM700, and the characters “Music Reach START!!” on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 as the first stage effect. Display it. With the start of the music reach effect, music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Since the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 during the period (T3 to T4A in FIG. 13-18) during which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed, the sub liquid crystal is executed during this period. The music reproduction time is not displayed on the display device 35TM300, and the update operation is not performed.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 16 seconds (timing of T4A shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (4), the second stage of the music reach effect. Move to. In the second stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 16 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A and B, and the notes 35TM700 and 35TM710. That is, with the transition from the first stage to the second stage, the type of character and the type of note to be displayed are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  The CPU 120 for effect control starts the count display effect at the timing when the music reach effect is in the second stage (the timing at which the portion of the music transitioning to 16 seconds is played), and the count display effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. "16" is displayed as the initial value of. Then, while the music is being reproduced, the value displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is incremented by 1 every 1 second. Here, as described later, at the timing when the second stage of the music reach effect is started, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are located in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 (on the player side). Therefore, the player is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize the music reproduction time displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  Further, as the music reach effect reaches the second stage, the effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves both the decorative bodies of the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 at the origin position to the effect position. (T4A-T4B shown in FIGS. 13-18). That is, the character portion of "FEV" and the character portion of "ER!" are not separated but are integrally moved from the origin position to the presentation position. As a result, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved, and the visibility of the count display effect is improved. On the other hand, both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a presentation position overlapping front and rear in a front view, so that the visibility of the lower part of the screen in the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is reduced. It is in a state.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (5), the third stage of the music reach effect. Move to. In the third stage, the reproduction of the music is continued (the part of the music after 31 seconds is reproduced), and the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 displays the characters A, B, and C, and the notes 35TM700, 35TM710. And the note 35TM720 are displayed. That is, with the transition from the second stage to the third stage, the type of character to be displayed and the type of note are increased while reproducing the continuation of the same music.

  During the period in which the music reach effect is in the third stage (the period during which the music reproduction time is 31 to 60 seconds), the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 do not exist in front of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the count display effect is produced. Is more visible than in the first stage. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the numerical value (music reproduction time) of the count display effect, and can more clearly grasp the music reproduction time. In the example shown in Fig. 13-19(5), "31" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 31 seconds. The numerical value of the count display effect is updated according to the progress of the third stage (31 to 60 seconds) of the music effect.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 42 seconds (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-19(6). Based on the remaining time (seconds) until 3 seconds, the timer effect is executed, and the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the initial value "3" is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. (Numerical image of) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "42" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 42 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 43 seconds (timing of T7 shown in FIG. 13-18 ), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (7 ). Based on the remaining time (seconds) to be 2 seconds, the timer effect is continued and updated to the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Image) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "43" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 43 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 44 seconds (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 13-18 ), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20(8). Based on the remaining time (seconds) to be 1 second, the timer effect is continued and updated to the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. Image) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, “44” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 44 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 45 seconds (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice production as shown in FIG. 13-20(9). Based on the remaining time (seconds) until 0 seconds, the timer effect is continued and the updated timer image 35TM620 is displayed in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. A numerical image of “0”) is displayed. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "45" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 45 seconds.

  The effect control CPU 120 matches the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (timing at which the numerical value of the timer image in the lower left area of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is updated from “1” to “0”). To display the cut-in image 35TM800 (the cut-in image “CHANCE” of the first mode in this example) having a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. .

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 46 seconds (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 ends the timer effect in response to the cut-in notice effect being executed, and The display of the timer image 35TM620 (in this example, the numerical image of "0" which is the final value) displayed in the lower left area of the liquid crystal display 35TM200 is ended. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is continuously executing the cut-in notice effect, and the cut-in image 35TM800 (in the display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 ( In this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE”) of the first mode is continuously displayed. As the numerical value of the count display effect, "46" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 when the music reproduction time reaches 46 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 47 seconds (timing T11 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 continues the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20(10). The cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image “CHANCE” of the first mode) having a higher display priority than the effect image of the music reach effect is displayed above the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. It is being displayed continuously. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "47" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 47 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 48 seconds (timing T12 shown in FIG. 13-18), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the cut-in notice effect as shown in FIG. 13-20 (11). , A display of the cut-in image 35TM800 (in this example, the cut-in image "CHANCE" of the first aspect) displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 in a display mode having a higher priority than the effect image of the music reach effect. To end. As a result, the character A, the character B, and the character C displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and the musical notes 35TM700, 35TM710, and 35TM720 can be visually recognized again. At this time, as the numerical value of the count display effect, "48" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 in response to the music reproduction time reaching 48 seconds.

  Next, at the timing when the music reproduction time reaches 60 seconds (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 13-18), the music is reproduced until the end, and the decorative symbol is definitely stopped as the reproduction of the music is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 13-20 (12), the effect control CPU 120 has a combination of decorative symbols whose display result is a big hit in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed. Further, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the characters "big hit!!" on the upper part of the main liquid crystal display 35TM200. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays "60" as the final value of the count display effect (the final reproduction time of the music in the music reach effect) on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The effect control CPU 120 simultaneously moves the decorative objects of both the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 in the effect position to the origin position with the end of the music reach effect and the count display effect (FIG. 13- 18 shows T14A-T14B). Accordingly, the visibility of the final value (“60” in this example) of the count display effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, and the visibility of the final value is the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel. It will be lowered by 35TM420. After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases the final value (“60” in this example) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

  The effect control CPU 120 displaces the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 to the origin position while executing the first stage of the music reach effect, and executes the second stage of the music reach effect. During the period, the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 are displaced to the presentation position. Further, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the execution ratio of the count display effect during the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed, while the period during the second step of the music reach effect is The execution rate of the count display effect is set higher than that during the period in which the first stage of the music reach effect is being executed.

  Therefore, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is improved during the period in which the second stage of the music reach effect is being executed, and the proportion of the effect information of the count display effect displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also improved. is doing. Therefore, it is emphasized that the music reach production has shifted to the second stage, and the interest can be improved. On the other hand, the visibility of the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is lowered during the period in which the first stage of the music reach production is being executed, regardless of whether the music reach production is completed in the first stage. The rate at which the performance information of the count display performance is displayed on the liquid crystal display 35TM300 is also reduced. Therefore, it is not emphasized that it is the first stage (1 second to 15 seconds) in which the expectation of a big hit is low even though the count display effect is being performed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which the count display effect and the timer effect are executed as effects related to the display result of the variable display being executed has been shown, but the invention is not limited to such an embodiment and is executed. A count display effect or a timer effect may be executed as the look-ahead notice effect related to the display result of the variable display. Specifically, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, a special background image different from the normal background image over the multiple variable displays until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed. It may be possible to execute a zone effect for displaying. Then, a count display effect may be executed in which the execution period of this zone effect (the number of times of change in a special background image) is added and updated in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. In addition, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, the timer effect of subtracting and updating the remaining time until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed is executed in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Is also good. As in these examples, the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed over a plurality of changes.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the initial number of seconds of the timer effect is always "3" (the timer effect is started 3 seconds before the cut-in image 35TM800 is displayed) has been described. Not limited to this form, a plurality of initial seconds may be selectable at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect or the display result. For example, when the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect is the first mode, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the timer effect. When the production mode of the cut-in notice production is the second mode, in the timer production, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 20% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 80%. May be. Also, when the display result is off, the ratio of "3" as the initial value is 80% and the ratio of "5" as the initial value is 20% in the timer effect, but when the display result is a big hit. In the timer effect, "3" may be set to an initial value of 20% and "5" may be set to an initial value of 80%.

(3) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the music reach effect is always executed when the count display effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the count display effect is executed. The music reach effect may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the timer effect is always executed when the cut-in notice effect is executed has been shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and even when the cut-in notice effect is executed. The timer effect may not be executed in some cases. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the cut-in notice effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in notice effect is executed even when the timer effect is executed. There may be a case where the notice production is not executed.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect control CPU 120 displays the numerical value of the count display effect as an image simulating a 7-segment display on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 has been described. Without being limited to this, an actual 7-segment display device is provided in place of the sub liquid crystal display device 35TM300, and the light emission control of the 7-segment display device is performed to display (emit) the numerical value of the count display effect. good.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the count display effect is executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 and the timer effect is executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 is shown. The effect may be executed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, while the timer effect may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. Further, both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the main liquid crystal display 35TM200, and both the count display effect and the timer effect may be executed by the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300.

(6) In the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the effect control CPU 120 allows the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled to the time saving state (the number of times of shortening) and the number of remaining fluctuations that can be controlled to the probability changing state (the number of STs (special time)). It is possible to display the number of rounds in the big hit game state. During the period in which the information (numerical value) related to these gaming states is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the count display effect is executed more than in the period in which the information (numerical values) related to these gaming states is not displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300. You may make it a low rate. According to such a configuration, in the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300, the numerical value of the count display effect and the information (numerical value) regarding the game state are restricted from being displayed at the same time, and the latter, which is more important to the player, is prioritized. Can be notified.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the remaining time until the cut-in notice effect is executed is subtracted and updated in the timer effect, but the remaining time until another effect is executed is subtracted and updated. Alternatively, for example, the remaining time until the movable accessory such as the first logo panel 35TM410 and the second logo panel 35TM420 operates may be subtracted and updated. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which, in the count display effect, the reproduction time of the music, which is a numerical value related to the execution state of the effect, is added and updated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first logo panel 35TM410 and You may make it add and update the elapsed time after movable movable objects, such as the 2nd logo panel 35TM420, moved to a production position.

(8) In the above embodiment, a timer effect that performs a countdown operation to gradually decrease the displayed numerical value is illustrated as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect, an update effect for performing an update operation for updating the display mode of the display body (the object displayed on the screen) may be executed. Specifically, the addition operation of gradually increasing the display area of the display body (or gradually increasing the number of display bodies) or the stepwise reduction of the display area of the display body (or of the display body) is performed. You may make it perform the update production|generation which performs the subtraction operation|movement which reduces the number in steps.

  As an example, an update effect may be executed in which an addition operation of gradually increasing the display area of the meter displayed on the main liquid crystal display 35TM200 or the sub liquid crystal display 35TM300 is performed, and the display area of the meter becomes maximum. When the mode is 100%, the display area of the meter is gradually increased from 0% (initial value) to 10%, 20%,... May be executed, and when the update is stopped without reaching 100% (for example, 80%), the suggestive effect may not be executed (the execution rate of the suggestive effect is low).

(9) Further, when a plurality of types of suggestive effects are provided, an update effect corresponding to each type of suggestive effects may be executed. For example, a first cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately after the reach state is established is provided as the first suggestive effect, and a second cut-in notice effect that can be executed immediately before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped as the second suggestive effect. In the case of providing the first cut-in advance notice effect, the first cut-in notice effect is executed and the second cut-in notice effect is executed. It is also possible to execute a second update effect that performs an operation of updating a numerical value indicating the possibility (expectation level) or a meter.

  In this case, the first update effect and the second update effect may be concurrently executable. For example, at the timing immediately after the reach state is established, the possibility (expectancy) indicated by the first update effect reaches 100% (while the possibility (expectancy) indicated by the second update effect is still 20% at this point). Then, in response to this, the first cut-in notice effect is executed, and the first update effect is ended (the displayed numerical value or meter is deleted) in response to the execution of the first cut-in notice effect, After that, the possibility (expected degree) indicated by the second update effect reaches 100% immediately before the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the second cut-in notice effect is executed corresponding to this, and the second cut effect is executed. The second update effect may be ended (the displayed numerical value or meter is deleted) in response to the execution of the in-notice effect.

(10) In the above embodiment, the numerical value (seconds) or the display color of the display body (meter) related to the count display effect related to the execution status of the suggestive effect, or the numerical value related to the update effect corresponding to the execution of the suggestive effect ( The number of seconds) or the display color of the display body (meter) may be determined at different rates depending on the display result. For example, when the display result is a big hit, the display color is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the display result is a big hit, and when the display result is a big hit, it is higher than when the display result is a big hit. The display color may be determined to be blue in proportion. Further, when the display result is a big hit, the display bodies to be displayed are determined to be plural at a higher rate than when the display result is out of alignment (the types of the counting display effect and the update effect to be executed are determined to be plural types. ), when the display result is out of proportion, the display object to be displayed is determined to be one at a higher rate than when the display result is a big hit (the number of types of counting display effect and update effect to be executed is one type). May be determined).

(11) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the reproduction time (reproduction seconds) of the music is displayed as an effect related to the execution status of the music reach effect. It is also possible to display the ratio of the reproduction period (the period from the start of the song to the present time) up to the present time with respect to the reproduction period (the period from the beginning to the end of the song). For example, when the reproduction period of the entire music piece is 60 seconds, the reproduction ratio is gradually updated to 10%, 20%, etc. every 6 seconds of the reproduction time of the music piece, The reproduction ratio may reach 100% at the timing when the music is reproduced to the end (at the time when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of reproduction of the music). The reproduction time (reproduction seconds) or the reproduction ratio of the music may be displayed on a display body other than the numerical value (for example, the above-mentioned meter).

(12) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-17(G), an example in which the count display effect is continued until the final stage of the determined music reach effect is finished has been described. However, the count display effect may be ended before the final stage of the determined music reach effect is ended. For example, when the final stage of the determined music reach effect is the second stage and the counting display effect is started from the first step (initial value 1), the counting display effect is ended only in the first step (final step). There is a case where it is ended with a value of 15). Further, when the final stage of the determined music reach effect is the third stage and the counting display effect is started from the first step (initial value 1), the counting display effect is ended only in the first step (final step). There may be a case where it is finished with a value of 15), or there is a case where the counting display effect is finished with a second stage (finished with a final value of 30). In addition, when the final stage of the predetermined music reach production is the third stage and the counting display production is started from the second stage (initial value 16), the counting display production is ended only in the second stage ( There may be a case where the final value is 30). Even in the case of such a form, the execution ratio of the count display effect is highest when the music reach effect is in the third stage, is second highest when it is in the second stage, and is high in the first stage. Try to be the lowest at certain times.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, as a gaming machine capable of executing the suggestive effect suggesting that it is controlled to the big hit game state, and performing the count display effect related to the execution state of the suggestive effect, and the timer effect. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, the gaming machine having such a performance configuration is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and may be a slot machine.

  Further, as described above, the slot machine also includes the main liquid crystal display as the first image display device and the sub liquid crystal display as the second image display device. The first logo panel and the second logo panel, which are the ornaments having the above, may be provided.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the music reach effect and the cut-in notice effect can be executed as the suggestive effect, but the slot machine may be able to execute the reel lock effect as the suggestive effect. The reel lock effect means that when the start lever is operated, the reel is not driven by the normal control (for example, the normal rotation method), but is driven by the special control (for example, the reverse rotation method and/or the vibration method). It is a production to make. For example, the reel lock effect is composed of three-stage effects from the first stage to the third stage. In the first stage of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a low speed, and in the second stage of the reel lock effect, After the first stage, the reel is vibrated at a medium speed, and in the third stage of the reel lock effect, the reel is vibrated at a high speed after the first stage and the second stage.

  In the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub control unit may execute the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display while the reel lock effect is being executed. Here, while the sub-control unit is executing the first stage of the reel lock effect, since the first logo panel and the second logo panel are at the origin position which overlaps with the sub liquid crystal display in front and back in a front view, The visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display is reduced. On the other hand, during the period in which the second and third stages of the reel lock effect are being executed, the first logo panel and the second logo panel are in the effect positions that do not overlap the front and rear of the sub liquid crystal display in front view. The visibility of the count display effect on the sub liquid crystal display is improved. According to such a configuration, when the reel lock effect is at the first stage, it is more difficult to recognize the count display effect than when the reel lock effect is at the second stage and the third stage. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the slot machine having such an effect configuration, the sub-control unit may change the rate at which the count display effect is executed on the sub-liquid crystal display, depending on the stage of the reel lock effect (for example, 13-17(G), which is the same as the relationship between the stage of the music reach effect and the execution start timing of the count display effect). Further, the execution ratio of the timer effect may be changed depending on whether or not the count display effect is executed (for example, whether or not to execute the count display effect shown in FIG. 13-17(H) and cut-in). Similar to the relation with the execution rate of the notice production). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by making the count display effect and the timer effect in the slot machine relevant to each other.

[Explanation regarding the feature part 01TM]
Next, a game machine including the characteristic unit 01TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-24. The game machine shown in FIG. 1 has the image display device 5 provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2, but the image display device 5 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 and the game is played. As a configuration in which a movable body for performance is provided at a position on the back side of the board 2 and on the front side of the image display device 5 (a position between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 in the front-rear direction). Is also good.

  A movable body 01TM050 shown in FIG. 14-5 has a turntable provided rotatably and a motor for turning the turntable, and is tilted sideways (see FIG. 14-5 (8 ) And (10)) and an upright position (position shown in FIG. 14-5 (9)) which stands upright. The movable body 01TM050 thus configured is located at the tilted position when the turntable is in the initial driving state. Then, by rotating the turntable clockwise in a front view by the motor, the turntable rotates about 90 degrees clockwise in a front view about the rotation axis and moves to the standing position. Further, by driving the motor in the reverse direction, the motor moves from the standing position to the tilted position. The effect in which these operations are executed is defined as a movable object operation effect.

  CPU103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designating command for designating the display result, the variation pattern designating command for designating the variation pattern, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation Command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

  CPU120 for production control, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved) for designating that the reserved storage number has been subtracted Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved storage number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating the display result (big hit or off, big hit type in case of big hit), and variation time of special symbol and effect contents ( Reach and pseudo-relationship, etc.) variation pattern designating command that designates a set of commands, based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100, variable display of special symbols is executed, and special symbols It is possible to specify the variation time and effect contents (reach, pseudo-relation, etc.). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is confirmed, based on the fact that the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game controlling microcomputer 100, the special symbol (first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the display result is derived.

  FIG. 14-1 is a flowchart showing the variation start time effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands associated with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the display result designation of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. While setting a production control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production) based on the command and the variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the variation start effect determination process shown in FIG. 14-1.

  In the variation start time effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode based on the cut-in notice effect determination table (see FIG. 14-2(F)). (Step S01TM1010). The cut-in notice effect shows a predetermined cut-in image with a higher priority than the decorative pattern in the variable display (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the decorative pattern and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that the player can see it in the foreground). This is a notice production to be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2(F), in the cut-in preview effect determination table, determination values for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in preview effect and the effect mode are assigned according to the display result. When the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed at a rate of 60%. It is decided to execute the cut-in notice production of the first mode (characters of "CANCE??") at a rate of %, and the cut-in notice of the second mode (characters of "CHANCE!!") at a rate of 10%. Decided to execute the performance. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute the cut-in notice production of the first mode (characters of “CHANCE??”) at a rate of 20%, and the ratio of the second mode (characters of “CHANCE!!”) at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the cut-in notice production.

  In this way, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, and the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (“CHANCE!!”) is performed. When is executed, the jackpot rate is higher than when the cut-in notice effect of the first mode (characters of “CHANCE??”) is executed. Therefore, the player becomes interested in whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed, and is also interested in the effect mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the execution ratio and the execution mode of the cut-in notice effect are determined based on the display result designated by the display result designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The execution ratio and execution mode of the cut-in notice effect may be determined based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. For example, the cut-in notice effect may be executed only when a variation pattern involving reach is specified, and the cut-in notice effect may be executed only when a variation pattern involving pseudo-link is specified.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of active display based on the final display mode determination table of active display (see FIG. 14-2(A)) (step S01TM1020). Here, the active display is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative design (special design) being executed as described above, and in this example, the quadrangle active display provided in the lower center of the effect screen. It can be displayed in the area. Further, the hold display is a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern) which is not executed, and the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory is the lower left portion of the effect screen (active as seen by the player. It can be displayed in the first hold display area provided on the left side of the display area, and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is provided on the lower right side of the effect screen (right side of the active display area seen from the player). It can be displayed in the second reserved display area. The final display mode of the active display is the final display mode of the active display during the variable display of the corresponding decorative symbol (special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5 to be described later, the active display and the hold display can be displayed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, and the variable pattern can be displayed. It can be displayed even when a corresponding super reach effect (for example, a battle effect described later) is being executed.

  FIG. 14-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 14-2(A), in this embodiment, it is possible to determine any one of the normal mode, the blue mode, and the red mode as the final display mode of the active display. A determination value is assigned to each aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2(A), when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), based on the variation pattern specifying command. The final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed is 90% in the normal mode (white circle display) and 8% in the blue mode (blue circle display). Thus, the red mode (red circle display) is obtained at a rate of 2%. When the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the variation pattern designation command. The final display mode of the corresponding active display is 5% in the normal mode (white circle display), 30% in the blue mode (blue circle display), and 65% in the red mode ( It will be a red circle).

  In this way, when the final display mode of the active display is the red mode, the jackpot rate is the highest, and when the final display mode of the active display is the blue mode, the jackpot rate is the second. When the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode, the jackpot rate is the lowest. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-2(A), with respect to the display mode of the active display, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases in the order of normal mode<blue mode<red mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern regarding the display mode of the active display based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIGS. 14B and 14C) (step S01TM1030).

  14B and 14C are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the change pattern of active display. As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (B) and (C), in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed from the display mode during active shift to the final display mode (the display mode determined in step S01TM1020). A plurality of change patterns are provided as the change patterns. Here, with the display mode at the time of active shift, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (or is started), the corresponding display (round object) corresponding to the variable display is the first reserved display. It is a display mode of active display (that is, an initial display mode of active display) when the area or the second hold display area is shifted to the active display area.

  As a change pattern of the active display, the active display during the active shift is the normal mode, and thereafter, the active display does not change and the final display mode remains the normal mode, and the active pattern during the active shift is the normal mode. Then, the change pattern 102 in which the active display changes and the final display mode becomes the blue mode, and the active display during the active shift is the blue mode, and the active display does not change thereafter and the final display mode remains the blue mode. The change pattern 103 is a normal mode, and the active display during the active shift is a normal mode, and the active display is changed after that, and the final display mode is a red mode, and the active display during the active shift is a blue mode. Then, the change pattern 105 in which the active display changes and the final display mode becomes the red mode, and the active display during the active shift is the red mode, and the active display does not change thereafter, and the final display mode remains the red mode. There is a change pattern 106.

  In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the hold display is a white circle-shaped object and does not change to another mode (for example, blue circle or red circle) at the stage of the hold display. Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started, the white round object displayed as the hold display in the hold display area is shifted to the active display area at the timing (1) When the display mode does not change from the white circle (change patterns 101, 102, 104), (2) when the display mode of the object changes to a blue circle (change patterns 103, 105), (3) There is a case where the display mode of the object changes to a red circle (change pattern 106).

  As shown in FIG. 14-2(B), when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is “out”), the change pattern of the active display is , (1) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode, the change pattern 101 becomes 100%, and (2) the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020. Is a blue mode, the change pattern 102 is 30%, the change pattern 103 is 70%, and (3) the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is a red mode. The change pattern 104 is 10%, the change pattern 105 is 20%, and the change pattern 106 is 70%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-2(C), when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the start prize ( The change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the new first hold storage) is (1) 100% when the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the normal mode. When the final display mode of the active display determined in (2) Step S01TM1020 is the blue mode, the change pattern 101 becomes the change pattern 102 at a rate of 70%, and the change pattern 103 becomes at a rate of 30%. 3) When the final display mode of the active display determined in step S01TM1020 is the red mode, the change pattern 104 is 80%, the change pattern 105 is 15%, and the change pattern is 5%. It becomes 106.

  As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (B) and (C), regarding the change pattern of the active display, when the final display mode is the blue mode, it is expected that the change pattern 103 <change pattern 102 will be a big hit in this order. When the degree is high and the final display mode is the red mode, the degree of expectation of a big hit increases in the order of change pattern 104 <change pattern 103 <change pattern 102. As described above, the change pattern in which the display mode changes from the active display during active shift has a higher jackpot rate than the change pattern in which the display mode does not change from the active display during active shift. Further, when the change width from the active shift is large (when the normal display mode is the active display and the final display mode is the red display mode), the change width from the active shift is small (the blue display mode is the active display). The jackpot rate is higher than that when the final display mode is the red mode).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect and the effect type when the change suggestion effect is executed, based on the change suggestion effect determination table (see FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E)). Then (step S01TM1040), the fluctuation start time effect determination process is ended. The change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes, and is an effect that accompanies the active display. The change suggestion effect includes a first change suggestion effect and a second change suggestion effect described below.

  In the first change suggestion effect, as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, which will be described later, the movable body 01TM050 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position while the active display 01TM001 is displayed in the center of the screen. To operate. As a result, the active display 01TM001 displayed in the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position overlap each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the first change suggestion effect is an effect in which the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001, and also an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is changed (the change effect is executed). There is. Further, when the movable body 01TM050 is in the standing position, the flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001 (around the area overlapping the movable body 01TM050 in the front-back direction in the screen). That is, the first change suggestion effect is an effect in which the flame effect acts on the active display 01TM001 and also an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (the change effect is executed). ..

  In the second change suggestion effect, as shown in (13) to (16) of FIG. 14-5 described later, a character appears from the right side of the screen, and the character performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 01TM001. After the image is displayed, the effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 01TM001 is displayed. That is, the second change suggestion effect is an effect in which the ball thrown by the character acts on the active display 01TM001, and an effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes (the change effect is executed). Has become.

  As described above, by enabling a plurality of types of effects as effects that act on the active display 01TM001, the interest in changing the display mode of the active display 01TM001 can be further improved.

  14D and 14E are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), in this embodiment, whether or not to execute the change suggestion effect and the change suggestion effect are determined according to the change pattern determined in step S01TM1030. It is possible to determine which of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is to be executed when executing, and a determination value is assigned to each decision item.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2(D), when the display result is “out” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), (1) in step S01TM1030 When the determined change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 101 (normal→normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and the first change suggestion at a rate of 95%. It is decided not to execute any of the effect and the second change suggestion effect. (2) When the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal→blue), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and 95 It is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a ratio of %. Further, (3) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (blue→blue), it is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, and 80 It is determined that neither the first change suggestion effect nor the second change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of %. Further, (4) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal→red), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 10%, and 90 It is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a ratio of %. (5) When the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue→red), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 15%, and 85 It is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a ratio of %. (6) If the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (red→red), 100% of either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect It is decided not to execute the performance.

  As shown in FIG. 14-2(E), when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is "big hit"), (1) in step S01TM1030 When the determined change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 101 (normal→normal), it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and the first change suggestion at a rate of 20%. It is decided not to execute any of the effect and the second change suggestion effect. Further, (2) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 102 (normal→blue), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 70%, and 30 It is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a ratio of %. Further, (3) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 103 (blue→blue), it is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 60%, and 40 It is determined that neither the first change suggestion effect nor the second change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of %. Further, (4) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 104 (normal→red), it is decided to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 90%. It is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a ratio of %. (5) When the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 105 (blue→red), it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, 20 It is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect at a ratio of %. Further, (6) when the change pattern of the active display determined in step S01TM1030 is the change pattern 106 (red→red), 100% of either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is produced. It is decided not to execute the performance.

  As described above, the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the change pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change. Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), regarding the change patterns (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes, when the display result is “out”, , The ratio of selecting the second change suggesting effect is higher than that of the first change suggesting effect, and when the display result is “big hit”, the ratio of selecting the first change suggesting effect over the second change suggesting effect Is high. Therefore, when the first change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. In this way, since the ratio of the jackpot is different between the case where the first change suggestion effect is executed and the case where the second change suggestion effect is executed, it is interesting to know which effect is executed. Can be made.

  Further, regarding the change patterns (102, 104, and 105) in which the display mode of the active display changes from the time of active shift, it is possible to decide to execute the first change suggestion effect, and execute the second change suggestion effect. In contrast to the change patterns (101, 103, and 106) in which the display mode of the active display does not change from the time of active shift, it is not determined to execute the first change suggestion effect, It is possible to decide to execute the second change suggestion effect. That is, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display always changes, but when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change. In this way, which effect is executed because the ratio of change in the display mode of the active display is different between the case where the first change suggestion effect is executed and the case where the second change suggestion effect is executed. Can make you interested.

(Specific examples of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-3, 14-4, and 14-5. FIG. 14-3 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed, and FIGS. 14-4 and 14-5 show the first change suggestion effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the second change suggestion effect is executed.

  In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on that the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit” and the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is “super reach big hit”. In addition to performing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle each other is executed as the super reach effect. Then, by finally executing a winning effect in which the teammate character wins, the occurrence of the big hit is notified.

  In addition, in step S01TM1010, effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (“CHANGE!”), and in step S01TM1020, sets the final display mode of the active display to the red mode. It is assumed that the active display change pattern is changed to the change pattern 104 (normal→red) in step S01TM1030. Below, an example of the case where it is determined to execute the first change suggesting effect in step S01TM1040 is shown in FIGS. 14-5 (8) to (12), and the second change suggesting effect is executed in step S01TM1040. An example of the determined case is shown in (13) to (17) of FIG. 14-5.

  First, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-4(1), in the state in which the first number of reserved memories is 2, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5R, the variable display of the decorative pattern (the variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5, the variable display of the small symbols (the variable display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 14-3) Is running. Further, the active display area 01TM003 displays a normal mode active display 01TM001 (white circle display), and the hold display area 01TM004 displays two normal display hold displays 01TM002 (white circle display). Has been done.

  In this embodiment, a small pattern, which is displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and is smaller than the decorative pattern, shows whether or not the decorative pattern is variably displayed and the display result of the decorative pattern is a small pattern. To call. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the stop display of the decorative symbols. The areas where the small symbols are variably displayed and stopped are the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r from the left.

  Thus, as the variable display of the effect design executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, there is a variable display of the decorative symbol and a variable display of the small symbol. Based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control receives the variation pattern designating command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the small symbol are displayed. Starting at the same timing, and when the variable display of the special symbol ends (when the special symbol stops fixed), the decoration determination command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, and the decoration is displayed. The variable display of the symbol and the variable display of the small symbol are ended at the same timing (decorative stop of the decorative symbol and the small symbol is fixed at the same timing).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-4(2). In this state (at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 14-3), the operation prompting display 01TM031 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. The operation promotion display 01TM031 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B, and is a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B. Has become. The first operation promotion display displayed here is a normal mode operation promotion display corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4(3), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the push button 31B being operated while the operation promotion display 01TM031 is displayed (T3 shown in FIG. 14-3. (At the timing), the cut-in notice effect of the second mode is executed to display the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE!!”) on the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (4), the timing (FIG. 14- At timing T4 shown in FIG. 3, the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE!!”) is erased, and the cut-in notice effect of the second mode is ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4(5), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing T5 in FIG. 14-3). At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is continued. That is, the small symbol is stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable is continuously displayed without being displayed.

  After the reach state is established, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect according to the variation pattern of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 14-4(6). Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (timing T6 in FIG. 14-3).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-4(7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 01TM031A during the battle effect execution (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 14-3). The second operation prompting display displayed here is a special mode operation prompting display corresponding to the change suggestion effect, and includes an image simulating the push button 31B wrapped in flame and an image simulating the push button 31B. A downward arrow displayed above is included, and the display urges the user to press the push button 31B. The special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the decorative pattern and the battle effect (a mode in which the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front of other effect images). Is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines in step S01TM1040 described above in response to the push button 31B being operated while the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14C). Either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed. When it is determined to execute the first change suggestion effect, the process proceeds to FIG. 14-5 (8), and when it is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect, FIG. 14-5. Proceed to (13).

(Example of executing the first change suggestion effect)
When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-5(8), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated (shown in FIG. 14-3). At the timing of T8), the first change suggestion effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed when the first change suggestion effect is started. The blackout effect is an effect in which the darkness image 01TM150 is displayed as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5 to reduce the visibility of a predetermined image and make it difficult to see. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed, so that the decorative pattern and the reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) are in a visually difficult state.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 14-5(8), by the blackout effect being executed, the decorative design that is one of the effect designs is in a visually difficult state, but the small design that is the other effect design is It remains visible. That is, the visibility of the decorative design of "7" stopped and displayed in the design display area 5L and the design display area 5R, and the decorative design variably displayed in the design display area 5C is decreased, while the small design is displayed. The visibility of the small symbols that are variably displayed in the area 51, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r is not deteriorated.

  As shown in FIG. 14-4, in a state where the blackout effect is not executed, the decorative symbol is displayed larger than the small symbol and is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the center of the screen, It is possible to make the visibility of the decorative design higher than that of the small design, but in the difficult-to-recognize state where the blackout effect is being executed, the visibility of the small design is higher than the visibility of the decorative design. Become. With this, it is possible to make the player appropriately understand that the variable display of the decorative pattern (special symbol) is continued while enhancing the effect of the effect of changing the visibility of the image related to the decorative pattern and the battle effect. Is.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the darkened image 01TM150 covering the entire area of the display screen is displayed to reduce the visibility of the predetermined image. However, by displaying the darkened image 01TM150, the darkened image 01TM150 is displayed more than the darkened image 01TM150. A predetermined low priority image (image whose display layer is lower than the dark image 01TM150 and which is visible from the player) is completely invisible (that is, the layer transmittance of the dark image 01TM150 is 0%). The predetermined image having a display priority lower than that of the darkened image 01TM150 is difficult to visually recognize but becomes slightly visible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 01TM150 is not 0%). You may do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the covering image (dark image 01TM150) that covers the entire area of the display screen is displayed has been described, but the covering image that covers only a partial area (for example, only the central portion) of the display screen is displayed. Therefore, the visibility of only a partial area of the display screen may be reduced. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the dark image 01TM150 is displayed to make the predetermined image difficult to view is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire screen is made to emit white light (only a white image is displayed). By doing so, the predetermined image may be made difficult to see, or the predetermined image may be made difficult to see by changing the aspect ratio of the predetermined image irregularly. In addition, characters and the like are displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern (an image whose display priority is lower than that of the decorative pattern and whose display layer is lower than that of the decorative pattern and which is visible to the player behind the decorative pattern). In this case, the visibility of the character or the like as the background image is reduced by displaying the cover image (dark image 01TM150 or the like).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-5(8) and the like, the hold display and the active display can be visually recognized even in a visually difficult state, and a rectangular image showing the active display area 01TM003. Although the so-called interface image is also visible, the display is not limited to such a form, and in a difficult-to-view state, a corresponding display that changes the display mode (a corresponding display that is a target of change effect, and is active in this example). The visibility may be reduced for the corresponding displays (in this example, the hold display 01TM002) other than the display 01TM001). You may allow it.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5(8), the effect control CPU 120 continues the difficult-to-view state and displays the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white circle display) displayed in the active display area 01TM003. Is moved to the center of the screen above the active display area 01TM003, and the active display 01TM001 (white circular display) of the normal mode is enlarged and displayed. This improves the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the first change suggestion effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5(9), the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body motion effect in which the movable body 01TM050 is moved from the tilted position to the standing position while maintaining the visually difficult state (FIG. 14). (T9A to T9B shown in -3), an effect effect of superimposing and displaying the flame effect image 01TM160 around the enlarged active display 01TM001 on the darkened image 01TM150 is executed. The flame effect image 01TM160 is an image having a display priority higher than that of the darkened image 01TM150 (the display layer is at a higher level), and therefore, the player looks as if it is displayed in front of the darkened image 01TM150.

  Here, since the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and the movable body 01TM050 at the standing position overlap in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is temporarily reduced. (Timing of T9B shown in FIG. 14-3). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the active display 01TM001 to the normal mode (white circle) within the period in which the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is reduced (the period of T9B to T10A shown in FIG. 14-3 ). A change effect of changing from a shape display) to a red mode (red circle display) is executed.

  Since the flame effect image 01TM160 is displayed around the active display 01TM001, the flame effect image 01TM160 can be visually recognized even when the movable body 01TM050 is in the standing position, as shown in FIG. 14-5(9). is there. As a result, the visual effect as if the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position is covered with flames is produced. In this way, the effect effect can be enhanced by displaying the flame effect image 01TM160 at the position corresponding to the movable body 01TM050 at the standing position.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) as shown in FIG. 14-5(10). In response to this, an operation of returning the movable body 01TM050 at the standing position to the tilted position is executed (T10A to T10B shown in FIG. 14C). As a result, the movable body motion effect ends, and the visibility of the active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen is improved again. The display mode of the active display 01TM001 at this time is changed to a red mode (red circle display) different from the display mode before the execution of the movable body motion effect (normal mode (white circle display)).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red mode active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen to the original size, and moves it to the lower active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is reduced to the visibility before the first change suggestion effect and the blackout effect are executed. As a result, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 that has changed from the normal mode to the red mode. Then, the display of the dark image 01TM150 is ended to release the difficult-to-view state, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the image relating to the decorative design and the battle effect) is restored (timing T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the first change suggestion effect is ended, and the change effect executed corresponding to the first change suggestion effect and the blackout effect executed corresponding to the first change suggestion effect are ended. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 14-5(11), since the visibility is restored, it becomes easier to visually recognize the predetermined image (the image regarding the decorative pattern and the battle effect), and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, during the period in which the blackout effect is executed (the period of T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3, the period of (8) to (10) shown in FIG. 14-4), the CPU 120 for effect control changes. The display control of the battle effect corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed, and during this period, the display control for the middle part of the battle effect (the part shown in (13) to (15) of FIG. 14-5 described later) is performed. It is running continuously.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends, the battle effect can be visually recognized from the portion corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing. In this example, from the end part of the battle effect shown in FIG. The battle production is visible. Even after the blackout effect is finished, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (12) (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3 ), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern whose display result is a big hit. The combination (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are also stopped in combination with the numbers ("777" in this example) that form the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. Display it. Then, the teammate character 01TM100 executes a victory effect to win over the enemy character 01TM110, and displays the character "Victory!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-3 in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) that has been set is fixedly stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) that is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r is fixedly stopped. As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the small symbols corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

  As described above, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the image related to the decorative pattern and the super reach effect, which have been in the easy-to-view state on the image display device 5 until now, is in the difficult-to-view state due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 that is the target of the change effect is improved by moving the active display 01TM001 that is the target of the change effect to the central portion of the screen and enlargedly displayed. In that state, it is suggested that the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 by executing the movable body motion effect that moves the movable body 01TM050 from the tilted position to the standing position, and the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes. To do. Then, a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 is executed with the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position.

  In this way, the first change suggestion effect accompanied by the movable body motion effect that acts on the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is set with the predetermined image (the image regarding the decorative pattern and the super reach effect) being in the visually difficult state. By being executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect, and the interest of the first change suggestion effect and the change effect can be improved.

  In addition, before executing the change effect, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is made higher than a predetermined image (an image related to the decorative pattern and the super reach effect), so that the change effect is changed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the target corresponding display (active display 01TM001) and improve the interest of the change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the movable body motion effect is executed, so that the movable body 01TM050 in the standing position and the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect have a positional relationship of overlapping in the front-rear direction. The visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is once reduced before the change effect is executed. In this way, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is suggested to change is temporarily reduced before the corresponding display changes, thereby making the change more surprising and entertaining. Can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-2 (D) and (E), the display mode of the active display always changes when the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the second change. When the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change. Here, the blackout effect is always executed when the first change suggestion effect is executed, whereas the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when an effect that acts on the active display 01TM001 is executed after a predetermined image (decorative pattern and an image related to the super reach effect) is made difficult to see, the predetermined image acts on the active display 01TM001 without making it difficult to see. The display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes at a higher rate than the case where the effect is performed. Therefore, the player becomes interested in the visibility of the predetermined image when the effect acting on the active display 01TM001 is executed, and the interest of the change suggesting effect can be further improved.

(Example of executing the second change suggestion effect)
When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the second change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect is generated at the timing when the push button 31B is operated (at the timing T8 shown in FIG. 14C). Run. In the present embodiment, unlike the case of the first change suggestion effect, the blackout effect is not executed when the second change suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 14-5(13), the character A appears in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 in the second change suggestion effect. At this time, in the image display device 5, since the blackout effect is not executed, the visibility of the predetermined image (the image relating to the decorative pattern and the battle effect) is not deteriorated, and the battle effect is easily visible. Therefore, the player can see the middle part of the battle production. At this time, in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, the variable display of the small symbols is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5(14), in the second change suggestion effect, an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 01TM001 (white circular display) in the normal mode is displayed. (T9A timing shown in FIG. 14-3).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (15), in the second change suggestion effect, an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 01TM001 (white round display) in the normal mode is displayed. It is displayed (timing of T10A shown in FIG. 14-3). At this time, in the active display area 01TM003, an effect image (active display 01TM001G) different from the displayed normal mode active display 01TM001 (white circular display) is displayed. This effect image is an image that reminds that the active display 01TM001 has exploded.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 hides the effect image (active display 01TM001G) displayed in the active display area 01TM003, as shown in FIG. Display 01TM001 is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-3). As a result, the second change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed corresponding to the second change suggestion effect ends.

  In this way, by executing the second change suggestion effect, the ball thrown by the character A acts on the active display 01TM001, and a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode to the red mode is executed. Will be done. The battle effect is continuously visible even after the end of the second change suggestion effect, and the player continues the battle in the middle part of the battle effect ((13) to (15) in FIG. 14-5). You can continue to see the final part of the production (Fig. 14-5 (16)). Even after the completion of the second change suggestion effect, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (17) (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-3 ), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern whose display result is a big hit. The combination (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are also stopped in combination with numbers ("777" in this example) that form the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. Display it. Then, the teammate character 01TM100 executes a victory effect to win over the enemy character 01TM110, and displays the character "Victory!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the timing T13 shown in FIG. The combination of decorative symbols (“777”) that has been set is fixedly stopped, and the combination of small symbols (“777”) that is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r is fixedly stopped. As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the small symbols corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

  The second change suggestion effect described above is the second change suggestion effect of the success mode that can be executed when the display mode of the active display 01TM001 changes. In the second change suggestion effect of this success mode, the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is displayed as the display mode of the active display 01TM001 when the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. The display mode is changed from the previous display mode. On the other hand, the second change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed when the display mode of the active display 01TM001 does not change, and as shown in FIG. Although the effect image for performing the action of throwing the ball toward the active display 01TM001 is displayed, after that, the effect image (active display 01TM001G) is not displayed in the active display area 01TM003, and as a result, it is displayed in the active display area 01TM003. The display form of the active display 01TM001 is not changed.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect as the super reach effect in response to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command being the change pattern of the super reach. During the variable display period of the decorative pattern (and the small pattern) based on the variation pattern of super reach, the start timing and the end timing of the battle effect corresponding to the variation pattern are determined in advance, and the execution period of the battle effect is different. It is constant regardless of the execution status of the effect (for example, first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, etc.). Therefore, in the variable display of the decorative pattern (and the small pattern) based on the variation pattern, the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of other effects (for example, the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect) overlap. If so, the visibility of the battle effect may be reduced due to other effects.

  In this example, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, during the period in which the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of the blackout effect overlap (the period indicated by T8 to T11 in FIG. 14-3 ), It becomes difficult to visually recognize the battle effect (the period shown in (8) to (10) in FIG. 14-5). Since this period corresponds to the period in which the middle stage part of the battle effect is executed, the player cannot see the middle stage part of the battle effect. However, it is possible to see the final part of the battle effect that is executed after the blackout effect execution period ends. On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the blackout effect is not executed, and the execution period of the battle effect and the execution period of the blackout effect do not overlap with each other. It becomes possible to see through the middle part and the end part.

  As described above, the execution periods of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect (the period of T8 to T11 shown in FIG. 14-3) are shorter than the execution period of the battle effect, and the first change suggestion effect and The second change suggestion effect is started after the battle effect is started, and is ended before the battle effect is ended (before the victory effect is executed). As a result, regardless of the execution status of the other effects (first change suggesting effect and second change suggesting effect), the player at least the beginning part of the battle effect, the end part of the battle effect, and the display result notification part ( It is possible to see the winning effect or defeating effect). That is, even if the effect control CPU 120 does not adjust the execution period or the start timing or the end timing of the battle effect according to the execution status of another effect, it is at least the beginning part of the battle effect that the battle effect is started. It is possible for the player to recognize the final part and the display result notification part (winning effect or defeating effect) which are important parts in the battle effect.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as an effect for prompting the operation of the push button 31B, an effect of displaying the normal mode operation promotion display 01TM031 (see FIG. 14-4 (2)) and a special mode of the operation promotion display 01TM031A ( The effect of displaying (see FIG. 14-4 (7)) can be executed. The normal mode operation prompting display 01TM031 is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display, and when the push button 31B is operated while the normal mode operation prompting display 01TM031 is being displayed, the first mode (“CHANGE?? )) or the cut-in notice production of the second mode (“CHANCE!!”). On the other hand, the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed after the reach state is established (during execution of the super reach effect), and when the push button 31B is operated while the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed. The first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed.

  In this manner, the operation prompting display is performed, and the cut-in notice effect, the first change suggesting effect, and the second change suggesting effect are provided as the operation effects performed by operating the push button 31B in response to the operation promoting display. There is a production. Here, when either the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed and the cut-in notice effect is not executed, both the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect are executed. The percentage of big hits is higher than when the cut-in notice production is executed without it. Thereby, when the player operates the push button 31B, the player is interested in which operation effect, the operation suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect or second change suggestion effect) or the cut-in notice effect, is executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect.

  Further, as described above, when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) which is the target of the change effect is more than that when the second change suggestion effect is executed. The rate of change is high, and the rate of jackpots is high. Therefore, when the player operates the push button 31B in response to the display of the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A, which one of the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect is executed? Will pay attention to.

  Note that the operation effect is not limited to the effect shown in the above-described embodiment, and, for example, a special background image that acts on the background image of the decorative pattern from the normal background image to the corresponding display (active display, hold display) ( For example, a zone effect in which a lightning strike from the upper side of the correspondence display to the correspondence display is displayed) may be changed, and a large number of characters (characters of the same type or characters of multiple types) form a group. It may be a group notice effect that crosses the entire screen including the area where the correspondence display (active display, hold display) is displayed.

(Modified example)
In the above embodiment, in the first change suggesting effect and the second change suggesting effect, effects that act on the active display 01TM001 (first change suggesting effect: the effect that the movable body 01TM050 acts on the active display 01TM001 and the flame effect are active display). 01TM001, a second change suggestion effect: an effect in which the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 01TM001) has been shown, but the invention is not limited to such a form, and acts on the active display 01TM001. An effect that changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 may be executed without the effect being executed. For example, like the third change suggestion effect shown below, after the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is made higher than usual, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 without effect acting on the active display 01TM001. May be changed.

(3rd change suggestion production)
A specific example of such a third change suggesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-6 and 14-7. FIG. 14-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the third change suggesting effect is executed, and FIG. 14-7 shows the image display device 5 when the third change suggesting effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed.

  In the example described below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on that the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit” and the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is “super reach big hit”. In addition to performing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character battle each other is executed as the super reach effect. Then, by finally executing a victory effect in which the teammate character wins, the occurrence of the big hit is notified.

  In addition, in step S01TM1010, effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the cut-in notice effect of the second mode (“CHANCE!!”), and in step S01TM1020, sets the final display mode of the active display to the red mode. It is assumed that the change pattern of the active display is changed to the change pattern 104 (normal→red) in step S01TM1030. Hereinafter, an example in the case where it is determined to execute the third change suggesting effect in step S01TM1040 will be described.

  When the third change suggestion effect is executed, as in the case where the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect are executed in the period of T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 14-6, FIG. Performance control shown in (1) to FIG. 14-4 (7) (performance control similar to the period of T1 to T7 shown in FIG. 14-3) is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the push button 31B being operated while the special mode operation promotion display 01TM031A is displayed (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-6), and the above-described step S01TM1040. The third change suggestion effect determined in step 3 is executed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the third change suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (18), at the timing when the push button 31B is operated (shown in FIG. 14-6). At the timing of T8), the third change suggesting effect is executed. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed when the third change suggestion effect is started. That is, by displaying the darkened image 01TM150 as a covering image that covers the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the visibility of the predetermined image is reduced to make it difficult to view. In the present embodiment, the blackout effect is executed, so that the decorative pattern and the reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect) are in a visually difficult state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (18), the effect control CPU 120 continues the difficult-to-view state and displays the normal mode active display 01TM001 (white circle display) displayed in the active display area 01TM003. Is moved to the center of the screen above the active display area 01TM003, and the active display 01TM001 (white circular display) of the normal mode is enlarged and displayed. This improves the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the third change suggestion effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display 01TM001 from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) as shown in FIG. 14-7 (19) ( (T9 timing shown in FIG. 14-8).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the red mode active display 01TM001 enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen to the original size, and moves it to the lower active display area 01TM003. That is, the visibility of the active display 01TM001 is reduced to the visibility before the third change suggestion effect and the blackout effect are executed. As a result, in the active display area 01TM003, the active display 01TM001 changed from the normal mode to the red mode is displayed. Then, by ending the display of the darkened image 01TM150, the difficult-to-recognize state is released, and the visibility of the predetermined image (the image relating to the decorative design and the battle effect) is restored (timing T10 shown in FIG. 14-6). As a result, the third change suggestion effect ends, and the change effect executed corresponding to the third change suggestion effect and the blackout effect executed corresponding to the third change suggestion effect also end. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 14-7 (20), the visibility is restored, and thus it becomes easier to visually recognize the predetermined image (the image regarding the decorative pattern and the battle effect), and the player can see the battle effect again. Here, during the period in which the blackout effect is executed (the period of T8 to T10 shown in FIG. 14-6, the period of (18) to (19) shown in FIG. 14-7), the CPU 120 for effect control changes. The display control of the battle effect corresponding to the pattern is continuously executed, and during this period, the display control for the middle part of the battle effect (the part shown in (13) to (15) of FIG. 14-5 described above) is performed. It is running continuously.

  Then, when the blackout effect ends, the battle effect can be visually recognized from the portion corresponding to the display control of the battle effect at that timing. In this example, from the end part of the battle effect shown in FIG. The battle production is visible. Even after the blackout effect is finished, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (21) (at the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-6 ), in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern whose display result is a big hit. The combination (in this example, "777") is stopped and displayed, and the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are also stopped in combination with the numbers ("777" in this example) that form the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. Display it. Then, the teammate character 01TM100 executes a victory effect to win over the enemy character 01TM110, and displays the character "Victory!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-6 in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The combination of decorative symbols ("777") that has been set is fixedly stopped, and the combination of small symbols ("777") that is stopped and displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r is fixedly stopped. As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the small symbols corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot are completed.

  As described above, when the third change suggestion effect is executed, the image relating to the decorative pattern and the super reach effect, which has been in the easy-to-view state on the image display device 5 until now, is in the difficult-to-view state due to the blackout effect. On the other hand, the display mode of the active display 01TM001 in the state where the visibility of the active display 01TM001 which is the target of the change effect is improved by moving the active display 01TM001 which is the target of the change effect to the central portion of the screen and enlargedly displayed. Will change.

  That is, before execution of the third change suggestion effect, the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect is lower than the visibility of the predetermined image (image related to super reach effect), but the third change suggestion In the effect, by making the visibility of the corresponding display (active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change effect higher than the visibility of the predetermined image (image related to the super reach effect), the corresponding display that is the target of the change effect (active display) 01TM001) can bring the player's attention to the interest of the change effect.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the first change suggesting effect, the second change suggesting effect, and the third change suggesting effect are executed as effects related to the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. However, it is not limited to such a form, and is the same as the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect as the prefetching notice effect related to the hold display corresponding to the variable display which is not executed. The effect may be executed. That is, based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize, the change pattern of the hold display and the type of the change suggestion effect are determined, and the variable display of the plurality of times until the variable display (target change) based on the starting prize is executed. Among them, the first change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect, or the third change suggestion effect may be executable with respect to the hold display corresponding to the change display (target change) based on the start prize.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the example in which the display mode of the corresponding display (active display) corresponding to one variable display is changed once is described, but the corresponding display corresponding to one variable display ( A change pattern in which the display mode of the active display or the hold display) changes a plurality of times may be provided. For example, when the number of held memories becomes 2 due to the starting winning, the second holding display corresponding to the starting winning is displayed in a normal manner, and then with the first holding display shift (Hold 2→Hold 1 ), the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect for the first hold display corresponding to the start winning is executed, and the first hold display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then With the second hold display shift (Hold 1→Hold 0), the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect for the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the starting winning is executed, and The active display may be changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  As described above, the change suggestion effect may be executed a plurality of times for the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to one variable display. For example, the second change suggestion effect is executed in response to the first change effect (normal mode→change to blue mode), and the second change suggestion effect is executed in response to the second change effect (blue mode→change to red mode). 1 Change suggestion production may be executed. In addition, for the corresponding display (holding display or active display) corresponding to one variable display, first, the second change suggesting effect of the failure mode is executed as the first change suggesting effect, and the display mode of the corresponding display is normally set. Instead of changing the mode, the first change suggesting effect may be executed as the second change suggesting effect to change the display mode of the corresponding display from the normal mode to the red mode.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect), and the decorative design and the reach effect image (the image regarding the battle effect). However, the visibility of both the correspondence display that is the target of the change suggestion effect (for example, active display) and the correspondence display that is not the target of the change suggestion effect (for example, the hold display) is deteriorated. Although not shown, the visibility of the corresponding display (for example, the active display 01TM001) that is the target of the change suggestion effect is not deteriorated when the blackout effect is executed, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a form. The visibility of the corresponding display (for example, the hold display 01TM002) that is not the target of (3) may be reduced to make it difficult to view.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the blackout effect is always executed (at a rate of 100%) when the first change suggestion effect is executed is shown, but the invention is not limited to such an embodiment. The blackout effect may not be executed even when the change suggesting effect is executed. For example, in the case of executing the first change suggestion effect, the blackout effect is executed at a rate of 30% when the display result is off, and the blackout effect is performed at a rate of 80% when the display result is a big hit. It may be executed in. Further, the first change suggestion effect may not be executed even when the blackout effect is executed.

  (5) Also, a plurality of modes may be provided as the mode of the blackout effect. For example, even in the difficult-to-recognize state, the degree of difficult-to-recognize is relatively low, and the display layer having a lower display priority than the dark image through the dark image (looks as if it is displayed in the back of the player) is transparent. The blackout effect of the first aspect in which the darkened image having a rate of 50% is displayed in a superimposed manner, and the visibility is relatively high even in the difficult-to-recognize state, and the display priority is lower than the darkened image through the darkened image (game). A blackout effect of the second aspect may be provided in which a darkened image having a layer transmittance of 0% that allows a display layer to be transparent is displayed in a superimposed manner. Then, when the display result is a big hit, the blackout effect of the second aspect in which the degree of difficulty in visual recognition is high may be executed at a higher rate than when the display result is a hit. Further, when the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, hold display) changes, the blackout effect of the second mode in which the degree of difficulty of visual recognition is higher than that in the case where the display mode of the corresponding display does not change is executed. You may do it.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the blackout effect is executed as the first change suggestion effect is executed, and the visibility of the predetermined image (decorative pattern and reach effect image (including the image related to the battle effect)) is improved. Although the example in which the predetermined image is lowered is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when the first change suggestion effect is started, the effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed to improve the visibility of the predetermined image. You can For example, before the first change suggesting effect is executed, the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display (holding display, active display) that is the target of the first change suggesting effect. When the change suggestion effect is executed, the predetermined image is enlarged and displayed (visibility is further improved), and the visibility of the predetermined image is higher than the visibility of the corresponding display that is the target of the first change suggestion effect. The state is maintained, the movable body motion effect is executed in that state (the first change suggestion effect is ended), and the display mode of the corresponding display that is the target of the first change suggestion effect is changed. May be.

  In addition, the blackout effect is executed along with the execution of the first change suggestion effect to temporarily reduce the visibility of the predetermined image, and then the effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed to visually confirm the predetermined image. May be improved, the effect of enlarging and displaying the predetermined image is executed as the first change suggestion effect is executed, and the visibility of the predetermined image is temporarily improved, and then the blackout effect is executed. Thus, the visibility of the predetermined image may be reduced.

(Example of a pachinko game machine that executes probability variation fall determination)
As a pachinko game machine, in the state where the gaming state is controlled to the high-precision state, the positive-variable fall determination of whether or not to shift the game state to the low-probability state is executed, and the gaming state is based on the result of the positive-variability fall determination. There is a pachinko game machine that shifts the state to a low accuracy state. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-4, it is possible to apply a configuration in which the jackpot probability is different according to the set value, as shown in FIG. 9-4, to the pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes such a probability variation fall determination. is there. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine that has a different jackpot probability depending on the set value and executes the probability variation fall determination will be described.

  In such a pachinko game machine, when a start winning (winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) occurs, a random number for the probability variation fall determination is extracted, and a special prize based on the starting winning in the highly accurate state. When the variable display of the symbol is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high-precision state based on the random number for the probability variation fall determination (so-called presence or absence of the probability variation fall), and the high-precision state is determined based on the determination result. I'm trying to finish. Specifically, the CPU 103 extracts a random number for the probability variation fall determination when the winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected in the switch processing shown in step S21 of FIG. Whether or not to end the high-precision state based on the random number for the probability variation fall determination when the variable display of the special symbol based on the prize is started in the certain state (in the special symbol normal process shown in step S110 of FIG. 5). The probability variation fall determination is performed, and the high accuracy state is terminated based on the determination result, and the low accuracy state is entered.

  In this probability variation fall judgment, it is determined as either "no probability variation fall" or "probability variation fall" by the determination using random numbers for the probability variation fall determination, and it is highly accurate based on the determination "no probability variation fall". The state is continued, and the high-precision state ends based on the determination that “there is a probability change and fall”. CPU103, to the production control CPU120, a probability variation fall determination result designation command indicating the presence or absence of probability variation fall in the probability variation fall determination.

  FIG. 14-8 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the low certainty state. As shown in FIGS. 14-8(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 sets the set set value (1 to 6). Any of the above) is referred to and the big hit determination is executed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is changed. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 which is a random number value for determining a special figure display result is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 14-8(A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 at the time of non-probability change (at the time of low probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, that is, When the first special symbol is subject to variable display, a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ) Is to win the big hit. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of uncertain variation (at the time of low probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first Has a higher probability (1/290) than when the setting value is “1”, and wins the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/290) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of non-probability change (at the time of low probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first Has a higher probability (1/280) than when the set values are "1" and "2", and wins the big hit. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8(D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of non-probability change (at the time of low probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first Is to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/270) than when the set values are "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/270) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of uncertain change (at the time of low probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first Is to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/260) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/260) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of uncertain variation (at the time of low probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first Is to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/250) than when the set values are "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set when the variable display is about to be started in the low-accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIG. When any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special design is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. In addition, "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-8(A) to (F) indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

  Next, after the display result becomes "big hit", the big hit game state (big hit) is controlled, and after the big hit game state, it is controlled to a highly accurate high base state. Based on a display result determination table (Figs. 14-9(A) to (F)) at the time of probability change (high probability), which will be described later, the CPU 103 displays the display result in the state of being controlled to the highly accurate base state. decide.

  FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the high accuracy state. As shown in FIGS. 14-9(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 sets the set value (1 to 6) that has been set. Any of the above) is referred to and the big hit determination is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 14-9(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability) is used, when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, that is, When one special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability is lower (1/60) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". It is supposed to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/60) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 14-9(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/58) than when the set value is “1”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/58) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, , With a higher probability (1/56) than when the set values are “1” and “2”, the jackpot is won. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/56) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9(D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/54) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, and “3”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/54) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/52) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/52) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14-9(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of probability change (at the time of high probability), when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, , The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the set values are “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time of starting the variable display in the high-accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIG. When any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. In addition, "probability" shown in FIGS. 14-9(A) to (F) indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9, but the big hit determination table is separately provided. Provision, the determination of the big hit may be performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. .

  In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2, may be 3, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  In the present embodiment, after the jackpot game state is finished, it is controlled to a highly accurate high base state. Then, in the probability variation fall determination executed when the variation display of the special symbol is started in the high accuracy high base state, if it is determined that "no probability variation fall", the high accuracy high base state continues, and If it is determined that "fall has occurred", the state shifts to the low certainty state (low certainty high base state or low certainty low base state). The random number for the probability variation fall determination is a random number extracted at the time of winning the start (at the timing when the first starting opening switch 22A or the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on), and the starting winning in the highly accurate and high base state. When the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to is started, the probability variation falling determination is executed based on the random number for the probability variation falling determination corresponding to the starting winning.

  FIG. 14-10 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the probability variation fall determination table. The probability variation fall determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a probability variation fall determination value to be compared with a random number for probability variation fall determination is set. The probability variation fall determination table is a table that is referred to in the highly accurate state, and is referred to for determining “with probability variation fall” or “without probability variation fall” based on a random number for probability variation fall determination.

  As shown in FIG. 14-10, in the probability variation fall determination, the probability variation fall is won with a probability of 1/80. That is, it is determined with a probability of 1/80 that "there is a probability change and fall", and with the probability of 79/80 that it is determined that there is a probability change and fall.

  That is, when the CPU 103 is about to start the variable display in the high-accuracy state, the random value for the probability variation fall determination is one of the probability variation fall determination values corresponding to “presence variation fall determination” illustrated in FIG. 14-10. If it matches with, it is decided to end the high-precision state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a start winning combination (a winning combination in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) occurs, a random number for the probability variation fall determination is extracted, and the starting winning is achieved in the highly accurate state. When the variable display of special symbols based on it is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the high-precision state based on the random number for the probability variation fall determination (the presence or absence of so-called probability variation fall), and the high accuracy based on the determination result. I am trying to end the state. That is, when it is determined in the probability variation fall determination that there is a probability variation fall at the timing when the variable display is started in the high precision state, the high precision state is shifted to the low precision state. Therefore, since the determination probability variation fall determination is performed before the big hit determination, it prevents the big hits from continuously occurring too much (prevents so-called too many games).

  Here, regarding the above-mentioned big hit determination, as shown in FIGS. 14-8 and 14-9, the display result determination table corresponding to the currently set setting value (any one of 1 to 6) is selected. Then, the display result determination table is referred to, but regarding the probability variation fall determination, the common probability variation fall determination table (FIG. 14-10) is referenced regardless of the currently set value. That is, the CPU 103, when starting the variable display of the special symbol in the highly accurate state (in the special symbol normal process shown in step S110 of FIG. 5), for the big hit determination, the display result corresponding to the set value that has been set The determination table is selected and executed based on the selected display result determination table, but the probability variation fall determination is performed based on the common probability variation fall determination table regardless of the set value that is set. As a result, the ratio of ending the high-accuracy state is a common ratio (1/80 in this example) regardless of the set value.

  By doing so, it is possible to suppress the amount of information (the number of tables) required to execute the probability variation fall determination, and it is possible to effectively utilize the storage capacity of the ROM 101. In the high probability state, the probability of falling in probability is constant regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 14-9, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is. The probability of being judged as a “big hit” in the big hit judgment before it is also judged becomes high. As a result, large jackpots are likely to occur continuously (so-called long-term resorts are easy to occur).

  Next, a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine that executes the probability variation fall determination will be described. In the example of the game flow shown below, when a big hit occurs, it is controlled to a high-accuracy high-base state after the big-hit game state ends, and the probability variation fall determination is executed when the variable display is started in the high-accuracy high-base state. . Here, until the 100th variation display is started without the display result of the variation display being executed in the high-accuracy/high-base state being a “big hit”, (1) Corresponding to the 100th variation display When it is determined that "there is a probability variation fall" in any of the executed probability variation fall determinations, the variation display (any variation display from the first time to the 100th time) corresponding to the probability variation fall determination is low from the start. The high accuracy base state is controlled, the low accuracy high base state is maintained until the 100th variation display is completed, and then the low accuracy low base state is controlled.

  On the other hand, (2) if none of the probability variation fall determinations executed corresponding to the variation display up to the 100th time is determined to be “probability variation fall”, it is highly accurate until at least the 100th variation display ends. When it is determined that "probability change/fall has occurred" in the probability change/fall determination executed in response to the 101st and subsequent fluctuation indications while maintaining a high base state, low probability from the start of the fluctuation display corresponding to the probability change/fall determination. Controlled to low base state.

  FIG. 14-11(A) corresponds to the case where it is determined that there is a certain probability variation fall within 100 rotations after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state after the jackpot game state (corresponding to (1) above). FIG. 14-11(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow of (in case), and it is determined that there is a “probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination after 101 rotations after being controlled to a highly accurate high base state after the big hit game state. It is an explanatory view showing a game flow when it is determined (in the case corresponding to (2) above). In this way, depending on the number of fluctuation displays after being controlled to the high accurate high base state when it is determined that there is a positive variable fall in the high accuracy high fall state determination executed in the high accurate high base state, the game flow is Differently, the referenced fluctuation pattern table is also different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. Specifically, in the normal state (low accurate low base state), it is possible to control to the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the high base state (high accurate high base state or low accurate high base state) Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-16 and 14-19 and 14-20 described later, it becomes possible to control the battle RUSH mode in which the ally character 01TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen as the background image of the decorative pattern. ing.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-16, 14-19, and 14-20, in the battle RUSH mode, the letters “Battle RUSH” and “remaining x times” (x=0 to 100) are displayed in the upper left part of the screen. , Or?) is displayed, which indicates the remaining variable display count that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode. Here, in the first variation display executed after the big hit game state, "100 remaining" is displayed, and thereafter, every time the variation display is executed without the big hit, "99 remaining" and "98 remaining" The suggested remaining fluctuation display count is decremented and updated by 1 such as “time”, “97 times remaining”. The number of remaining fluctuation display times suggested in this way is the minimum number of fluctuation display times that can be executed without a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state) (so-called guaranteed remaining time saving number). Can also be said.

  Then, after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot gaming state ends), when the 100th variation display is executed without a jackpot, "0 remaining" is displayed (Fig. 14-16). (10) and FIGS. 14-19(3)). If the low-probability/high-base state is set at the time when the 100th variation display is executed (in any of the certainty variation fall determinations executed corresponding to the variation display up to then including the 100th variation display If it is determined that there is a probability variation fall), the battle RUSH mode (high base state) ends with this 100th variation display (see FIG. 14-17 (14)), and from the next variation display Transition to normal mode (low accurate low base state).

  On the other hand, when the 100th variation display is executed after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot gaming state is over) and the 100th variation display is executed, it is high when the 100th variation display is executed. If the accurate base state is maintained (if there is no positive variation fall judgment in any of the positive variation fall determinations executed corresponding to the variation display up to and including the 100th variation display), , The battle RUSH mode continues, and the characters “remaining?” are displayed in the upper left part of the screen in the 101st and subsequent change display (see FIG. 14-19(7)). This is because when it is determined that "there is a probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination executed corresponding to the variation display after the 101st time, the game state shifts to the low-probability low base state in the variation display. This is because the minimum fluctuating display count (so-called guaranteed remaining time saving count) that can be executed without a big hit in the battle RUSH mode (high base state) is uncertain. When it is determined in the probability variation fall determination executed corresponding to the 101st and subsequent variation displays that "there is a probability variation fall", the RUSH mode ends with this variation display and the normal mode is changed from the next variation display. Move to.

(When the probability changes and falls within 100 fluctuations after the high-accuracy base state transition)
As shown in FIG. 14-11(A), the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accurate low base state), and the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, and the variation is changed. When the display result of the display is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled, after the big hit game state is finished, the game state is controlled to the highly accurate high base state, and the effect mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability variation fall determination when starting the variable display in the state where the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate and high base state.

  Here, the CPU 103, in the high-accuracy high-base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-state state), the probability variation falls Based on the determination that there is no "probable variation fall" and the display result is "disappearance", the variation of the probability variation fall non-winning at the time of the highly accurate high base shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table. In this example, the variation pattern of the variable display of the decorative design is not the reach mode and the display result is off, and the variation pattern of "non-reach out" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is the reach mode "out of normal reach". And a variation pattern of "super reach out (battle draw)" in which the battle display between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw is executed. Has been. In the example of FIG. 14-12(A), the variation pattern of “out of reach” is determined at a rate of 90%, the variation pattern of “out of reach” is determined at a rate of 8%, and the variation pattern is “out of reach” at a rate of 2%. It is decided by the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Loss (Battle draw)".

  Further, the CPU 103, in the high-accuracy high-base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-state state), the probability variation fall determination 14-12(B), it is determined that there is no “probable variation fall” and that the display result is “big hit”. The variation pattern is determined based on the pattern determination table. In this example, a variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" in which the variation display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode and a variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and a battle effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed. The change pattern of "Super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12(B), the variation pattern of “normal reach jackpot” is determined at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is determined at a rate of 95%.

  The CPU 103 sends the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120 by including a probability variation fall determination result designation command that designates “no probability variation fall” in one set of commands. To do. Based on the effect control CPU 120 that has received a set of commands, the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the variable display within the 100th time after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the big hit game state ends). , Battle RUSH mode is continued.

  On the other hand, the CPU 103, in the high-accuracy high-base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state), the probability variation fall determination 14-12C, it is determined that there is "probable variation fall" and that the display result is "disappearance". Therefore, variation occurs based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation that is shown in FIG. Determine the pattern. In the present example, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, the battle effect in which the battle between the teammate character and the enemy character ends in a draw, and the display mode of the character displayed when the reach state is established, the current set value. There is provided a variation pattern of “super-reach miss (battle draw)+setting suggestion effect” in which the first setting suggestion effect that suggests is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12(C), the variation pattern of “missing super-reach (battle draw)+setting suggestion effect” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103, in the high-accuracy high-base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-state state), the probability variation fall determination 14-12 (D) based on the determination that there is a "probable variation fall" and the display result is "big hit", it fluctuates based on the variation pattern determination table for the jackpot shown in FIG. Determine the pattern. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is a reach mode, and a variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is provided in which a battle effect in which an ally character wins over an enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12(D), the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  CPU103 transmits to the production control CPU 120 by including the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation pattern designation command, together with a set of commands of the probability variation fall determination result designation command designating "there is a probability variation fall". To do. Based on the effect control CPU 120 that has received a set of commands, the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the variable display within the 100th time after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the big hit game state ends). , Battle RUSH mode is continued.

  The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability-high base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the determination that “there is a probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination.

  In the low accurate high base state, the CPU 103 displays the display result as “out” if the variable display to be executed from now on is the variable display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on the determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the deviation in the low accuracy and high base shown in FIG. 14-12(E). In this example, the variation pattern of the variable display of the decorative design is not the reach mode and the display result is off, and the variation pattern of "non-reach out" and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is the reach mode "out of normal reach". And a variation pattern of "super reach out (battle draw)" in which the battle display between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw is executed. Has been. In the example of FIG. 14-12(E), a variation pattern of “out of reach” is determined at a rate of 95%, a variation pattern of “out of reach” is determined at a rate of 3%, and a variation pattern of “out of reach” is determined at a rate of 2%. It is decided by the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Loss (Battle draw)".

  Further, the CPU 103, in the low accurate high base state, when the variable display to be executed from now on is the variable display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state), the display result is “big hit”. 14-12(F), the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for big hits at the time of low accuracy and high base. In this example, a variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot" in which the variation display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode and a variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and a battle effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed. The change pattern of "Super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12(F), the variation pattern of “normal reach jackpot” is determined at a rate of 2%, and the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is determined at a rate of 98%.

  Based on the effect control CPU 120 that has received a set of commands, the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the variable display within the 100th time after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the big hit game state ends). , Battle RUSH mode is continued.

  As described above, the CPU 103 has a high base state (high-accurate high-base state or low level) from the end of the big-hit game state (after the transition to the high-base state) to the 100th variation display executed without the next big hit. It is designed to continue the high-accuracy base state). Here, when the 100th variation display is started, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table dedicated to the 100th variation display.

  In the low accurate high base state, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “out” if the variable display to be executed from now on is the 100th variable display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state). Based on the above, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the 100th deviation shown in FIG. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the display mode of the character displayed at the timing when the reach state is established suggests the current set value. 1 setting suggestion production, and suggesting the current set value by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle production ends (timing after the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character) The change pattern of “out of super reach (defeat of battle)+setting suggestion effect” in which 2 setting suggestion effect is executed is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12(G), the variation pattern of “missing super-reach (battle defeat)+improvement of setting” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value based on the determination that “there is a probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination. Even if the high accuracy state is transitioned from the high accuracy state to the low accuracy state, if a high setting is suggested in the setting suggestion production, it is possible to give the player a positive element and a supplementary element to continue the game, and set in connection with the probability variation fall judgment. The interest can be improved in that the suggestive performance is executed.

  Further, in the low-accurate high-base state, the CPU 103 displays the display result as “big hit” when the variable display to be executed from now on is the 100th variable display after the big-hit gaming state has ended (after the transition to the high-base state). 14-12(H), the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th-only dedicated jackpot variation pattern determination table. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is a reach mode, and a variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is provided in which a battle effect in which an ally character wins over an enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-12(H), the variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Based on the effect control CPU 120 that has received a set of commands, the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the variable display within the 100th time after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the big hit game state ends). , Battle RUSH mode is continued.

  In addition, in the high-accurate high-base state, the CPU 103 makes a positive variation fall determination when the variable display to be executed from now on is the 100th variation display after the jackpot gaming state has ended (after the transition to the high-precision high base state). Based on the determination that "probability variation has fallen" and the determination that the display result is "dislocation", the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the 100th variation shown in FIG. decide.

  Further, in the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 makes a probability variation fall determination when the variable display to be executed from now on is the 100th variation display after the jackpot gaming state has ended (after the transition to the high-accuracy high base state). Based on the determination that "probable variation has fallen" and the determination that the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th-only jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in Fig. 14-12(H). decide.

  CPU103 transmits to the production control CPU 120 by including the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation pattern designation command, together with a set of commands of the probability variation fall determination result designation command designating "there is a probability variation fall". To do. Based on the effect control CPU 120 that has received a set of commands, the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the variable display within the 100th time after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the big hit game state ends). , Battle RUSH mode is continued.

  The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability-high base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the determination that “there is a probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the low certainty high base state in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the jackpot gaming state ends (after controlling to the high base state). As a result, the variable display of the next time (101st after the end of the big hit game state) will be executed in the normal state (low accurate low base state). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the battle RUSH mode in response to the 100th variation display ending (after the jackpot gaming state ends) after shifting to the battle RUSH mode. As a result, the variable display of the next time (101st after the end of the big hit game state) will be executed in the normal mode.

(In the case of a certain change after 101 changes after moving to a high-accuracy high-base state)
As shown in FIG. 14-11(B), after the big hit game state is finished, after being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state, until the 100th fluctuation display is executed without the next big hit, the probability variation falls When it is not determined that there is a “probable change and fall” in the determination, game control and effect control are performed by the method described below.

  In the high-precision high-base state, the CPU 103, when the variable display to be executed from now on is the 100th variation display after the jackpot gaming state has been completed (after the transition to the high-precision high-base state), the “probability change” is made in the positive variation fall determination Based on the determination that there is no fall” and the determination that the display result is “out”, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the 100th variation shown in FIG. 14-13(I). . In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the variation pattern of “super reach loss (battle draw)” is provided in which the battle effect in which the battle between the teammate character and the enemy character ends in a draw is executed. . In the example of FIG. 14-13(I), the variation pattern of “super reach loss (battle draw)” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, in the high-accuracy high-base state, the CPU 103 makes a probability variation fall determination when the variable display to be executed from now on is the 100th variation display after the jackpot gaming state has ended (after the transition to the high-accuracy high base state). Based on the determination that there is no "probable variation fall" and the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is determined based on the 100th jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in Fig. 14-13(J). decide. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is a reach mode, and a variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is provided in which a battle effect in which an ally character wins over an enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13(J), the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 103 sends the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120 by including a probability variation fall determination result designation command that designates “no probability variation fall” in one set of commands. To do. Based on the effect control CPU 120 that has received a set of commands, the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed is the variable display within the 100th time after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the big hit game state ends). , Battle RUSH mode is continued.

  In the high-accurate high-base state, the CPU 103 makes a positive variation fall determination when the variable display to be executed from now on is the 101st variation display after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-precision high base state). Based on the determination that “probability variation does not occur” and the display result is “dislocation”, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation 101 for the 101st time and thereafter shown in FIG. 14-13(K). decide. In this example, a variation pattern of “non-reach out” is provided in which the variation display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode and the display result is out. In the example of FIG. 14-13(K), the variation pattern of “non-reach loss” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103, in the highly accurate high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display after the 101st time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the highly accurate high base state), the probability variation fall determination Based on the determination that "probability change and no fall" and that the display result is "big hit", fluctuations are made based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for the 101st time and thereafter shown in Fig. 14-13(L). Determine the pattern. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is a reach mode, and a variation pattern of “super reach jackpot (battle victory)” is provided in which a battle effect in which an ally character wins over an enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13(L), the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 103 sends the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120 by including a probability variation fall determination result designation command that designates “no probability variation fall” in one set of commands. To do. The effect control CPU 120, which has received a set of commands, is the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed, which is the variable display after the 101st time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the jackpot gaming state ends). The battle RUSH mode is continued even after the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished based on the reception of the probability variation fall determination result designation command designating "no fall".

  In the high-accurate high-base state, the CPU 103 determines that the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display after the 101st time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-precision high base state), and thus in the probability variation fall determination. Based on the determination that there is a probability variation fall" and the display result is "displacement", the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for probability variation fall win shown in FIG. 14-13(M). decide. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the display mode of the character displayed at the timing when the reach state is established suggests the current set value. 1st setting suggestion effect and 2nd setting which suggests the current setting value by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect ends (timing that the teammate character has been defeated by the enemy character) A variation pattern of "out of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" in which the suggestion effect is executed is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-13(M), the variation pattern of “missing super-reach (battle defeat)+setting suggestion effect” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103, in the highly accurate high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display after the 101st time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the highly accurate high base state), the probability variation fall determination Based on the judgment that there is a "probable change and fall" and the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation occurs based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit for the probability change fall win shown in Fig. 14-13(N). Determine the pattern. In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative design is a reach mode, and a variation pattern of "super reach jackpot (battle victory)" is provided in which a battle effect in which a teammate character wins over an enemy character is executed. In the example of FIG. 14-13(N), the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot (battle victory) is determined at a rate of 100%.

  The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability low-base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the determination that “there is a probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination.

  CPU103 transmits to the production control CPU 120 by including the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation pattern designation command, together with a set of commands of the probability variation fall determination result designation command designating "there is a probability variation fall". To do. The effect control CPU 120, which has received a set of commands, is the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed from now on, which is the variable display after the 101st time after the transition to the battle RUSH mode (after the end of the big hit game state), and “ The battle RUSH mode is ended with the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the reception of the probability variation fall determination result designating command designating "with probability variation fall".

  That is, when the next variable display is started, the game state is the normal state (low accurate low base state), and the effect mode is the normal mode.

  As described above, in the highly accurate and high base state, as shown in FIG. 14-12(A), when the display result is determined to be “out”, the super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 2%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-12(B), when the display result is determined to be a “big hit”, the super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 95%. That is, the rate at which the super reach (battle effect) is executed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled is higher than the rate at which the super reach (battle effect) is executed when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (C) and (D), and FIGS. 14-13 (M) and (N), when it is determined that there is “probable variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination, 100 is obtained. While the super reach (battle effect) is being executed at a ratio of %, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (A) and (B), when it is determined by the probability variation fall determination that there is “no probability variation fall”, The super reach (battle effect) is executed at a rate of 2% when the display result is “out” and 95% when the display result is “big hit”. In other words, the ratio of the super reach (battle production) executed when it is determined that there is a probability variation fall in the probability variation fall determination is the percentage that the super reach (battle production is performed when it is determined that there is no probability variation fall in the probability variation fall determination. ) Is higher than the rate at which it is executed.

  Therefore, when the super reach (battle effect) is executed, the player can recognize that the ratio of the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is high, and the percentage of the probability change that is disadvantageous to the player occurs. It can be recognized that it is expensive. In this way, by executing the super reach (battle effect), it is possible to suggest both an advantageous phenomenon and a disadvantageous phenomenon for the player. You can further increase your interest.

  Furthermore, even if the event that triggered the execution of the super reach (battle effect) was the occurrence of a certainty change fall, the first setting suggestion effect is being performed during execution of the variable display that is the target of the certainty change fall determination. Is executed, and the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are executed during execution of the variable display in which the high base state ends, so that the player grasps the setting of the gaming machine currently playing the game. Alternatively, since it is possible to estimate, it is possible to reduce the player's discouragement due to the occurrence of the probability variation fall.

(Setting suggestion production)
As described above, from the end of the jackpot gaming state until the 99th variation display is executed, it is determined that the display result determination is “out” and the probability variation fall determination is “accurate variation fall”. Based on, the variation pattern of the variation display corresponding to the probability variation fall determination is selected as the variation pattern of "Super Reach Off (Battle Draw) + Setting Suggestion Production" accompanied by the battle production to be a draw and the first setting suggestion production. (See FIG. 14-12(C)). The effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion effect based on the reception of the variation pattern designating command in which the variation pattern of “super reach loss (battle draw)+setting suggestion effect” is designated.

  In addition, as described above, when the 100th variation display is executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the 100% variation display including the 100th variation display is determined by the “probability variation fall determination” in the probability variation fall determination. When the 100th variable display is executed based on the determination that there is “there is”, the battle effect that is defeated and the first condition that the display result determination is “out”. A variation pattern of “super reach loss (battle defeat)+setting suggestion production” accompanied by setting suggestion production and second setting suggestion production is selected. The effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect based on the reception of the change pattern designating command in which the change pattern of “super reach loss (battle draw)+setting suggesting effect” is specified. Run.

  In this way, the first setting suggestion effect executed in the variable display determined as “with a certain probability falling” in the certain variation change determination or in the 100th variation display after the jackpot gaming state ends is shown in FIG. As shown in -16(6) or the like, the mode of the character displayed when the reach state is established suggests the currently set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14(A), when the probability variation fall determination determines that “there is a probability variation fall”, the number of fluctuation displays is (1) a highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode). If the number of times is 50 times or less after being controlled to, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggesting effect is determined to be "reach!!", and (2) is controlled to the high-precision high-base state (battle RUSH mode). When it is 51 times or more, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestive effect is determined to be "REACH".

  Here, in (1), when displaying the character “REACH!!”, if the current setting value is any of 1 to 3, the character “REACH!!” is displayed in a blue mode. If the current set value is any of 4 to 6, the letters “REACH!!” are displayed in red. Therefore, when the character "reach!!" is in the blue mode, it indicates that the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3", and the character "reach!!" Indicates that the setting value is any one of “4”, “5”, and “6”. That is, in the case of “reach!!” in the blue mode, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33% (1/3), and in the case of “reach!!” in the red mode, the setting suggestion effect is produced. Has a reliability of 33% (1/3).

  In addition, in (2), when the character "REACH" is displayed, if the current setting value is any of 1 to 4, the character "REACH" is displayed in a blue mode to display the current setting. When the value is any of 3 to 6, the letters "REACH" are displayed in a red mode. Therefore, when the character "REACH" is in the blue mode, it indicates that the set value is any of "1", "2", "3", and "4", and the character "REACH" is indicated. Indicates that the set value is any one of “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. That is, in the case of "REACH" in the blue mode, the reliability of the setting suggestive effect is 25% (1/4), and in the case of "REACH" in the red mode, the reliability of the setting suggestive effect is 25% (1/4). The display mode of the characters "REACH" when the set value is "3" or "4" is assigned to the blue mode or the red mode at a rate of 50%.

  In addition, the second setting suggestion effect executed in the 100th variation display after the jackpot game state is ended, as shown in FIG. The display mode (background, number of stars) of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing at which it was notified that was defeated by the enemy character) indicates the currently set setting value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-14(B), the number of fluctuation displays when the probability variation fall determination is “presence variation fall” is (1) highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode). If it is 30 times or less after being controlled to, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestive effect is determined to be the “full moon background”, and (2) after being controlled to the highly accurate and high base state (battle RUSH mode). When the number of times is 31 times or more and 60 times or less, the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestive effect is determined to be “half-moon background”, and (3) 61 times after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode) In the above case, the “crescent moon background” is determined as the background to be displayed in the second setting suggestive effect. The number of stars displayed in the second setting suggesting effect indicates the set value, and 1 to 6 stars are displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5.

  Here, in (1), when the “full moon background” is displayed, if the current set value is “p (p=1 to 6)”, p stars are displayed. Therefore, when the number of stars is 1, it indicates that the setting value is “1”, and when the number of stars is 2, it indicates that the setting value is “2”. If the number of stars is 3, it indicates that the setting value is “3”, and if the number of stars is 4, it indicates that the setting value is “4”. If the number of stars is 5, it means that the setting value is “5”, and if the number of stars is 6, it means that the setting value is “6”. There is. That is, when the "full moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 100%.

  Also, in (2), when the "half moon background" is displayed, if the current setting value is "q (q = 1 to 6)", q-1 or q stars are displayed. Let Therefore, when the number of stars is 1, it suggests that the setting value is “2” or “1”, and when the number of stars is 2, the setting value is “3” or “2”. If the number of stars is 3, it indicates that the setting value is “4” or “3”. If the number of stars is 4, the setting value is 4 The value indicates "5" or "4", and if the number of stars is 5, it indicates that the setting value is "6" or "5". If the number is 6, the setting value is suggested to be "1" or "6". That is, when the "half moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 50%.

  Further, in (3), when the “crescent moon background” is displayed and the current setting value is “r (r=1 to 6)”, r−1, r, or r+1 Display the stars. Therefore, when the number of stars is 1, it suggests that the setting value is "2", "1", or "6", and when the number of stars is 2, the setting value is " 3", "2", or "1" is suggested, and if the number of stars is 3, it suggests that the setting value is "4", "3", or "2" If the number of stars is 4, it indicates that the setting value is “5”, “4”, or “3”. If the number of stars is 5, the setting value is Indicates that it is "6", "5", or "4", and if the number of stars is 6, the setting value should be "1", "6", or "5". It suggests. That is, when the "crescent moon background" is displayed, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is 33%.

  In the present embodiment, when the actual setting value is 1, q-1=0 may be obtained in (2) above, and r-1=0 may be obtained in (3) above. If the number of stars to be displayed is set to 0 in these cases, the range of setting values (1 to 6) is inconsistent. Therefore, when q-1=0 in (2) and r-1=0 in (3), the number of stars to be displayed is set to 6. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the actual set value is 6, r+1=7 may be obtained in (3) above. In this case, if the number of stars to be displayed is set to 7, it will contradict the set value range (1 to 6). Therefore, when r+1=7 in (3), the number of stars actually displayed is 1.

  In the first setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is higher in the order of “REACH”<“reach!!”. That is, the first setting executed when [the number of times of fluctuation display determined to be “probable variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination is 51 times or more after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode)] Rather than the suggested effect, when the number of times of fluctuation display determined to be “with probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination is 50 times or less after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode) 1 setting suggestion production has higher reliability of the suggested setting value. In this way, the first setting suggestion that the reliability is different depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation displays after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode)) when it is determined that there is a “probable variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination Since the effect can be executed, the timing of the probability variation fall and the reliability of the first setting suggestion effect can be associated with each other, and the interest of the first setting suggestion effect can be improved.

  Similarly, in the second setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect is higher in the order of crescent moon background <half moon background <full moon background. That is, the second setting executed when [the number of times of fluctuation display determined to be “probable variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination is 61 times or more after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode)] Rather than suggestive production, in the case of [the number of fluctuation displays determined to be “with a probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination is 31 times or more and 60 times or less after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode)] The second setting suggestion effect to be executed has a higher reliability of the suggested setting value, and more than that, [the number of times of fluctuation display determined to be “probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination is high and the accuracy is high. In the case where the number of times is 30 times or less after being controlled to the base state (battle RUSH mode)], the reliability of the suggested setting value is higher in the second setting suggesting effect. In this way, the second setting suggestion that the reliability is different depending on the timing (the number of fluctuation displays after being controlled to the high-probability high-base state (battle RUSH mode)) when it is determined that there is a “probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination Since the effect can be executed, the timing of the probability change fall and the reliability of the second setting suggestion effect can be associated with each other, and the interest of the second setting suggestion effect can be improved.

  Here, the reliability of the first setting suggestive effect is 25% or 33%, while the reliability of the second setting suggestive effect is 33%, 50%, or 100%. Therefore, the highest reliability of 33% in the first setting suggestive effect and the lowest reliability of 33% in the second setting suggesting effect match, and the second setting suggesting effect is better than the first setting suggesting effect. The reliability will be high. Then, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects that can be executed in one variation display based on a common variation pattern, and in this case, the timing after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Then, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, when the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed in one variation display, the highly reliable second setting suggestion effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect. By doing so, the player's interest in the setting suggestion effect can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect is always executed at a timing before that, but the embodiment is not limited to this. Alternatively, even when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed. Further, the second setting suggestion effect may be executed before the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Example of production when a positive change falls within 100 rotations)
14- This will be described with reference to FIGS. 15, 14-16, and 14-17. 14-15 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the first setting suggestive effect and the second setting suggestive effect, and FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17 show the first setting suggestive effect and the first setting suggestive effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image relevant to 2 setting suggestion effect.

  In the following example, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "6". The CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the set value by transmitting a command that specifies the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The setting value notified by this command is the setting value when the power is turned on if it is not controlled to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power is turned on, and it is set to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. This is the set value when the setting change mode ends.

  First, as shown in FIG. 14-16(1), the effect control CPU 120 is assumed to be performing the 19th variation display after being controlled to the highly accurate and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state where the second number of reserved memories is 0, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (T1 shown in FIGS. 14-15). The fluctuation display started at the timing of is being executed. Further, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 causes the teammate character 01TM100 to be displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 and displays "Battle" in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode. The characters "RUSH" are displayed. Further, in response to the variable display currently being executed is the 19th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ Below the "Battle RUSH"), "81 times remaining" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(2), when variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (Fig. It is assumed that at the timing of T2 shown in 14-15), a new start winning is generated for the winning ball device 6B, and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the number of second reserved memories has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in the state in which the second reserved storage number is 1, and displays the symbol. The decoration symbol "4" is fixed in the area 5C, and the decoration symbol "6" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped (timing T3 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  Next, when the CPU 103 executes the variable display for the 20th time after controlling to the high-accuracy high-base state based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that “probability variation fall” is present in the probability variation fall determination. Based on the determination and the determination that the display result is “out”, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be “overreach out (battle draw)+setting suggestion effect” variation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 sets a set including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “super reach loss (battle draw)+setting suggestion effect” and a certainty variation fall judgment result designation command for designating “with certainty variation fall”. The command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game state is shifted to the low certainty high base state.

  Based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control receives the variation pattern designating command designating "super reach loss (battle draw) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the ally character and the enemy character are displayed. It is recognized that the battle effect in which the battle with and ends with a draw and the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value according to the display mode of the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established are executed. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestion effect is determined based on the number of times of change display after the control in the highly accurate and high base state (after the control in the battle RUSH mode).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is a probability variation fall within 50 times (20 times in this example) within 50 times (after controlling the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state. Based on the determination, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 20th variation display determined to have "probable change and fall" is determined to be "reach!!" and the set value is "6". It is assumed that it has been decided to set the character of “REACH!!” to a red form based on the setting of “.”. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16(4), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5R, variable display of decorative symbols is started (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the number of second reserved storages becomes 0, and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the variable display currently being executed is the 20th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The word "80 times remaining" is displayed on the bottom of "Battle RUSH".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(5), when variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (Fig. It is assumed that at the timing of T5 shown in 14-15), a new start winning for the winning ball device 6B occurs and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the number of second reserved memories has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(6), the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is reached by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect for displaying the letters "reach!!" in a red state on the upper portion of the image display device 5 is executed (timing T6 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player understands that the character “REACH!!” is displayed in a red mode, and thus there is a possibility that the variable display has fallen off. Also, regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing the game, there is a possibility that the set value is in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual set value. Understand that (reliability is high). In this way, although the player regrets that the effect suggesting that the probability variation has occurred is executed in the fluctuation display in which the probability variation has occurred, the set value may be high (4 to 6). Therefore, a decrease in game motivation is suppressed. Further, since the number of remaining variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the player will be willing to play a big hit with the remaining number of times.

  Next, as illustrated in FIG. 14-16(7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach (FIG. 14-). (T7 timing shown in 15). With the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays “Draw” on the upper portion of the image display device 5 while keeping the image display device 5 displaying the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110. Character is displayed (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 14-15). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the battle effect, and at the same time, the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 has a decorative design "4", the design display area 5C has a decorative design "5", and the design display area 5R has a decoration. The symbol "4" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped (timing of T9 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “off” when performing the variable display for the 21st time after controlling to the high base state, based on that the second reserved storage number is 1. Then, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of “out of reach”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control CPU 120, a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern “non-reach loss”. This 21st variation display is executed in the low accurate high base state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (9), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5R, variable display of decorative symbols is started (timing of T10 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the number of second reserved storages becomes 0, and also displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the variable display currently being executed is the 21st variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The word "79 times remaining" is displayed below "Battle RUSH").

  After that, it is assumed that the display result continuously becomes “out of focus” until the 99th variable display is executed after the control to the high base state. The gaming state during this period is a low-probability-high base state.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “off” when executing the variable display for the 100th time after controlling to the high base state, based on the second number of reserved memories being 3. Then, the variation pattern is determined to be a variation pattern of “out of super reach (defeat of battle) + setting suggestion production”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control CPU 120, a set of commands including a variation pattern designating command that designates the variation pattern “super reach loss (battle defeat)+setting suggestion production”. The 100th variation display is executed in the low accuracy and high base state.

  Based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control receives the variation pattern designating command designating "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the ally character is the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value depending on the battle effect that is defeated by the player and the display mode of the characters that are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and the timing when the battle effect is ended (allied character is defeated by the enemy character). It is recognized that the second setting suggestion effect suggesting the current setting value is to be executed according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing at which it is notified. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestive effect and the mode of the second setting suggestive effect are determined based on the number of times of the variable display after the control to the high base state (after the control to the battle RUSH mode).

  At this time, regarding the first setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion executed corresponding to the variation display (the 20th variation display after being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state) that was determined to be “presence change fall” It is decided in the same manner as the production.

  The effect control CPU 120 has determined that there is a probability variation fall within 30 times (20 times in this example) within 30 times (after controlling the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state. Based on the fact, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th variation display in the high base state, the background is determined to be the “full moon background” and the setting value is set to “6”. Based on this, it is determined that the number of stars to be displayed is set to 6. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (10), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of decorative symbols is started (timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 along with the number of the second reserved storages becoming 2, and displays the active display 01TM001 in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The first second reserved display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second reserved displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Furthermore, in response to the variable display currently being executed being the 100th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The character "0 times remaining" is displayed under (Battle RUSH). Since the player may be the last variable display executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode), the player will pay attention to the effect executed in the variable display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (11), the effect control CPU 120 sets “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is reached by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect for displaying the letters "reach!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5 in a red mode is executed (timing T12 shown in FIGS. 14-15).

  When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player is executed in the high base state including the variable display (battle RUSH mode) by displaying the letters “REACH!!” in red. In addition, it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the probability change has occurred due to the change display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 50 rotations) among the change displays thus far. Also, regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing the game, there is a possibility that the set value is in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual set value. Understand that (reliability is high). In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed a plurality of times with different execution timings, so that the first setting suggestion when the player is performing the fluctuation display in which the probability change falls is executed. Even if the production is overlooked, the first setting suggestion production to be executed again can be seen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (12), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach (FIG. 14-). (T13 timing shown in 15). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (the upper part of the image display device 5), "If defeated, RUSH ends. , If it is a draw, the character "RUSH continue" is displayed. That is, when the battle production in which the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends this time (100th variation display), and the battle production of the teammate character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When executed, it is an effect that shows the player that the high base state will continue after the next time (variable display after the 101st time).

  Although the player has not already been notified at this point of time that the probable variation fall has been suggested, it has not reached the point where he is convinced of the probable variation fall. Therefore, it is a situation in which it is not clearly known whether the high base state (low accurate high base state) ends or the high base state (high accurate high base state) continues. In such a situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the high base state (highly accurate high base state) continues.

  In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variation pattern of “out of super reach (defeat of battle)+indication suggestion effect”, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (13), the ally character 01TM100 is the enemy character. The battle effect of defeating 01TM110 is executed (timing of T14 shown in FIG. 14-15). At the timing when the teammate character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and a decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is “out” and that the high base state ends at the 100th variable display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing T15 shown in FIG. 14-15). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it is determined that “there is a sure change fall” in the correct change fall determination within 30 times after the control to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). The background is determined to be the “full moon background” and the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 6 based on the setting value being set to “6”. Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 causes the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 for notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended to be the “full moon background” and displays an image in which the number of stars is “6”. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "Battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

  The player recognizes that the battle RUSH mode (high base state) has ended by looking at the battle RUSH end image 01TM300. Then, since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is “full moon background” and the number of displayed stars is 6, it was executed in a high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the variable display. Among the variable displays so far, the variable display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations) is used to grasp that the change has occurred. Further, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing the game is 6, and the suggested set value (6) is an actual set value (reliability is 100%). Figure out

  In this way, although the player feels unfortunate by being informed that the high base state (battle RUSH mode) ends in the variable display, it has already fallen into a low probability state, but the suggested setting Since the value is high (6), it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. Although the high base state (battle RUSH mode) has ended, the player can expect the next big hit with a high probability, and therefore will continue to play with a motivation to generate a big hit.

  Next, the CPU 103 ends the low-probability high-base state and ends the low-probability low-base state based on the fact that the 100th variation display ends (after controlling the high-base state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. Control (normal state) (timing of T16 shown in FIG. 14-15). In addition, the production control CPU 120 terminates the second setting suggestion production, and at the same time, the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 has a decorative design "2", and the design display area 5C has a decorative design "3", a design display area. The decoration pattern "2" is fixedly stopped on 5R. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped.

  As described above, the CPU 103, after controlling the high-probability high-base state after the jackpot gaming state, determines that there is a "probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination, and accordingly changes corresponding to the probability variation fall determination. The game state is shifted to the low accuracy high base state at the timing when the display is started. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state after the jackpot game state is over, and then the "probability variation fall determination specified command" is issued. ", the battle RUSH mode is continued until the 100th variation display ends. In this way, by controlling the common production mode in the high-probability-high base state and the low-probability-high base state, the player can use only the background image of the decorative design and the reach production image (image relating to the battle production). It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the probability has fallen. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation after the probability change and to raise interest in the setting suggestion effect.

(Example of production in case of sudden change after 101 rotations)
14- 18, FIG. 14-19, and FIG. 14-20 are demonstrated. 14-18 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestive effect and the second setting suggestive effect, and FIGS. 14-19 and 14-20 show the first setting suggestive effect and the first setting suggestive effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image relevant to 2 setting suggestion effect. In the example shown below, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "2".

  First, as shown in FIG. 14-19(1), the effect control CPU 120 is supposed to execute the 99th variation display after being controlled to the high-accuracy/high-base state (battle RUSH mode). In the present example, in the state where the second number of reserved memories is 3, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (T1 shown in FIGS. 14-18). The fluctuation display started at the timing of is being executed. Further, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 01TM006 displays the three second reserved displays 01TM005.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the teammate character 01TM100 in the center of the image display device 5 and displays “Battle in the upper left part of the image display device 5 in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode. The letters "RUSH" are displayed. Furthermore, in response to the variable display currently being executed being the 99th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The word "1 time left" is displayed below (Battle RUSH).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “4” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in the state in which the second number of reserved memories is 3, and the symbol display. The decorative pattern "5" is fixed in the area 5C and the decorative pattern "2" is fixedly stopped in the pattern display area 5R. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped (timing T2 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “off” when executing the variable display for the 100th time after controlling to the high-accuracy high-base state, based on the second number of reserved memories being 3. Based on the above, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of “super reach loss (battle draw)”. That is, based on the fact that it is not determined that there is a probability variation fall by the probability variation fall determination by the 100th variation display, a variation pattern that does not accompany the setting suggestion effect is determined. Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control CPU 120, a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern “super reach loss (battle draw)”. The 100th variation display is executed in the highly accurate and high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 14-19(3), the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display of the image display device 5. In the area 5R, the variable display of the decorative design is started (timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 along with the number of the second reserved storages becoming 2, and displays the active display 01TM001 in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The first second reserved display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second reserved displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003 side. Furthermore, in response to the variable display currently being executed being the 100th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The character "0 times remaining" is displayed under (Battle RUSH).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(4), the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is reached by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the letters "REACH" are displayed in blue on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120, in the reach effect in the variation pattern not accompanied by the setting suggestion effect, based on the number of times of change display after the control in the battle RUSH mode (after the control in the highly accurate and high base state). The character to be displayed is determined to be either "REACH!!" or "REACH". Specifically, when it is 50 times or less after controlling the battle RUSH mode, the character to be displayed is determined to be "reach!!", and when it is 51 times or more after controlling the battle RUSH mode. Determines the character to be displayed as "REACH".

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color (mode) of the character to be displayed based on the display result in the reach effect in the variation pattern that does not accompany the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, when the display result is “out”, the blue mode is determined at a higher rate than when the display result is “big hit”, and when the display result is “big hit”, the display result is The red aspect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of “off”. Therefore, in the battle RUSH mode, it is difficult for the player to detect the presence or absence of the probability variation fall only by looking at the characters displayed at the timing when the reach state is established.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(5), the effect control CPU 120 starts the battle effect which is an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach (timing T5 shown in FIG. 14-18). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (the upper part of the image display device 5), "If defeated, RUSH ends. , If it is a draw, the text "RUSH continue" is displayed. That is, when the battle production in which the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state ends this time (100th variation display), and the battle production of the teammate character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When executed, it is an effect that shows the player that the high base state will continue after the next time (variable display after the 101st time).

  In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variation pattern of “super reach miss (battle draw)”, as shown in FIG. 14-19(6), the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are drawn. The battle effect ending with is executed (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 14-18). At the timing when the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 are drawn, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and a decorative symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the display area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is “out” and that the high base state continues from the next time (variable display after the 101st time).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “off” when executing the 101st variable display after controlling to the high-accuracy high-base state based on the second number of reserved memories being 2. Based on the above, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a “non-reach out” fluctuation pattern. Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern “non-reach loss” to the effect control CPU 120. The 101st variation display is executed in the highly accurate and high base state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-19(7), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 that was displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the second number of pending storages becomes 1, and at the same time, displays it in the second pending display area 01TM006. The first second reserved display 01TM005 that has been displayed is shifted to the active display area 01TM003, and the second and subsequent second reserved displays 01TM005 are shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Furthermore, the variable display currently being executed corresponds to the 101st variable display after the high base state is controlled (after the control in the battle RUSH mode). The word "remaining?" is displayed on the upper left (below "Battle RUSH"). The player may be the last variable display executed in the high base state (battle RUSH mode) during the period in which the characters "remaining?" are displayed, so the effect executed in the variable display Will pay attention to.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(8), when variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (Fig. It is assumed that at the timing of T9 shown in 14-18), a new start winning is generated for the winning ball apparatus 6B, and the number of second reserved memories becomes 2. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the number of second reserved memories has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  After that, it is assumed that the display result continuously becomes “out of focus” until the 123rd variable display is executed after controlling to the high base state. The gaming state during this period is a highly accurate and high base state.

  Next, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 is executing the 124th variation display after being controlled to the highly accurate and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In the present example, in the state where the second reserved memory number is 0, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols (T10 shown in FIGS. 14-18). The fluctuation display started at the timing of is being executed. Further, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(9), when variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (Fig. It is assumed that a new start winning is generated for the winning ball apparatus 6B at the timing of T11 shown in 14-18) and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the number of second reserved memories has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-19(10), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “5” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in the state in which the second reserved storage number is 1, and the symbol display. The decorative pattern "1" is fixed in the area 5C and the decorative pattern "2" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped (timing of T12 shown in FIGS. 14-18).

  Next, when the CPU 103 executes the variable display for the 125th time after controlling to the high-accuracy/high-base state based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that “probability-change-fall has occurred” in the probability-change fall determination. Based on the determination and the determination that the display result is “out”, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern “out of super reach (defeat of battle)+indication suggestion”. Then, the CPU 103 sets a set including a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern “super reach loss (battle defeat)+setting suggestion effect” and a probability variation fall determination result designation command that designates “presence variation fall”. The command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game state is shifted to the low accuracy low base state.

  Based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control receives the variation pattern designating command designating "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the ally character is the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value according to the battle effect that is defeated by the player and the display mode of the characters that are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and the timing when the battle effect is ended (allied character is defeated by the enemy character). It is recognized that the second setting suggesting effect that suggests the current setting value is to be executed according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when it is notified. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestive effect and the mode of the second setting suggestive effect are determined based on the number of times of change display after the control to the highly accurate and high base state (after the control to the battle RUSH mode).

  The performance control CPU 120 is determined to be "probable variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination after 61 times (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (125 times in this example). Based on this, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th variation display determined to have "probable change and fall" is determined to be "REACH", and the setting value is set to "2". It is assumed that the character “REACH!!” has been decided to be in the blue color mode based on the fact that the word “REACH!!” is present. In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines that there is a probability variation fall in the probability variation fall determination after 51 times (after controlling the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (125 times in this example). Based on what has been done, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 125th variation display in the high base state, it is determined that the background is “crescent moon background” and the setting value is set to “2”. It is decided that the number of stars to be displayed is set to 3 based on the fact that it is displayed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (11), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5R, variable display of decorative symbols is started (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the number of second reserved storages becomes 0, and displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the variable display currently being executed is the 125th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after the battle RUSH mode is controlled), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The word "remaining?" is displayed below (Battle RUSH).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (12), when variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (Fig. At the timing T14 shown in 14-18), it is assumed that a new winning prize for the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second reserved memory number has become 1. At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the number of second reserved memories has increased. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (13), the effect control CPU 120 sets “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is reached by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect for displaying the letters “REACH” in a blue mode on the upper portion of the image display device 5 is executed (timing T15 shown in FIG. 14-18).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of super reach (FIG. 14-). (T16 timing shown in 18). With the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and the message "Upon RUSH end if defeat" is displayed above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (upper part of the image display device 5). , A big hit if you win!” is displayed. That is, when the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the high base state is ended this time (125th variation display), and the battle effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Is an effect to show the player that the big hit game state is controlled.

  Although the player has not already been informed of the probability change fall by the first setting suggestion effect at this point in time, the player has not reached the point of convincing the probability change fall. Therefore, it is a situation in which it is not clearly known whether the high base state (high accurate high base state) ends or the high base state (high accurate high base state) continues. In such a situation, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the high base state (highly accurate high base state) continues. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the display result will be a "big hit".

  In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variation pattern of “out of reach (defeat of battle)+indication suggestion effect”, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (15), the ally character 01TM100 is the enemy character. The battle effect of defeating 01TM110 is executed (timing of T17 shown in FIG. 14-18). At the timing when the teammate character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and a decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative pattern "2" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player recognizes that the display result is “out” and that the high base state has ended in the 125th variable display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-20(16), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing of T18 shown in FIG. 14-18). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it is determined that “there is a certain probability fall” in 61 or more subsequent positive change slide determinations (after controlling in the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the high base state. , And the background is determined to be the “crescent moon background”, and the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 3 based on the setting value being set to “2”. Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image that is a “crescent moon background” and has a star count of “3” as the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 that notifies that the battle RUSH mode has ended. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "Battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, the CPU 103 continuously controls the low-probability low base state (normal state) based on the 125th variation display ending after the jackpot gaming state ends (after controlling to the high base state). (T19 timing shown in FIGS. 14-18). Further, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the second setting suggestion effect and at the same time, the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 has a decorative symbol "2", and the symbol display area 5C has a decorative symbol "3", a symbol display area. The decoration pattern "2" is fixedly stopped on 5R. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped.

  As described above, the CPU 103 controls the high-probability high-base state after the jackpot gaming state, and then determines that there is a "probability change fall" in the 101-th and subsequent probability change fall determinations, based on the probability change fall determination. The game state is shifted to the low-probability low-base state at the timing when the variable display corresponding to is started. After the jackpot gaming state, the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state, and then specifies the probability variation fall determination result corresponding to the 101st or later variation display. The battle RUSH mode is continued until the command specifies that there is a probability change fall, and the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed and the battle RUSH mode is executed with the variable display that is specified as "probability change fall". To finish. In this way, the setting suggestion effect is executed by making it possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect in the variable display that has triggered the game state to shift from the high accuracy state to the low accuracy state. It is possible to diversify the timing and improve the interest of the gaming machine in which the probability variation fall determination is executed.

  As described above, in the state where the battle RUSH mode corresponding to the high base state is controlled, when the battle effect is executed at the 100th time or the variable display after the 100th time, (1) the ally character is the enemy character. When the player wins, the display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. (2) When the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw, the display result becomes "outside", but in a high base state (battle RUSH mode) (3) When the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, the display result becomes “out”, and the high base state (battle RUSH mode) ends. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the battle effect executed corresponding to the variable display after the 100th time and the 101st time after the control in the battle RUSH mode.

(Variation example when the probability changes and falls within 100 fluctuations after the high-accuracy base state transition)
In the above-mentioned example, when it is determined that "there is a certainty change and fall" within 100 times after shifting to the high-precision and high-base state (battle RUSH mode), the change display that is determined as "there is a certainty change and fall" is displayed. Only the 1st setting suggesting effect is executed and the 2nd setting suggesting effect is not executed, but both the 1st setting suggesting effect and the 2nd setting suggesting effect are executed in the 100th variable display when the high base state ends. Not limited to such a form, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect may be executed in the variable display determined as “presence change fall”.

  In addition, in the above-described example, when it is determined that there is a “probable variation fall” within 100 times after the transition to the high-probability high-base state (battle RUSH mode), a variation display that is determined as “probability variation fall” However, the battle RUSH mode is continued for the effect mode. Not limited to such a form, when it is determined that "there is a probability change and fall" within 100 times after the transition to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode), the effect mode is changed to the low accurate high base state. It is also possible to change to another effect mode in which it is possible to grasp the fact.

  In the example below, when it is determined that there is a "probable change and fall" within 99 times after transitioning to the high-precision high-base state (battle RUSH mode), the variable display that is determined as "there is a sure-change and fall" is displayed. By executing the 1st setting suggestion effect and the 2nd setting suggestion effect, the next change display to the 100th change display are controlled to a chance time that can be grasped to be the low accurate high base state. FIG. 14-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the case where it is determined that there is a probability variation fall within the probability variation fall determination within 99 times after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 14-21, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. Is. Specifically, in the normal state (low accurate low base state), it is possible to control the normal mode in which the character is not displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and in the high accurate high base state, as described above, the background of the decorative pattern. It is possible to control the battle RUSH mode in which the ally character 01TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen as an image, and in the low accurate high base state, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 and 14-24 described later, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to control the chance time when the cloud is displayed at the top of the screen and the ally character 01TM100 is displayed at the center of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 14-21(C), the game state is controlled to the normal state (low accurate low base state), and when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variation display is started and the variation is changed. When the display result of the display is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled, after the big hit game state is finished, the game state is controlled to the highly accurate high base state, and the effect mode is controlled to the battle RUSH mode. It will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes the probability variation fall determination when starting the variable display in the state where the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate and high base state.

  Here, the CPU 103, in the high-accuracy high-base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-state state), the probability variation falls Based on the determination that there is no "probable variation fall" and the display result is "disappearance", the variation of the probability variation fall non-winning at the time of the highly accurate high base shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table.

  Further, the CPU 103, in the high-accuracy high-base state, if the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-state state), the probability variation fall determination 14-12(B), it is determined that there is no “probable variation fall” and that the display result is “big hit”. The variation pattern is determined based on the pattern determination table.

  The CPU 103 sends the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120 by including a probability variation fall determination result designation command that designates “no probability variation fall” in one set of commands. To do. Based on the fact that the control CPU 120 for receiving one set of commands has not received the probability variation fall determination result designation command for designating “with probability variation fall” after the battle RUSH mode transition (after the jackpot gaming state ends). Continue battle RUSH mode.

  On the other hand, the CPU 103, in the high-accuracy high-base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state), the probability variation fall determination On the basis that it is determined that "there is a probability change and fall" and that the display result is "disappearance", the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. . In this example, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the battle effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the display mode of the character displayed at the timing when the reach state is established suggests the current set value. 1st setting suggestion effect and 2nd setting which suggests the current setting value by the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when the battle effect ends (timing that the teammate character has been defeated by the enemy character) A variation pattern of "out of super reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect" in which the suggestion effect is executed is provided. In the example of FIG. 14-12(G), the variation pattern of “missing super reach (battle defeat)+improvement of setting” is determined at a rate of 100%.

  Further, the CPU 103, in the highly accurate high base state, when the variation display to be executed from now on is the variation display within the 99th time after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the highly accurate high base state), the certainty variation fall determination 14-12 (D) based on the determination that there is a "probable variation fall" and the display result is "big hit", it fluctuates based on the variation pattern determination table for the jackpot shown in FIG. Determine the pattern.

  The CPU 103 sends the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation pattern designation command to the effect control CPU 120 by including a probability variation fall judgment result designation command that designates “with probability variation fall” in one set of commands. To do. The production control CPU 120 that has received one set of commands receives the certainty variation fall judgment result designation command that designates “with certainty variation fall” in the state of controlling in the battle RUSH mode, and the battle RUSH mode is set this time. The display is ended with the change display of, and the next change display is changed to the chance time.

  The CPU 103 shifts the game state to the low-probability-high base state at the timing when the variable display is started based on the determination that “there is a probability variation fall” in the probability variation fall determination.

  In the low accurate high base state, the CPU 103 displays the display result as "disappearance" when the variable display to be executed is the variable display within 100 times after the end of the big hit game state (after the transition to the high base state). On the basis of the determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the deviation at the time of the low accurate height base shown in FIG.

  Further, when the variable display to be executed in the low-accurate high-base state is the variable display within the 100th time after the end of the big-hit gaming state (after the transition to the high-base state), the CPU 103 displays the display result as "big hit". 14-12(F), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of the low certainty and high base.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the low certainty high base state in response to the end of the 100th variation display after the jackpot gaming state ends (after controlling to the high base state). As a result, the variable display of the next time (101st after the end of the big hit game state) will be executed in the normal state (low accurate low base state). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the chance time in response to the 100th variation display ending (after the jackpot gaming state ends) after the battle RUSH mode has been entered. As a result, the variable display of the next time (101st after the end of the big hit game state) will be executed in the normal mode.

  FIG. 14-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first setting suggestive effect and the second setting suggestive effect, and FIGS. 14-23 and 14-24 show the first setting suggestive effect and the first setting suggestive effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|generation image relevant to 2 setting suggestion production. In the following example, it is assumed that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "6".

  First, as shown in FIG. 14-23(1), the effect control CPU 120 is assumed to execute the 19th variation display after being controlled to the highly accurate and high base state (battle RUSH mode). In this example, in the state in which the second reserved storage number is 0, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols (T1 shown in FIG. 14-22). The fluctuation display started at the timing of is being executed. Further, the active display area 01TM003 displays the active display 01TM001 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the teammate character 01TM100 in the center of the image display device 5 and displays “Battle in the upper left part of the image display device 5 in response to controlling the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode. The letters "RUSH" are displayed. Further, in response to the variable display currently being executed is the 19th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The word "81 times remaining" is displayed below (Battle RUSH).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(2), when variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (Fig. It is assumed that at the timing of T2 shown in 14-22), a new start winning is generated for the winning ball device 6B, and the second reserved memory number becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the number of second reserved memories has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 in the state in which the second reserved storage number is 1, and displays the symbol. The decoration symbol "4" is fixed in the area 5C, and the decoration symbol "6" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  Next, when the CPU 103 executes the variable display for the 20th time after controlling to the high-accuracy high-base state based on the fact that the second reserved storage number is 1, the CPU 103 determines that “probability variation fall” is present in the probability variation fall determination. Based on the determination and the determination that the display result is “out”, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern “out of super reach (defeat of battle)+indication suggestion”. Then, the CPU 103 sets a set including a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern “super reach loss (battle defeat)+setting suggestion effect” and a probability variation fall determination result designation command that designates “presence variation fall”. The command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game state is shifted to the low certainty high base state.

  Based on the fact that the CPU 120 for effect control receives the variation pattern designating command designating "super reach loss (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", the variation display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the ally character is the enemy character. The first setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting value according to the battle effect that is defeated by the player and the display mode of the characters that are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and the timing when the battle effect is ended (allied character is defeated by the enemy character). It is recognized that the second setting suggesting effect that suggests the current setting value is to be executed according to the display mode of the battle RUSH end image displayed at the timing when it is notified. Then, the mode of the first setting suggestive effect and the mode of the second setting suggestive effect are determined based on the number of times of change display after the control to the highly accurate and high base state (after the control to the battle RUSH mode).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 determines that there is a probability variation fall within 50 times (20 times in this example) within 50 times (after controlling the battle RUSH mode) after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state. Based on the determination, the character to be displayed in the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 20th variation display determined to have "probable change and fall" is determined to be "reach!!" and the set value is "6". It is assumed that it has been decided to set the character of “REACH!!” to a red form based on the setting of “.”. In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines that there is a probability variation fall within 30 times (20 times in this example) after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode) (20 times in this example). Based on what has been done, in the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 100th variation display in the high base state, it is determined that the background is the “full moon background” and the setting value is set to “6”. It is assumed that it is decided to set the number of stars to be displayed to 6 based on the fact that it is displayed. Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-23(4), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of decorative symbols is started (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received a set of commands including the probability variation fall determination result designation command designating "with probability variation fall", the variation display from the next time (from the 21st time onward) is executed in the low accuracy high base state. Based on this, it is decided to end the battle RUSH mode in the variable display executed this time (20th time) and shift to the chance time in the next and subsequent (21st time) variable display.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 01TM001 displayed in the active display area 01TM003 as the number of second reserved storages becomes 0, and also displays it in the second reserved display area 01TM006. The second hold display 01TM005 is shifted to the active display area 01TM003. Further, in correspondence with the variable display currently being executed is the 20th variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The word "80 times remaining" is displayed on the bottom of "Battle RUSH".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(5), when variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. At the timing T5 shown in 14-22), it is assumed that a new winning prize for the winning ball device 6B has occurred and the second number of reserved memories becomes 1. At this time, the CPU 103 sends a command indicating that the number of second reserved memories has increased to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the second hold display 01TM005 in the second hold display area 01TM006 based on the reception of the command indicating that the second hold storage number has increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(6), the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The reach state is reached by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of. Then, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first setting suggestion effect for displaying the letters "REACH!!" in the red mode on the image display device 5 is executed (timing T6 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  When the reach state is established in the battle RUSH mode, the player understands that the character “REACH!!” is displayed in a red mode, and thus there is a possibility that the variable display has fallen off. Also, regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing the game, there is a possibility that the set value is in the range of 4 to 6, and the suggested set value (4 to 6) is a value close to the actual set value. Understand that (reliability is high). In this way, although the player regrets that the effect suggesting that the probability variation has occurred is executed in the fluctuation display in which the probability variation has occurred, the set value may be high (4 to 6). Therefore, a decrease in game motivation is suppressed. Further, since the number of remaining variable display times that can be executed in the battle RUSH mode is relatively large (80 times), the player will be willing to play a big hit with the remaining number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 14-16(7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first setting suggestion effect and starts the battle effect that is an effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach (see FIG. 14-22). (T7 timing shown). Along with the execution of this battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110, and above the ally character 01TM100 and the enemy character 01TM110 (the upper part of the image display device 5), "If defeated, RUSH ends. , RUSH continues if it is a draw, and a big hit if it wins!" That is, when the battle production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the highly accurate high base state ends this time (19th variation display), and the battle between the ally character and the enemy character ends in a draw. When the effect is executed, the high-accuracy high-base state continues from the next time (variable display after the 20th time), and when the battle effect in which the ally character wins over the enemy character is executed, the display result is “big hit”. It is an effect that indicates to the player that it will be.

  Although the player has not already been notified at this point of time that the probable variation fall has been suggested, it has not reached the point where he is convinced of the probable variation fall. Therefore, it is a situation in which it is not clearly known whether the high-accuracy base state is ended or the high-accuracy base state is continued. In such a situation, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation by suggesting that the highly accurate and high base state continues.

  In this example, since the variable display is executed based on the variation pattern of "out of reach (battle defeat) + setting suggestion effect", as shown in FIG. 14-23 (8), the ally character 01TM100 is the enemy character. The battle effect of defeating 01TM110 is executed (timing of T8 shown in FIG. 14-22). At the timing when the teammate character 01TM100 is defeated by the enemy character 01TM110, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and a decorative symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5C. The decorative pattern "4" is stopped and displayed in the area 5R. As a result, the player understands that the display result is "disappeared" and the highly accurate state ends at the 20th variation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(8), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and executes the second setting suggestion effect (timing T9 shown in FIG. 14-22). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that it is determined that “there is a sure change fall” in the correct change fall determination within 30 times after the control to the high base state (after controlling to the battle RUSH mode). The background is determined to be the “full moon background” and the number of stars to be displayed is determined to be 6 based on the setting value being set to “6”. Based on this determination, the effect control CPU 120 causes the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 for notifying that the battle RUSH mode has ended to be the “full moon background” and displays an image in which the number of stars is “6”. . This battle RUSH end image 01TM300 includes the characters "Battle RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen.

  The player recognizes that the battle RUSH mode (high accuracy high base state) has ended by looking at the battle RUSH end image 01TM300. Then, since the battle RUSH end image 01TM300 is “full moon background” and the number of displayed stars is 6, it was executed in a high base state (battle RUSH mode) including the variable display. Among the variable displays so far, the variable display executed at a relatively early stage (1 to 30 rotations) is used to grasp that the change has occurred. Further, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 currently playing the game is 6, and the suggested set value (6) is an actual set value (reliability is 100%). Figure out

  In this way, although it is unfortunate for the player to be notified by being informed that the highly accurate and high base state (battle RUSH mode) ends in the fluctuation display, it is informed that it has already fallen into a certain probability and is in a low certainty state, but this is suggested. Since the set value is high (6), a decrease in game motivation is suppressed. Although the player has finished the high-accuracy high-base state (battle RUSH mode), he can expect the next big hit with a high probability, so he will continue to play with a willingness to generate a big hit.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “off” when performing the variable display for the 21st time after controlling to the high base state, based on that the second reserved storage number is 1. Then, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of “out of reach”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control CPU 120, a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern “non-reach loss”. This 21st variation display is executed in the low accurate high base state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (10), based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5. In the symbol display area 5R, variable display of decorative symbols is started (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the opportunity mode by controlling the effect mode to the chance time image 01TM400 related to the “full moon background” battle RUSH end image 01TM300 displayed in the second setting suggestion effect. In addition to being displayed as a background image, the teammate character 01TM100 is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and the character "Chance time" is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Further, in correspondence with the variable display currently being executed is the 21st variable display after the high base state is controlled (after controlling the battle RUSH mode), the upper left portion of the image display device 5 (“ The text "79 times remaining" is displayed below "Battle RUSH".

  After that, it is assumed that the display result continuously becomes “out of focus” until the 99th variable display is executed after the control to the high base state. The gaming state during this period is a low-probability-high base state.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines that the display result is “off” when executing the variable display for the 100th time after controlling to the high base state, based on the second number of pending storages being 4. Then, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of “out of reach”. Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control CPU 120, a set of commands including a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern “non-reach loss”. The 100th variation display is executed in the low accuracy and high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 14-24 (11), the effect control CPU 120, on the basis of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the area 5R (the variable display started at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 14-22).

  Next, the CPU 103 ends the low-probability high-base state and ends the low-probability low-base state based on the fact that the 100th variation display ends (after controlling the high-base state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. Control (normal state) (timing of T13 shown in FIG. 14-22). In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-24 (12), the effect control CPU 120 displays the character “Chance time end” at the center of the image display device 5 and displays it in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5. The decorative design "2", the decorative design "5" in the design display area 5C, and the decorative design "3" in the design display area 5R are fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns whose display result is "disappeared" is fixedly stopped.

  As described above, the CPU 103, after controlling the high-probability high-base state after the jackpot gaming state, determines that there is a "probability variation fall" in the probability variation fall determination, and accordingly changes corresponding to the probability variation fall determination. The game state is shifted to the low accuracy high base state at the timing when the display is started. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the battle RUSH mode in response to being controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state after the jackpot game state is over, and then the “probability variation fall determination” is issued by the probability variation fall determination result designation command. If it is specified, the battle RUSH mode is ended in the current fluctuation display, and the chance time is controlled until the 100th fluctuation display is ended from the next fluctuation display. In this way, by controlling different production modes in the high-probability-high base state and the low-probability-high base state, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the probable variation has fallen.

  In this way, when the probability change falls within 99 times after being controlled to the high-accuracy base state, the player moves to the chance time from the next change display, so that the player is in the high-accuracy base state (battle RUSH mode). It is possible to recognize how many times the fluctuation display has been made after the control is performed, so that the certainty change falls. The smaller the number of fluctuations displayed when the probability variation falls (the more the probability variation falls faster in the Battle RUSH mode), the shorter the period in the high-precision state and the longer the period in the low-precision state. The first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed as the effects associated with the probability change and falling fluctuation display. In the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the earlier the timing when it is determined that there is a “probability change fall” in the probability change fall determination is (the number of fluctuation display times after being controlled to the highly accurate high base state (battle RUSH mode)). The smaller the number), the higher the reliability of the setting suggestion, so that it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect that acts on the corresponding display (active display, hold display) as described above during the period of being controlled to the high base state (high accurate high base state, low accurate high base state). It is possible to execute (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, third change suggestion effect) and then execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the correspondence display. Here, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the execution ratio of the change effect may be changed depending on whether or not the probability change falls (whether or not it is in the low-probability-high base state). In addition, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the change effect execution rate may be changed according to the set value that is set.

  For example, in the high accurate high base state, the change effect execution rate when the change suggestion effect is executed is 90%, whereas in the low accurate high base state, the change suggestion effect is executed. The execution ratio of the change effect is set to 50% (when the set value is 1 to 3) or 10% (when the set value is 4 to 6). That is, in the high-accuracy high-base state, the display mode of the correspondence display is likely to change when the change suggestion effect is executed, but in the low-accuracy high-base state, the display mode of the correspondence display is performed when the change suggestion effect is executed. Is hard to change. Further, in the low accurate high base state, when the change suggestion effect is executed, if the set value is low (when the set value is 1 to 3), the display mode of the correspondence display is relatively easy to change, When the value is high (when the set value is 4 to 6), the display mode of the correspondence display is relatively difficult to change. According to such a configuration, during the period in which the low jackpot rate is low and the low-probability-high base state is controlled, even if the change suggestion effect is executed, it is difficult to execute the change effect, and the corresponding display is changed unnecessarily. While suppressing the feeling of expectation without doing it, it is possible to suggest that it is a high setting because the change effect is difficult to be executed even if the change suggestion effect is executed, so it is possible to improve the motivation to continue the game. You can

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the set value that is set. For example, when the set value that is set is high (in the case of 4 to 6), the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the set value that is set is low (in the case of 1 to 3). May be. On the contrary, when the set value is set low (1 to 3), the setting suggestion is set at a higher rate than when the set value is set high (4 to 6). You may make it perform production.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the scope of claims for patent, and it is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of claims for patent and all modifications within the scope.

  In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display (variable display of special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol, variable display of small symbol) and has a specific effect. Corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display when the display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed. An effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) that acts on the display, and when executing the effect effect, the specific effect. It is possible to change the visibility of the display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the blackout effect is executed as the first change suggestion effect is executed, and the reach effect is executed. The movable body 01TM050 is operated while keeping the image (image relating to the battle effect) in a visually difficult state, and further, a suggestive effect suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) (for example, , A reach effect), a suggestion effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control), and a title notifying means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect (for example, reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-2(D) or FIG. 8-2(F)). The portion for displaying the title), and the suggestive effect execution means, as the suggestive effect, at least a first suggestive effect (eg, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (eg, super reach D or super reach Reach effect of E) can be executed, and the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestive effect from the start of the second suggestive effect in the second suggestive effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 8-2 (H), a portion which displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D) gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause an unexpectedness and improve the interest. Further, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the interest and the effect of the production, the gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player (for example, a pachinko game) Machine 1), which is capable of executing a suggestion production (e.g., reach production) suggesting that it is controlled to the advantageous state, and a suggestion production execution means (e.g., CPU 120 for production control) and a title corresponding to the suggestion production. And a title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title, and the title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(D) or FIG. 8-2(F), the portion for displaying the title of the reach effect), the suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, at least a first suggestion effect (for example, super reach). A reach effect of A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) can be executed. The title corresponding to the second suggestive effect is notified from the start of the suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), from the start of the reach effect of super reach D to the reach effect of super reach D). A portion for displaying the corresponding title 31AK007) A gaming machine. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. Next, the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge which constitutes a gaming board surface. Board 2 and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The glass door frame 207SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) to unlock it, and a player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L in which game balls can flow down. The right side of the image display device 5 in 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game balls can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a relatively weakly launched (left hitting) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. The game ball that has been hit out more strongly (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down is a game area that flows down after passing through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5.

  In addition, the general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R, the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can be won at the first start winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won and the passage gate 41 can be passed.

  As shown in FIG. 15-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Is becoming

  As shown in FIGS. 15-2 and 15-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) etc. which will be described later in the set value changed state. A setting switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. As will be described later in detail, the setting value change state in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ) Is also.

  The setting switching main body portion provided with an operating unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 are included. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. By using the game machine frame 207SG003 to open, it becomes possible to operate. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON/OFF switching operation, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

  Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front surface of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-1 and FIG. 15-2, at a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of performing variable display of 1 special map, second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of performing variable display of second special symbol, first hold display capable of displaying first reserved memory number 207SG025A, a second holding display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second number of reserved storages, a normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing a variable display of the ordinary symbols, a general figure holding display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of ordinary figure holdings, In a gaming state in which a round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hitting game (big hitting type) during a big hitting game, a high basing state (time saving state), a big hitting game state, or the like, is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in a probability variation state, and a time saving lamp 207SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are collectively arranged.

  As shown in FIGS. 15-3 and 15-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed with a common combination. ing.

  In the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is a variable display with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is different from the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, although the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different. At least a part of the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed and the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 15-5, in the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED on the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LEDs in the pending display corresponding to the variable display are moved in a predetermined shift direction (characteristics of the present embodiment) in response to the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage. In part 207SG, the light goes out toward the left).

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. It is like this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the LED at the left end of the first reservation indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is set to 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Then, the variable display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are provided a total of three big hit types: a big hit A which is a 5 round big hit, a big hit B which is a 10 round big hit, and a big hit C which is a 15 round big hit. However, which of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the type of jackpot.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  The effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 operable between the respective origin positions and the effect positions during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect this is connected.

  FIG. 15-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15-8(A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command that specifies variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 15-8(B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data is set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-8(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times the round is executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting mouth winning designation command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  15-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 15-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  It should be noted that although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 15-9, the present invention is not limited to this and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 15-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 15-10, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high, so that the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are set. It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number for determining the pattern type, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-10, the form in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, it is a variation pattern that causes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set is 3 as a variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, a pseudo continuous production is performed 3 times and a variation pattern that becomes super-reach loss...

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 15-11 to 15-13, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 15-11(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 15-11(B), and FIG. -11(C) display result determination table (set value 3), FIG. 15-12(A) display result determination table (set value 4), FIG. 15-12(B) display result determination table ( Setting value 5), display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 15-12(C), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 15-13(A), FIG. 15-13( B) big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in, big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, loss variation pattern determination table, public figure display result determination table (not shown), universal figure A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases gradually. In other words, the set value is the largest value of 6, which is the most unfavorable value to the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the amusement hall side becomes. Become.

  15-11(A) to FIG. 15-11(C) and FIGS. 15-12(A) to 15-12(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special drawing and the second special drawing is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 15-11(A) to FIG. 15-11(C) and FIG. 15-12(A) to FIG. 15-12(C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more determination values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of the “big hit” than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, and setting is Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, 1/200 when the setting value is 6), the special map display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, 1/120 when the setting value is 5, and 1/100 when the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state and the set value. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-11(A) to FIG. 15-11(C) and FIG. 15-12(A) to FIG. 15-12(C), regardless of the game state and the set value, The probability that it is determined to control the small hit game state by setting the special figure display result to "small hit" is set to 1/200. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as “small hit” regardless of the set value and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control the small hitting game state as the “small hit” as the special figure display result may be different according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result being "big hit" is the highest. The lower the value of the set value, the larger the value of the set value is assigned the judgment value so that the probability of being determined to control the big hit game state as "big hit" is set (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5>set value 4>set value 3>set value 2>set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 15-11(A) to 15-11(C) and FIG. 15-12. If any of the hit judgment values corresponding to the big hit shown in (A) to FIG. 15-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special design is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIGS. 15-11(A) to 15-11(C) and FIGS. 15-12(A) to 15-12(C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 15-11(A) to 15-11(C) and FIGS. 15-12(A) to 15-12(C) is the probability (ratio) of being a big hit and the small hit. Indicates the probability (rate) of Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B stop symbols in It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 causes the display results shown in FIG. 15-11(A) to FIG. 15-11(C) and FIG. It is designed to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit using a judgment table. Whether or not to make a small hit may be individually determined.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  15-13(A) and 15-13(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 15-13 (A) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 15-13 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low accuracy high base state, and the big hit game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time reduction control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a probable variation big hit) are set to shift to the high-accuracy and high-base state.

  The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to a first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment), or a special number of times of the predetermined number of times. Before the figure game is executed, the jackpot game state is entered and the game ends.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, so the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hit A to big hit C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2. You may provide less than four types or four or more types.

  As shown in FIG. 15-13(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), if the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15-13(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the setting value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability variation control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, if the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as big hit B. The example that does not do, that is, that the jackpot type determination rate is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot type is not determined (determination rate is 0%). Although included, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, there may be provided a case of determining the big hit type as big hit B. .

  In this way, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined by using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability is increased, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game playability is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, if the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, the game ball during the big hit game, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 While the gaming state after the big hit game is finished is controlled to a probable state on the basis of passing, the game characteristic in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map (so-called V If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on passing a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6). ..

  Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the case of the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used to change the game state based on the fact that the game state has changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch. It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “miss” are prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIGS. 15-15(A) and 15-15(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (big hit B, big hit C) used when the big hit types are big hit B and big hit C, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (big hit) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIG. 15-15(A), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits A), when the set value is “1”, one of the ranges 1 to 997 of the judgment values of MR3 is set. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 380 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 360 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 821 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 340 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 320 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 300 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 775. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 15-15(B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is from 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is "2", 1 to 180 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the setting value is "4", from the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are set. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits. When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of super-reach α jackpot, and 391 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 101 to 350 are set. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit are assigned, and the variation patterns 351 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. And the set values become lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the determination value is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super-reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-15(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for small hits. With the set values 1 to 6, the variation pattern of small hits may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table for the loss, the variation pattern determination table A for the loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not in the time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within a range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of β-miss (PA2-3).

  As shown in FIG. 15-16(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low-base medium total pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 431 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “4”, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, and 391 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “5”, 1 to 370 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 350 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach that correspond to a total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 15-16(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 481 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "4", 1 to 440 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 420 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “6”, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 401 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 15-16(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) in the range of the MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, which is a range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 15-10(D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Are set to be lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 of the determination values are the super reach β loss. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by the common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as variation patterns for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the determination rate of the variation pattern of these super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss is between each set value. May differ by a slight difference (for example, about 1%).

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that has been set, but is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the loss variation determination rate and the super reach β loss variation determination rate may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value that is set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value that is set.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that has been set. Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. That is, if the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

  The fluctuation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-miss variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), and the non-reach-loss variation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 15-10). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach-miss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, and the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without a long shortening of the fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display becomes longer.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-16(A) to 15-16(C), fluctuations are made by using different fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss according to the total number of pending storages. Although the form for determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first The number of special symbols pending storage, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of pending storage numbers of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach loss. The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display is actually performed in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss (variation pattern of the super-reach loss). The appearance rate of) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the variation display is performed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the example is different. The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display shows the variation of the super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 15-2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like. Further, the data according to the control state and the data showing the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data showing the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize ball device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet Hold data of the game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the 1st special figure reservation storage section associates with the reservation number in the winning order (detection order of the game ball) to the first start winning port, and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like, as reserved data, It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not been started yet. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning number into the second starting winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with the holding number, and establishes the second starting condition in passing (entry) of the gaming ball. Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like, as reserved data, It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize due to the above may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and may be stored in association with the holding number. ..

  The ordinary figure reservation storage unit stores the retained information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 15-17(A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed at the time of testing the pachinko gaming machine 1 by using the non-test target area in the entire area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102. ..

  On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 15-17(B) and FIG. 15-17(C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every out 6000 balls in the full game state. Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), base 1 that is a base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the second out-of-6000 ball normal state (low-probability low base state), and the third out-of-6,000-ball normal state in every gaming state (low-probability low base state) Base 3, which is the base value calculated in step 3, can be displayed. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

  When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, in order to display "bL." which is an abbreviation for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of “00” to “99”) are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b1.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Further, when the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b2.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b3.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 15-19, the main board 11 executes control for switching the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at 5 second intervals. The display color of each base value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set to "5" is displayed, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. 15-20 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

  When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process to be described later was being executed before the power failure (power failure occurred during execution of the setting value changing process). It is determined whether or not (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is executed. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

  When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 being ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

  When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value changing process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 and the RAM clear flag is executed. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011;N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up this time (whether the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed) ( 207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Recovery processing for returning to the state (207SGSa015) is performed.

  In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) or the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine is operated while the clear switch is operated. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

  When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  In addition, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. Notification of cold start is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

  After the execution of 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to take a timer interrupt at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and interrupts are enabled (207SGSa030). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 tells the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), recovery from power failure during setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), the process shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B included in the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a set value error and recovery from power interruption during setting change (error notification). , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-27(B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs configuring the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk in the game hall, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is executed to notify the occurrence of an error.

  In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the display monitor 207SG029, the first when the abnormal set value is set, or when the power is restored during the change of the set value. Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are executed to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk at the amusement hall, etc. generates an error from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and sets the set value. It is possible to recognize that the power was cut off during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power interruption during the change of the set value can be recognized by the gaming machine management device, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

  In the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008. If the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y) instead of after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa02; Y or 207SGSa02; Y may be executed.

  FIG. 15-21(A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the flow proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the Address is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

  In the RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-21(B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area. Of these storage areas, a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and a second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). At other addresses (F003 and later), special figure holding storage, general figure holding storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. .. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change processing by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, the RAM clearing process in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment is a process of clearing the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

  Note that the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is set in the game control microcomputer. By storing it in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

  FIG. 15-22 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments forming the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 15-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 15-6) according to the setting value changing process. Is turned on (207SGSa052a).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any one of the setting values 1 to 6 is stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Is set to "1" (setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any one of 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 as the set value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when the setting switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 of the RAM 102 is set based on the operation of the setting switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. A value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a setting value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value. If the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends (207SGSa067), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  When the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and the value is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value stored in the address F001 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is stored in the address F000. Store (207SGSa071), and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

  FIG. 15-23 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa102, see FIG. 15-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 15-6) according to the set value confirmation process. Is turned on (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109) and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are also displayed. All the segments that make up are turned off (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

  Thus, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display device 207SG131, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second By starting blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that confirmation is in progress.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing, among the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing. Although the mode in which only one LED is turned on is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 15-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or jackpot C.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-27(A), at the start of the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, a mode corresponding to the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing is performed. As an example, an example is shown in which the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 can change the set value. The lights may be turned on in different modes at the start of the process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By turning ON the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value changing process is executed.

  At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 15-25(A) to 15-25(E), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 15-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened. By setting (clear switch is OFF), the setting value confirmation processing is executed.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 15-25(A), FIG. 15-25(B) and FIG. 15-25(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 15-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for a game.

  FIG. 15-24 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply disconnection signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS081; N), the processing is ended, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (207SGS083). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Incidentally, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. After that, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

  Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

  FIG. 15-29 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting.

  Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

  When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information in the player information input process described later After the input of information is accepted, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, the number of big hits, (207 SGS 409) while clearing the information including the number of times of super-reach, etc., and notifying that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-36(A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared. A notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of displaying the game effect lamp 9, emitting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related notification process for executing notification of being in operation (notification of setting value change) and notification of setting value confirmation (setting value confirmation notification) is executed (207SGS412).

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state. The state in which the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is generally open, and a clerk of the game hall or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. In other words, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game arcade who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Therefore, as the notification of the change of the set value and the notification of the set value being confirmed, the pachinko game machine can be used by a clerk of the game hall to change or check the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is starting in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

  The effect control CPU 120 also performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body initialization for performing the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to be executed (see FIGS. 15-35).

  Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34. FIG. 15-33 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIGS. 15-34 are explanatory views showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 15B is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

  The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect positions (second positions), and from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the returning movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

  When the first movable body initializing process or the second movable body initializing process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the detected portions of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332, that is, the movable body is movable. If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 is moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, during transportation or installation on a game island, or if the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the performance is performed, the motor is removed). The movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 could not be confirmed to return to the origin or could not operate due to adjustment, failure, catching, etc. (such as when a movable body error (operation abnormality) occurred), and the machine moved from the origin position due to vibration. If the position is other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as the position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIGS. 15-22), the origin is returned. To execute the non-detection operation control. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

  Next, the control speed set when the production control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 15-34(A) and 15-34(B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the movable body 207SG321. , 207SG322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set in one movement section and the other movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section In the case where the mode is different between the other moving section and the other moving section (for example, a section with a spring and a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or a case where the same moving section rises and falls, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 The actual operating speed of may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the movable bodies 207SG321 are different. , 207SG322 does not necessarily have the same actual operating speed. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, the size, weight, When there are differences in the operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 15-34(A), when performing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, the control is performed such that after accelerating from the origin position, decelerating and stopping at the effect position, and accelerating from the effect position, decelerating and stopping at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change from high speed to low speed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120, when executing an effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, is the first speed minimum speed (low speed) and the second speed higher than the minimum speed (high speed). Since each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of and, even when executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within a range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is also faster.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are set to the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the operation is performed at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the operation is performed at the maximum speed. It will be described as one that operates.

  Here, the control speed is set such that the operating speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the original position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG321, by controlling so as to be the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. The origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 detect the detected portion after the 207SG322 is surely decelerated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-34(B), when performing the non-detection time operation control, the effect control CPU 120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control to be less than or equal to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic portion 207SG of the form, the speed is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control. Control for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is performed.

  In this case, it is unclear how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. Therefore, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed. If the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 returns to the origin position when it is operated at a control speed when accelerated, that is, at high speed, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion or move from a short distance. Since the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are returned to the origin position and their movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. should be operated at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control.

  Returning to FIG. 15-29, after execution of the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. Of the setting value or the setting value early change end flag indicating that the confirmation of the setting value has been completed is determined (207SGS415). If the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207 SGS 417. When the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process of 207SGS416 is not executed and the process proceeds to 207SGS417.

  In 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If it is (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change end It is determined whether the flag is set (207SGS420).

  In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as 207SGS413. ) And the second movable body initialization processing (207SGS423) which is the same processing as 207SGS414, and the first movable body initialization processing (207SGS422) and 207SGS414 and the second movable body initialization processing (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) advances to 207SGS427.

  As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. The setting value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started from the time when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed. To execute. As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 15-35(A), after the completion of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification. When the command is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are finished after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is finished, the first movable body initialization process is performed again. The second movable body initialization process is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15-35(B), in the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing, only the first movable body initialization processing is finished, and effect control is performed. When the CPU 120 for use receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. When the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in a state where there is no such state, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It is like this.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15-35(C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization processing is not yet completed. In this case, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in a state where the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initializing process that are being executed are performed. Only the initialization processing is executed, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed again.

  If the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command have not been received by the 207SGS 411 (207SGS 411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error specification command has been received (207SGS 425). . When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification processing (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N), , 207 SGS403.

  As the error notification in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-36(D), if the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error identified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5, Good.

  Thus, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, the player information (the player information While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach, etc., from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) ) And set value information (any one of the values "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value changing state or the setting confirming state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

  Then, in 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as the initial design with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5 " The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ,” and “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. When set, a decorative value is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial design at a higher rate than when a setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous for the player, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ,” and “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or the set value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, “1”) is set. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R is set depending on whether a set value (eg, “6”) advantageous to the player is set or a set value unfavorable to the player (eg “1”) is set. The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

  Then, returning to FIG. 15-29, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead preview effect in the first four changes (207SGS428). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (207SGS431). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. Notification may be performed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value check end notification command. Depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the activation notification mode is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-32, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  When a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  That is, the specific control in the present invention means that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the CPU 120 for effect control emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R. It includes both performing the output of B.

  Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds. The output sound C is output, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). It should be noted that the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a gaming machine management computer or each counter, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification when the above, the external output terminal may output a signal capable of specifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is common. Although there is illustrated a mode (in both cases, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the start is started in the start, the cold start, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the image display device 5 is displayed). The message image is displayed at, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a signal may be output from the aforementioned external output terminal to the management device).

  Also, the notification mode in each device that executes the startup notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the opened state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (for the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting changing” is displayed on the image display device 5, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started up at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals described above, the terminals for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the setting value change ends (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received). A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period) to the management apparatus, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management apparatus as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The startup notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the command. You may provide the command which does not perform start notification.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. The form in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as such initialization effects. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part thereof may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, in any of the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, is activated by cold start, is activated in the setting change state, and is activated in the setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 15-29, the effect control CPU 120 then executes power-off detection processing (207 SGS 432 ). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 15-37, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS441; N), the process is ended, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS441; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Returning to FIG. 15-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 15-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, a production random number updating process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot pattern determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) for receiving an input of player information, and a game. A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information and a performance information totaling process (207SGS438) for totaling performance information are executed. After that, the process moves to a loop process of monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429).

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to generate a password (a password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server, so that the pachinko game machine is played. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time variation display, big hit game, and super reach are executed. To do.

  Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-38, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after performing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

  In addition, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is either "0" or "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetching restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177 (according to the effect control process flag). (See FIG. 7). By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the activation, execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and thus the variable display is performed four times. Although the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 starts the winning a prize determination process (FIG. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays by not executing (see 5).

  As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game are set as settings related to the game progress based on the fact that the game is possible. The light amount of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the factory default state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, It is possible to execute the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as the second suggestion effect, and at the time of executing the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the super reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the present embodiment also includes Invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, so that it is not possible to appropriately notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22),
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 207SG that solves the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22),
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, a portion that lights up all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B),
further,
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). To a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 15-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Further, as a game machine described in means B of invention 207SG that solves the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). To a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 15-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, a portion that lights up all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B),
further,
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display section during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 and 15-27. In, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, and the display mode when the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is Different parts)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the variable display section (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). (A part that lights up all the segments that configure the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is configured by a plurality of small display sections that can be independently turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each configured by eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing that it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, all the small display sections are displayed in a lighting state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (The part that lights up all the constituent segments)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the game machine is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as a gaming machine described in means 6 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shoots a game medium to a gaming area (for example, a left gaming area 207SG002L and a right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game,
The information display unit includes a firing direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the firing direction of the game medium in the game area,
When the setting state or the confirmation state is set, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-27(A), (The part where the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the launch direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 7 of invention 207SG,
A holding storage unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
When the setting state or the confirmation state is set, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. A game machine characterized in that all the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state and the set value confirmation state are blinked) is described. For example, it is possible to make a suitable notification on the hold display unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 8 of Invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion that lights only one of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform a suitable notification in the number of times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 9 of Invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage unit (for example, an area of an address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection unit when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) is established that includes a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) of the gaming machine detected by the detection means when the power is turned on. While the game is being executed, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied with the deletion of the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 15-21A) is executed. Is feasible,
A second condition (for example, a clear switch is ON and a lock switch) that includes a special state (for example, a clear switch ON state) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means. When 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial condition is executed when the first condition is satisfied. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a portion capable of executing the RAM clear processing and the set value change processing),
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21(A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). (No part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 9 of the invention 207SG applicable to the gaming machines described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 207SG described above are the gaming machines described in the means A and the means B of the invention 207SG described above. Can also be applied to.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display section (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-27(B)). In the case where a setting value error has occurred, all the segments composing the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked)
According to this feature, according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display section that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine. Since this is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied but a predetermined error has occurred.

Further, as a gaming machine described in means A of invention 208SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display section (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-27(B)). In the case where a setting value error occurs, all the segments composing the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked),
further,
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
According to this feature, according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display section that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine. Since this is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied but a predetermined error has occurred. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, a setting value abnormality error). According to this feature, the setting value is set. It is possible to preferably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and that the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If an electric power failure occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is settled, an error relating to the storage area in which the setting value is stored occurs at the time of restoration from the power failure. Even if it does not exist, a display capable of specifying that an error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is cut off during the setting change as shown in FIG. Part to blink all the segments that make up the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to re-set the set value due to the occurrence of power failure before the set value is confirmed without newly setting an error. It can be suitably notified.
The gaming machine described in the means 2 to 3 of the invention 208SG that can be applied to the gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 208SG described above can also be applied to the gaming machine described in the means A of the invention 208SG described above. it can.

The present embodiment also includes invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and information display means for confirming the set value are provided. There is a problem in that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if each is separately provided. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 209SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information on the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 15-17(C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying set value information capable of specifying the set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different between when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used. When the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (A part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information about the game value, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 209SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information on the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 15-17(C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying set value information capable of specifying the set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used. When the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit 207SG029D is used only),
further,
Variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols) can be executed.
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information about the game value, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information capable of specifying that an error has occurred in at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-26(B), When a setting value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 15-25(A) and 15-26(B)). As shown in FIG. 7, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display both display the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and display the occurrence of an abnormal error. Part 207SG029D) (the part that uses the part 207SG029D) is described. According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred regarding the storage area in which the setting value is stored, and to set the setting value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, each of the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D is 8). Part consisting of individual segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine at power-on
The information display means, when the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, a clear switch is ON), the information display means includes the small units that configure each display unit. All of the display units are turned on to be in the all-lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-26(A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit). 207SG029D is a part that repeats all blinking and all extinguishing (flashing) of all the segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 4 of invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine at power-on
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detecting means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 15-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.
The gaming machines described in the means 2 to 4 of the invention 209SG that can be applied to the gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 209SG described above can also be applied to the gaming machine described in the means A of the invention 209SG described above. it can.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed during the change of the set value, the operator may overlook the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirming operation again after the setting value changing operation is completed. In this case, when the setting value changing operation is completed during the first movable body confirming operation, the changing operation is completed. There is a problem that a new confirmation operation of the movable body is started from the timing, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When a specific condition is established, the setting value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a clear switch and a lock switch are activated). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the state is changed to the setting state. It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35, the effect control CPU 120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 15-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 210SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When a specific condition is established, the setting value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a clear switch and a lock switch are activated). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the state is changed to the setting state. It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35, the effect control CPU 120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state is ended while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 15-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (A portion in which the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed),
further,
Variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols) can be executed.
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35, the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation From the timing when the start notification command is received, a part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state is ended while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 15-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as a game machine described in means B of invention 210SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 15-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-20, cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35, the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation From the timing when the start notification command is received, a part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
When the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 15-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (A portion in which the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed),
further,
Variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols) can be executed.
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated while the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) is in a visually difficult state.
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to cause unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. Can be done before executing the control,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the end of the return operation (for example, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process). In, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after ending the non-detection automatic operation control)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 210SG,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the control means sets the state or the setting state when the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35(C), the effect control CPU 120 has received a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command). If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the above, the first movable body initialization is newly performed after the second movable body initialization processing is executed. (Processing and second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, if the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy a predetermined condition, confirmation operation control is executed due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state ( For example, as shown in FIG. 15-35(B), the first movable body initialization process based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command ends, and When the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly performed after the completion of the second movable body initialization processing. (The part that executes the movable body initialization process in order)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 210SG,
A plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies that have completed the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition, The confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35(C), the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the On the other hand, a portion in which the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has ended does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state ends. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35(B), the production control CPU 120 receives a set value change start notification command or a set value check start notification command. If the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization processing based on the above, the second movable body initialization processing is executed. (A portion for newly executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in sequence after the end of)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 5 of the invention 210SG applicable to the gaming machines described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 210SG described above are the gaming machines described in the means A and the means B of the invention 210SG described above. Can also be applied to.

  The characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, ordinary The embodiment is constituted by the symbol display 207SG020, the universal figure hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the set value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. There may be a case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether there is a setting value confirmation process or not. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by turning on all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state (lighting Aspect) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, if these first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to turn on some of the segments that constitute the display device 207SG004B.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display device 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The example is one in which the lighting of one segment is performed and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and all the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked. Instead, in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, the first holding display 207SG025A and the second holding display 207SG025B are formed. The blinking of all the segments to be performed may not be executed or only a part thereof may be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 15-6, the number of lit segments of the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is plural. It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinking to notify that a setting value error has occurred.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The display monitor 207SG029 may not be included in the machine 1. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. ..

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization processing is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization processing or a second movable body initialization processing is executed. Although the mode for deciding whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can inform that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. ..

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during game" may include different blinking periods, luminance, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the mode in which the non-detection operation control of each movable body and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command The actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by turning on or blinking the round indicator 207SG131 and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not the one, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, in the vicinity of the game information display unit 207SG200) with an explanatory note that lighting or blinking is performed. By doing in this way, a clerk of the game arcade who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a first special symbol display device 207SG004A, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B, a first hold indicator 207SG025A, a second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process.

  FIG. 16-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing in the characteristic unit 10F. 16A, the same processes as those in FIGS. 15-22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 15-20, the RAM clear process is executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) is executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change processing (207SGa013b), no information regarding the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the characteristic unit 10F, description will be made on the assumption that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 16-3. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 15-22 is executed.

  In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 16-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or the provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 15-22 is executed.

  FIG. 16-2 is a flowchart showing the set value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. 16-2, the same processes as those in FIG. 15-23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 16-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 16-1. After the game stop start process, lighting of all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). After that, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 15-23 is executed.

  Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 16-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 16-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 15-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period related to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops the counting of these timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

  The V-lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain-variable state on the basis of passing a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of a sensor for detecting the V probability change and is controlled to be in an open state and a closed state. In the V-probable variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. An area in which the V lid is opened is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning which determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103, after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state, has passed through a predetermined switch with a game ball (a prize is entered in the special winning opening just before the closing of the special winning opening door and predetermined. A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

  The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. . The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from the open state of the variable winning ball device 6B to the closed state by the electric Chu opening time timer. .

  The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

  The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the fanfare production is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production is performed as a production operation for informing the start of the jackpot gaming state after the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

  The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

  The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 16-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is in operation (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not in operation (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process of invalidating various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, a process of invalidating detection of various errors, It includes a process for invalidating the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 16-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is ended. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the power-chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for enabling the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is changing to the open state. Of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmed state is subtracted to advance the game. Can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  As shown in FIG. 16-1 to FIG. 16-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the period of the inter-round interval period timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the completion, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

  As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the CPU 103 determines that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. And stops the time measurement of the valid period of the power cable open time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

  As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the variable display of the special symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 16-1 to FIG. 16-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the general-use variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed. And restarts the measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare production is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare production being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

  As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the ending confirmation is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirming state. ..

  As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding the modification of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.
To do.

  The game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special pattern and the decorative pattern has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on the fact that a game ball has won (V-winning) a special winning port (V winning port) It may be applied to a game machine (mixing machine of one and two kinds) in which and are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

  In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is determined to be valid. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting game state in the setting confirming state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-4, the same control may be executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on being controlled to a setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

  The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in a display error, the special figure variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. . In this way, for the big hit display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviating display result does not cause a disadvantage to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

  The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions relating to the characteristic portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarting the time measurement of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 10A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing),
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. Stop and restart the timing of the attacker release time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols) can be executed.
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated with the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) being in a visually difficult state.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to generate an unexpected effect and improve the interest.

In addition, you may make it suggest a setting value with the aspect of the effect production which acts on a correspondence display. For example, the effect mode in the action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) is selected from a plurality of types each time the action effect is executed by lottery or the like, and each effect mode is set according to the set value that is set. By making the selection ratio different, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is to carry out the action effect in the particular type of effect mode. By doing so, the effect mode of the effect effect is rich in variation, and moreover, since the player can be given an opportunity to infer the set value by the appearance ratio of each effect effect effect mode, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. You can
Further, when the action effect is executed, the set value suggestion effect may be performed by the image display device. For example, when the action effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) is executed, a character is displayed on the image display device, and the character is selected by lottery or the like from a plurality of types each time the effect effect is executed. At the same time, by making the selection ratio of each character different depending on the set value that is set, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is for a character of a specific type to appear when performing effect production. It may be. By doing so, since the set value suggestion effect is performed when the effect effect is executed, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
Note that the gaming machines having the characteristic portions 10F(2) to (9) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 10F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 10A(A) described above.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 11F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 11A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 sets the valid period of the electric-chu open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state). Stop the clocking and restart the clocking of the valid period of the power cable open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Variable display (variable display of special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol, variable display of small symbol) different from the normal variable display means can be executed,
Correspondence display capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to a variable display different from the normal variable display means when a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed. Display means (production control CPU 120),
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated with the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) being in a visually difficult state.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to generate an unexpected effect and improve the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarting the time measurement of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restart the time measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
Note that the gaming machines having the characteristic portions 11F(2) to (9) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 11F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 11A(A) described above.

(Explanation of Invention Concerning Characteristic Section 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 12A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing),
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting) Based on the end of the state, restart the clocking of the effective period of the special map variation time timer),
further,
When a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed, a corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display. ,
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated with the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) being in a visually difficult state.

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to generate an unexpected effect and improve the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state And restarts the attacker release time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Restart the time measurement of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is specially determined based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the time when the next variable display is started. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restart the time measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
Note that the gaming machines having the characteristic portions 12F(2) to (10) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 12F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 12A(A) described above.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 13F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived. ,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
An ordinary variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that measures by a universal figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 13A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived. ,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
An ordinary variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 which measures the variable time of the universal figure timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the fact that the normal pattern variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer),
further,
Variable display (variable display of special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol, variable display of small symbol) different from the normal variable display means can be executed,
Correspondence display capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to a variable display different from the normal variable display means when a specific effect display (reach effect image (image related to battle effect)) is displayed. Display means (production control CPU 120),
And an effect production executing means (production control CPU 120) capable of executing an operation effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect) which acts on the correspondence display,
When executing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display (as shown in (8) to (10) of FIG. 14-5, the first change suggestion effect is executed). Due to this, the blackout effect is executed, and the movable object 01TM050 is operated with the reach effect image (image related to the battle effect) being in a visually difficult state.

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. In addition, by changing the visibility of the specific effect display when executing the effect effect, it is possible to generate an unexpected effect and improve the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarting the time measurement of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Restart the time measurement of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is specially determined based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the time when the next variable display is started. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restart the time measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
Note that the gaming machines having the characteristic portions 13F(2) to (10) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 13F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machines having the characteristic portion 13A(A) described above.

(Explanation related to the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature portions combined in this way or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to other feature portions.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening Switch 23 Count switch 30 Hit ball operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuits 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes variable display,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display when the specific effect display is displayed,
And an action effect executing means capable of executing an effect effect that acts on the correspondence display,
When performing the action effect, it is possible to change the visibility of the specific effect display,
further,
Suggestion production execution means capable of executing suggestion production suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A title notifying means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The game machine characterized in that the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.